Quarterlytics / Industrials / Staffing & Employment Services / Staffing 360 Solutions

Staffing 360 Solutions

staf · LSE Industrials
Claim this profile
Ticker staf
Exchange LSE
Sector Industrials
Industry Staffing & Employment Services
Employees 1001-5000
← All annual reports
FY2020 Annual Report · Staffing 360 Solutions
Sign in to download
Loading PDF…
S

t

a

f

f

l

i

n

e

G

r

o

u

p

p

l

c

A

n

n

u

a

l

R

e

p

o

r

t

a

n

d

A

c

c

o

u

n

t

s

2

0

2

0

0
2
0
2
s
t
n
u
o
c
c
A
d
n
a
t
r
o
p
e
R

l

a
u
n
n
A

Providing  
workforce  
solutions

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Who we are

Staffline is one 
of the UK and 
Ireland’s leading 
Recruitment  
and Training 
providers.

487

Onsite locations, skills centres
and offices across the UK & Ireland

Our purpose
Enabling the 
future of work by 
developing and 
deploying a highly 
flexible, robust and  
skilled workforce.

Our vision
To be a world class 
recruitment and training 
group, the clear market 
leader and trusted 
partner known for 
excellent service and 
integrity, driven forward 
by digital innovation.

Financial Highlights

£927.6m

Revenue
(2019 restated: £1,063.0m)

£(51.6)m

Reported (loss) before tax 
(2019 restated: £(44.4)m)

(71.2)p

Basic and diluted earnings per share 
(continuing operations)
(2019: (89.6)p)

£14.3m

Net debt
(2019: £67.9m)

Operational Highlights
•  Strong response to unprecedented surge in temporary 

recruitment food sector demand in March 2020

•  Conversely, demand from other sectors such as high street 

retail, automotive and manufacturing was diminished from the 
end of Q1

•  Sustained demand throughout 2020 in the logistics and driving 

segments as a result of the transition to online retail
•  After the easing of lockdown in the Autumn, the Group 

benefitted from a gradual recovery in demand for labour in 
non-food sectors

•  PeoplePlus was able to operate the majority of its services 
adhering to isolation measures but most funding support 
provided has been on a cost only basis

•  The Group experienced a strong Christmas peak with high 

demand from the Group’s food retail customers

Governance

1

£4.8m

Underlying* operating profit 
(2019 restated: £2.9m)

£9.3m

Underlying* EBITDA pre-IFRS 16**
(2019 restated: £7.0m)

5.0p

Underlying* diluted earnings per share
(2019 restated: (2.3)p)

£8.8m

Pre-IFRS 16 net debt
(2019: £59.5m)

Current Trading and Outlook
•  On 10 June 2021, the Group completed a placing, subscription 

and open offer, raising gross proceeds of £48.4 million. 
Additionally, the Group’s debt facilities were refinanced. The 
combined refinancing has transformed Staffline’s balance sheet

•  As previously announced, Q1 2021 trading was ahead of 

management expectations providing increased confidence in the 
full year

•  The employment market experienced a structural change in 
2020, with increasing levels of unemployment and demand 
shifting in favour of essential retail, online and e-commerce 
sectors, presenting a number of growth opportunities for Staffline

•  Cautiously optimistic with a growing new business pipeline, 
heightened by new customer wins such as Hello Fresh, a 
three-year contract extension agreed with Tesco and additional 
Government funding for training and retraining schemes, which 
PeoplePlus is well-positioned to benefit from

•  The Group has been right-sized and is now re-focused on its 

What’s inside

Strategic Report

01  Highlights 2020
02  At a Glance
04  Chairman’s Statement
06  Responding to Covid-19
08  Business Model
09  Strategy
10  Chief Executive Officer’s Review
14  Case Studies

- Recruitment GB
- Recruitment Ireland
- PeoplePlus

core sectors, which the Board believes Staffline can leverage to 
continue sustainable growth

22  Financial Review
28  Section 172 - Stakeholder engagement
30  Responsible Business
33  Principal Risks and Uncertainties 

Governance
37  Chairman’s Introduction
38  Board of Directors
40  Corporate Governance
47  Report on Remuneration 
51  Report of the Directors
53  Statement of Directors’ Responsibilities 
54  Independent Auditor’s Report 

Financial Statements

68  Consolidated Statement  
of Comprehensive Income
69  Consolidated Statement  
of Changes in Equity

70  Company Statement of Changes in Equity
71  Consolidated and Company Statements  

of Financial Position

72  Consolidated Statement of Cash Flows
73  Notes to the Financial Statements
112  Staffline Group plc Unaudited Five Year 

Summary of Financial Data

113  Company Details

* 

 Underlying results exclude goodwill impairment, amortisation of intangible assets arising on business 
combinations, reorganisation costs and other.

**  Earnings Before Interest, Tax, Depreciation and Amortisation.

Strategic ReportFinancial Statements 
 
 
2

Staffline Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2020

At a Glance

Promising 
progress in a 
difficult year

Recruitment GB

A multi-disciplined recruitment 
business, market leader in blue 
collar temporary staffing.

Revenue by sector

Food and related
Manufacturing
Retail
Driving
Other

2020

63%
5%
14%
12%
6%

2019

56%
15%
12%
12%
5%

100%

100%

For more information see
Recruitment GB on page 14

Recruitment Ireland

An award winning agency, 
providing end to end recruitment 
solutions. Operating across  
20 industry sectors.

For more information see
Recruitment Ireland on page 18

•  377 customer onsite locations
•  Rejuvenating 16 high street branches 

throughout England and Wales

•  Recruitment process outsourcing (“RPO”) 
and managed service partner (“MSP”) 
expertise

•  Leading the way in cutting edge 

recruitment technology

Live candidates on our database

c.1.2m

Workers deployed every day (average)

c.37,000

Worker satisfaction level

84.3%

(2019:83.1%)

•  Branch network throughout the island  

of Ireland

•  Expanding permanent business with a 

focus on Executive Search

•  Developing Public Sector contracts in  
NI and ROI, supported by the creation 
of a bespoke medical division
•  Focus on greater penetration of 

Republic of Ireland market to increase 
market share

Workers deployed every day (average)

c.5,000

Market share in Northern Ireland

21%

Governance

3

Over 300,000

Number of people helped into work since 2010

•  Successful #FeedTheNation campaign 
placing 25,000 people back into work

•  Strong market leadership and 

reputation in its chosen sectors of skills 
and employability

•  Mutual opportunities with Staffline 
Recruitment to grow and deepen 
employer links

•  Awarded One Star accreditation from 

Best Companies

•  Sold the loss making Apprenticeships 

business

•  Opportunities in Government funded 
employment schemes set up as a 
response to the Covid-19 pandemic
•  Overhead costs reduced by c.13% year 

on year

Market share of skills support for  
the unemployed

47%

Bid win rate (by volume)

58%

Contract pipeline

c.£300m

PeoplePlus

We are a leading skills and 
employability business with a clear 
purpose to help people transform 
their lives, get jobs and keep jobs, 
and develop their careers. We work 
with employers to develop 
workforces of the future, and with 
central, local and devolved 
governments to support their 
economic and social policy 
agendas.

Revenue by sector

Skills
Justice
Employability
Social care 
Other

2020

22%
42%
23%
9%
4%

2019

33%
39%
19%
8%
1%

100%

100%

For more information see
PeoplePlus on page 20

Strategic ReportFinancial Statements4

Staffline Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2020

Chairman’s Statement

Promising 
progress in a 
difficult year

We successfully serviced  
our customer base and our 
business proved resilient 
despite the impact of 
Covid-19. Our teams have 
worked tirelessly to support 
our customers and ensure  
all of our workforce remain 
safe in a challenging 
environment.”

Introduction
Our focus for 2020 was to restructure the 
business and ultimately restore resilience 
and stability to the Group. The many 
initiatives implemented during the year 
included strengthening the balance sheet 
through a refinancing in June 2020, and a 
focus on cash, alongside improving the 
Group’s operational, financial and 
governance processes, in order to create a 
sustainable business for the future.

In the year ended 31 December 2020, the 
Group generated revenues of £927.6m and 
an underlying profit before tax of £0.7m.

Strengthening our balance sheet and 
improving cash generation were high 
priorities during the year. At the year-end, 
the Group had pre-IFRS 16 net debt of 
£8.8m, with average pre-IFRS 16 net debt 
throughout the year of £38.1m. The Group’s 
net debt postition benefited by £46.5m as a 
result of the Government’s VAT deferral 
scheme.

The global Covid-19 pandemic, which 
dominated much of 2020, impacted our 
overall performance to various degrees 
during the year. This resulted in some areas 
of the business benefitting markedly, such 
as temporary recruitment for the food 
sector, which experienced a significant 
uptick in demand in Q2 2020. I was 
extremely proud of the reaction and 
contribution of both our people and the 
business to the nation wide #FeedTheNation 
campaign. This initiative allowed the Group 
to utilise its significant food retail experience 
ensuring our customers were sufficiently 
staffed and stocked during the first national 
lockdown. In addition, our driving business 
benefitted from the e-commerce surge, as 
consumers transitioned to online shopping 
during the closure of non-essential retail.

By contrast, other sectors within the 
recruitment businesses, such as 
manufacturing, high street retail and 
automotive, were adversely affected during 
the year with the temporary nationwide 
shutdown of some of these industries. In 
addition, PeoplePlus experienced a loss of 
classroom delivery in the year, however, 
well-developed business continuity and 
resilience plans, together with digital 
operating models, meant that the business 
could continue to operate the majority of its 
services.

Governance

5

Where appropriate, we successfully 
transitioned to working remotely in March 
2020 and did so whilst achieving minimal 
business disruption. The Group also utilised 
the Government’s furlough scheme with 
certain of its permanent and temporary 
employees, and has benefitted from the 
deferral of VAT, as noted above.

The employment market underwent some 
structural changes in 2020 with 
unemployment rising significantly. This 
presents potential opportunities for 
Staffline, both in recruitment, as enterprises 
look to appoint temporary workers as 
opposed to permanent staff, and for 
PeoplePlus, as skills and training becomes 
higher priority in a bid to get more 
individuals back into employment.

Staffline entered 2021 with a business that 
has much stronger foundations from which 
to deliver a return to growth. This is already 
evident in our performance in Q1 2021, 
which was ahead of management 
expectations as we benefit from the 
structural changes in our business that were 
implemented last year. 

Board composition 
The Group’s Board of Directors was 
transformed during 2020 and our corporate 
governance processes strengthened 
significantly. I firmly believe we now have a 
strong team in place, both at board and 
senior management level, to lead our 
business through the next stage of its 
development.

I was delighted Albert Ellis took up the role of 
Group Chief Executive in October 2020 
having joined Staffline in March 2020 as 
Non-Executive Director. Albert has 
considerable experience within the 
recruitment sector, and we are already 
benefitting from his leadership. In addition, 
Daniel Quint, who joined Staffline as interim 
CFO in December 2019, became permanent 
from 1 February 2021. Daniel has been 
involved in a number of important 
workstreams since joining the Group and I 
am very pleased he has taken up the role on 
a permanent basis.

Furthermore, we appointed two additional 
non-executive directors who joined the Board 
on 1 January 2021. Ian Starkey, who has 
significant audit and financial management 
experience is now Chair of our Audit 

Committee, and Catherine Lynch, who is a 
highly experienced HR director, is now Chair 
of our Remuneration Committee.

Annual General Meeting
Notice of the 2021 Annual General Meeting 
of Staffline Group PLC (“AGM”) will be 
published at the same time as the 2020 
Annual report. The AGM will be held at the 
offices of Liberum Capital Limited at 
Ropemaker Place, Level 12, 25 Ropemaker 
Street, London, EC2Y 9LY on 28 July 2021 
at 9:00 a.m. However, in light of the 
Covid-19 pandemic and HM Government’s 
measures to restrict travel and public 
gatherings in force, shareholders (other 
than the two necessary or to be present in 
person or by proxy to form a quorum) are 
not allowed to attend the meeting in 
person. The Q&A that would have taken 
place at the AGM will instead be made 
available on the investors page of the 
Staffline Group PLC’s website.

Summary and Outlook
The health, safety and wellbeing of all of our 
employees, suppliers and customers 
remained our top priority throughout 2020 
and into 2021. Our people are central to our 
success, and on behalf of the Board I would 
like to thank every one of our employees for 
their exceptional dedication and contribution, 
during what has been a particularly 
challenging time for every individual.

Despite the operational and broader 
macroeconomic challenges across 2020, 
Staffline delivered a robust performance in 
the year. Trading across the first three 
months of 2021 was strong and underpins 
our confidence in meeting expectations for 
the full year. Having now strengthened our 
financial position through the recent 
fundraising and debt refinancing, we truly 
believe we have a platform from which to 
deliver meaningful growth as we are already 
seeing a stronger pipeline developing across 
all of our divisions.

The passion and commitment throughout 
Staffline is very evident. We have a collective 
understanding of the significant opportunity 
that exists for our business, and myself and 
the Board believe we can capitalise on these 
strengths to deliver value for our 
stakeholders.

Ian Lawson
Chairman

Key events in the year 

Covid response - #FeedTheNation
March – June 2020
Created a nationwide “transition 
service” for displaced workers to 
enable as many of them as possible to 
transition into new jobs 

Board changes
January – April 2020
Reshaped the composition of the 
Board to lead the business through the 
next stage of its development

Interim CFO appointment
May 2020
Daniel Quint appointed to the Board

Refinancing
June 2020
Agreed a revised financing structure 
with the Group’s lenders

Rebranding Recruitment Ireland
July 2020
Formerly trading under the Grafton 
name, the Ireland business was 
formally re-branded to Staffline 
Recruitment Ireland 

New CEO appointment
October 2020
Albert Ellis appointed CEO

Capital markets presentation
November 2020
A virtual presentation highlighting 
Staffline’s strategic intent and the 
opportunities that exist for the Group

New Non-Execs announced
December 2020
Appointments of Ian Starkey and 
Catherine Lynch as Non-Executive 
Directors with effect from 1 January 
2021

Sale of Apprenticeships business 
December 2020
Completed the sale of the 
Apprenticeships business for a  
nominal sum

Strategic ReportFinancial Statements6

Staffline Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2020

Responding to Covid-19

Our priorities and key mitigating actions

Maintaining 
critical services 
for our 
customers

Keeping our 
people and 
customers  
safe

Protecting  
value  
for our 
shareholders

Ensuring the continuation of our critical 
services was of utmost importance. 
Every action taken made it possible to 
continue to provide effective workforce 
solutions to our customers. 

Staffline quickly implemented effective 
Work From Home and Health and 
Safety protocols to ensure our people 
and customers were protected from 
Covid-19 infection. 

In our response to Covid-19, Staffline 
acted in every instance in the best 
interest of our stakeholders, in recognition 
of our responsibilities and in respect of 
our strong customer relationships. 

Our Covid-19 Response 
Responding to Covid-19 and the 
subsequent workplace challenges it 
brought has been and continues to be a 
major focus for Staffline. The priorities 
outlined above demonstrate how our 
response was guided and demonstrates 
our people-centred response. 

We implemented Covid-19 Response 
Protocols for each section of the  
business which outlined steps to ensure 
our people and customers remained safe. 
These included: 
•  Work From Home made accessible  
and available for our office staff; 

•  Stringent application of social 

distancing and hygiene practices  
for on-site staff; 

•  Appropriate PPE provided to necessary 

• 

staff and customers; 
Investment in plastic screens and desk 
shields in appropriate locations; and 
•  Protocols for self-isolation and contact 

tracing; among many others. 

Every action taken to ensure the  
health and wellbeing of our people and  
customers also enabled us to continue  
to provide critical services for customers. 
While Covid-19 represented a hit to the 
employment market, Staffline maintained 
its reputation as the UK and Ireland’s 
leading Recruitment Agency by continuing 
to provide effective workforce solutions. 

Staffline Ireland’s Country Managing 
Director was appointed by Economy 
Minister as a Member of the Northern 
Ireland Executive’s Economic Advisory 
Group to aid economic recovery post 
Covid-19. Tina McKenzie chaired the 
Government appointed stakeholder group 
(encompassing government representatives, 
businesses and trade unions in Northern 
Ireland) tasked with writing a Health  
and Safety manual for employers and 
businesses dealing with Covid-19, the 
document was created by the Staffline 
team and published in April 2020.

In addition to maintaining our critical 
services Staffline was proud to run the 
#FeedTheNation campaign, supporting  
our UK supermarkets and essential 
services, demand for which increased 
dramatically at the beginning of the 
pandemic. Within two months of the 
beginning of the campaign 25,000 people 
had started in new “essential” roles with 
Staffline. Of this number, an incredible 
7,600 were completely new workers to 
Staffline who have moved from industries 
and roles badly affected by Covid-19. 

Our PeoplePlus training programmes were 
severely disrupted, with face-to-face and 
classroom training delivery impossible at 
the height of the pandemic. Where 
practical we transferred some of our 
courses onto our existing digital  
delivery platform. 

Additional Branch and Office Support
•  Video audits carried out in May and  

June of 2020

•  Each location audited against Covid-19 
Office Checklist and results shared with 
location managers and the Senior 
Management Team

•  Further random spot check audits 

carried out at 10 locations in December 
2020 to ensure measures are still in place 
and effective

•  Further spot checks carried out  
in 1st quarter of 2021 (March)

Additional Client Support
•  For existing Clients, Onsite Teams  

asked to complete the Covid-19 Client 
checklist

•  Submitted checklists audited by 

compliance teams with results logged on  
a Master Tracker

•  Results and Outstanding checklists were 
communicated to senior management 
•  For new clients, onsite teams are required 
to complete a Covid-19 Client Checklist 
before workers attend client workplaces

•  New checklists are approved by the 

compliance team as part of the standard 
procedure of authorising client work 
programmes

Governance

7

Covid-19 has re-shaped the dimensions of supply and 
demand in the UK labour market.

Labour demand in travel, hospitality and much of the 
retail market has collapsed. Labour demand in food 
production, food supply, supermarket retail, transport 
and delivery services is massively outstripping current 
supply.

We need, more than ever, to come together as a 
country to keep these essential services running and 
provide support for hard working employees who are 
doing everything they can to support customers during 
these challenging times.

Strategic ReportFinancial Statements8

Staffline Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2020

Business Model

The UK’s dominant provider of 
flexible blue-collar workers and a 
recognised national training provider

Inputs

What we do

Candidate network

Nationwide candidate networks for matching suitably skilled  
candidates with employers and wide-ranging skills and  
employability training programmes. 

Customer relationships/ 
strategic partnerships

Well established and long-standing relationships with several  
blue-chip customers, medium-sized businesses, and over ten year 
relationships with local and national government agencies. 

Technology

Our investment in technology and digital strategy outlines how we intend 
to make our clients more productive by harnessing the power of 
innovation. By exploiting emerging technologies, we will maximise our 
competitive advantage by driving efficiencies and implementing new 
recruitment models in order to deliver placement certainty.

Dedicated people

Our team brings a wealth of knowledge and years of experience to drive 
the continued success of Staffline. Through a positive culture and ethos 
our staff are dedicated to providing excellent service to candidates and 
customers alike.

Recruitment
Products and services
Resource, recruit and mobilise 
large-scale workforces to meet the 
ever changing needs of clients: 
matching peaks and troughs on a 
continual basis. Recruitment process 
outsourcing and recruitment solutions.

PeoplePlus
Products and services
Frontline public services including 
employment support, skills training, 
independent living, and prison 
education, as well as recruitment, 
training and development solutions  
to employers.

Underpinned by

Our culture and values

   See more on page 30

Sustainability focus

   See more on page 32

Robust risk management

   See more on page 33

High standards of 
corporate governance

   See more on page 37

Governance

9

Strategy

Our strategic  
priorities

Strategic priority

Actions

2020 progress

Operational
excellence

Governance

Cost base

Digital and
technology

Clients and
branding

Talent

•  Focus & simplicity
•  Clear leadership
•  Organisational design
•  Fulfilment
•  KPI reporting

•  Main Board
•  Group policies
•  Strengthen finance
• 
•  Robust framework

Internal audit & compliance

•  Headcount
•  Group overhead synergies
• 

Integration & balance sheet 
efficiencies

•  Profit & cash focus
•  Competitive positioning

IT estate shared services

• 
•  Tech supply chain
•  Cyber security & data
•  Automation & AI
•  Digital transformation

•  Brand alignment
•  Leveraging existing clients
•  Focus on growth sectors
•  Growing sales pipeline
•  Cross-selling

•  Succession & leadership
•  Talent attraction & retention
•  Productivity
• 

Incentives & compensation

Well positioned for growth following 
early delivery of the turnaround plan 
and new focus on core capabilities. 

Board composition transformed and 
corporate governance processes 
strengthened. Head of Internal  
Audit appointed.

Restructuring programme yielded 
significant reduction in administrative 
headcount and associated overhead. 
Surplus leasehold properties exited.

Continued investment in embedded 
digital technology including “chatbot” 
development, facial recognition 
capability and predictive analytics  
for clients.

Irish businesses adopted the Staffline 
branding across the island. Building 
upon long established relationships 
with strong contract base and future 
opportunities.

Prompt and imaginative solutions 
provided to clients in response to the 
Covid-19 pandemic. Strengthened 
online, in-house training and 
development programmes.

Strategic ReportFinancial Statements10

Staffline Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2020

Chief Executive Officer’s Review

Right-sized business 
focused on core 
capabilities

There is no question that 
2020 was impacted by  
the global Covid-19 
pandemic, driven by the 
associated government 
restrictions, and the social 
and business trends that 
subsequently emerged.”

Introduction
I joined the Board in March 2020 as a 
Non-Executive Director, at a time when  
the Group was facing significant internal 
and external challenges. Having seen 
Staffline Group’s strengths and potential 
opportunities, I was pleased to accept the 
position of Chief Executive Officer in 
October 2020.

Clearly, Staffline’s 2020 performance was 
impacted by the global Covid-19 pandemic, 
driven by the associated government 
restrictions, and the social and business 
trends that subsequently emerged. Our first 
priority throughout, has been the safety and 
wellbeing of our workforce. Those able to, 
were seamlessly transitioned to a home 
working environment, and those who 
remained active across our customers’ 
premises were provided with support, as 
Covid-secure procedures were implemented. 
Staffline’s response to the pandemic across 
the Group has been outstanding and this 
has only been made possible by the 

tremendous collective effort of all our 
people, for which I am extremely 
grateful. My thoughts also go out to 
those who have suffered through 
Covid-19, either directly or by the loss 
of friends or family.

In terms of trading, H1 2020 was 
significantly impacted by the 
pandemic with a sharp decline in 
demand across our three divisions 
– Recruitment GB, Recruitment 
Ireland and PeoplePlus. However, 
certain initiatives implemented in the 
first half to improve the Group’s 
operational, financial, governance 
and board profile, resulted in an 

Governance

11

improvement in revenues, underlying 
operating profit, working capital and net 
debt in the second half of 2020. 

Overall, the Group delivered a creditable 
performance in 2020, generating revenues 
of £927.6m and underlying operating  
profit1 of £4.8m, which, as announced in 
January 2021, was ahead of 
management’s expectations. In addition, 
as at 31 December 2020, the Group  
had pre-IFRS 16 net debt2 of £8.8m  
(2019: £59.5m), with average pre-IFRS 16 
net debt throughout the year of c.£38.1m 
(2019: c.£85.2m), which was a significant 
improvement against expectations. This 
was driven by the £46.5m benefit from  
the Government’s VAT deferral scheme  
and management actions to reduce 
outstanding debtor days, generating 
c.£10.0m of cash.

In temporary recruitment, as previously 
highlighted, the Group experienced an 
increase in levels of demand in March 2020 
during the first national lockdown across the 
food, driving, logistics and e-commerce 
sectors, with this surge in demand 
normalising later in the year. Certain other 
sectors such as manufacturing, high street 
retail and the automotive industries were 
more challenging with demand across the 
travel, leisure and aerospace industries 
continuing to be suppressed. Retail and 
hospitality were volatile throughout the 
year, with easing of restrictions in the 
summer benefitting these industries, 
followed by regional lockdowns in the 
second half of the year causing further 
disruption. In addition, the Group’s 
permanent recruitment business declined 
sharply in H1 2020 but saw some recovery in 
the latter part of the year.

Despite the national lockdown in November 
and restrictions in December, the Group still 
experienced a strong Christmas trading 
peak, with significant demand from the 
Group’s food retail customers. Furthermore, 
e-commerce and logistics experienced a 
very strong trading period as a result of the 
accelerated nationwide behavioural shift to 
online retail.

1  Underlying operating profit before goodwill 

impairment, amortisation of intangible assets 
arising on business combinations, reorganisation 
costs and other non-underlying costs.

2  Net debt is stated before unamortised debt issue 

costs.

The PeoplePlus division was also adversely 
impacted by the pandemic, with training 
programmes disrupted or delayed and the 
majority of services transitioned to 
predominantly digital delivery with funding 
support largely on a cost only basis. As part 
of a broader restructuring of the Group, 
PeoplePlus successfully completed the 
disposal of its Apprenticeships business in 
December 2020, enabling the division to 
re-focus on its core employability and adult 
skills capabilities. I am pleased to report 
that PeoplePlus continued to recover during 
the year and reported an underlying 
operating profit in H2 2020 compared to a 
loss in the first half.

As the pandemic spread, we took decisions to 
implement new and safer ways of working. 
This ensured that we were able to continue to 
deliver our services, navigating the new 
macroeconomic landscape whilst adjusting 
the working environment – in many cases in 
consultation with our customers – to ensure 
our employees both permanent and 
temporary remained safe at work. 

We have entered 2021 in a much stronger 
position than a year earlier as a result of the 
significant changes we have implemented 
across our business. Despite the ongoing 
Covid-19 pandemic, and as announced in 
our trading update in April 2021, trading in 
the first quarter of 2021 was relatively 
strong, and coupled with our recent 
refinancing, we enter the second half of 
2021 with a sense of cautious optimism. 

Restructuring 
As highlighted in the Chairman’s statement, 
the Group implemented a comprehensive 
restructuring programme during 2020. A 
key priority of this was to improve the 
quality of our reporting and governance 
across the Group. This, alongside a 
strengthening of our Board, is coming to 
fruition, as we seek to futureproof Staffline 
for sustainable long-term growth. Alongside 
these changes, the Group refinanced its 
bank facilities in June 2020, ensuring the 
business had sufficient working capital to 
support our day-to-day activities. The 
combined debt and equity refinancing in 
June 2021 completed the exercise to 
strengthen the balance sheet.

Elsewhere, we have changed our 
organisational structure, streamlining 
divisional reporting and ensuring that  
we are focused on our core activities. In 
addition, we have sought to right-size our 
business, which has included rationalising 

both our people costs and property estate, 
the disposal of a non-core business, 
alongside seeking supply chain synergies  
by aligning our new group structure with our 
market leading IT capabilities and solutions. 
These changes delivered c.£15.0m of 
annualised cost savings.

One of the most exciting strategic 
transformations has been our shift in focus 
to core complementary services packaged 
together in a portfolio, with professional 
recruitment and permanent placements  
a key driver of margin improvement and 
cash generation. 

As a management team, we believe that 
Staffline is now in a much more resilient 
position and our renewed focus on our core 
capabilities will, in time, improve customer 
retention and ultimately lead to greater 
levels of cross-selling opportunities across 
the Group. 

Responsible business
Staffline is a purpose-led organisation with 
a long successful track record across both 
recruitment and training activities. With 
sustainable employment one of the most 
desired objectives across society, Staffline 
provides the solutions to not only connect 
skilled people to companies, but also to help 
individuals develop their skills and careers. 
Our purpose is to bring together skilled 
people to build better organisations for  
the future. 

We impact individuals’ lives in a number  
of ways, including providing temporary 
employment to c.40,000 blue collar workers 
a day, enabling them to work flexibly,  
and easily change their career focus.  
We had particular success through our 
#FeedTheNation campaign in March 2020, 
providing employment in the food 
production and logistics sectors for over 
25,000 displaced workers. We work to help 
people transform their lives, get jobs and 
keep jobs, and develop their careers. 

A number of the services that Staffline 
provides are specifically to assist those in 
society’s most difficult situations. We 
provide c.20,000 prisoner learners with not 
only the skills to find work, but also life skills 
such as parenting advice. In addition, our 
WayOutTV solution is watched by a further 
50,000 prisoner learners across the UK. We 
are also one of the largest providers of 
independent living in the UK, helping 
vulnerable individuals’ stay in their homes 
for longer. 

Strategic ReportFinancial Statements12

Staffline Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2020

Chief Executive Officer’s Review continued

We have also created a social recruitment 
model which connects employers with 
individuals who might otherwise struggle to 
find work, with corporates such as Amazon 
and Tesco utilising this model. In addition, 
we work closely with individuals who want to 
exit long-term employment and set up their 
own business giving them the advice and 
skills necessary to do so. 

Our goal is to truly embed Environmental, 
Social and Governance (“ESG”) targets 
across our business and we have been 
building out our strategy in this regard. By 
focusing on these three key areas we believe 
we can have the most impact across our key 
stakeholders and are currently introducing 
new targets to increase accountability 
across the business. We are committed to 
helping to build a sustainable future for 
society, and the unprecedented events of 
this year have strengthened our resolve. 
With the anticipated rise in unemployment 
anticipated in the coming months as a result 
of the pandemic, we believe Staffline’s 
purpose will become more important than 
ever before. 

Operational review
Recruitment GB
The Recruitment GB division was set up well 
to handle the challenges presented by the 
Covid-19 pandemic. Over 60% of the 
division supports the food and food logistics 
sector, and growth in demand in this sector 
increased by 10% versus 2019. As a result of 
the accelerated investment in the division’s 
digital technology and intelligent 
automation, such as the Recruiter Chatbot, 
“Flin”, integrated with the Group’s candidate 
database management system, Staffline 
was well-placed to ensure that it could 
deliver fulfilment levels against challenging 
timescales. We were also able to leverage 
the benefits of the wider Staffline Group as 
we jointly developed the #FeedTheNation 
programme. 

As lockdowns eased during the year, 
Recruitment GB’s Recruitment Procurement 
Outsourcing (“RPO”) division, Datum, 
supported house builders and construction 
clients. Additionally, Recruitment GB’s 
professional permanent recruitment 
businesses, Omega, in England and Wales 
and Brightwork, in Scotland, helped to 
source engineering and technical 
specialists. The business successfully 
supported its essential food, retail and 
logistics customers as the country shifted 
ever more to online delivery models.

Following a strategic review, the business 
gave notice to exit low margin contracts, the 
most significant of which was 2 Sisters Food 
Group. New business and organic growth 
was secured in exciting sectors such as 
digital and online food delivery businesses, 
with Ocado and Hello Fresh being just two 
examples. A number of Recruitment GB’s 
core customers also agreed extended 
contract terms in 2021 as a result of the 
successful support during a very 
challenging 2020.

Recruitment Ireland
After a positive Q1 2020, during which 
Recruitment Ireland delivered underlying 
operating profit of £0.7m on revenue of 
£33m, management acted quickly to 
counteract the effects of the Covid-19 
outbreak on its core markets. Decisive action 
was taken in respect of overheads, enabling 
this division to remain profitable for the 
remaining nine months of the year, despite a 
fall in demand and the severe and extended 
lockdown implemented in the Republic of 
Ireland. Pleasingly, Recruitment Ireland 
maintained margins of 8.7% for the year, 
despite significant industry-wide challenges 
in certain sectors such as non-food 
manufacturing and a fall in permanent 
recruitment throughout the summer. 

The division maintained its position as market 
leader in Northern Ireland, with over 21% 
market share, and is now the second largest 
recruitment agency on the island of Ireland. 
Recruitment Ireland had new business 
success during 2020, including adding 
customers Finnebrogue, the artisan food 
producer, and Liberty IT, the technology 
business. In addition, the business supplied 
Tesco with contingent retail staff, secured 
additional business with the Northern Ireland 
Civil Service and was awarded a place on 
the Nightingale Framework to support the 
Covid-19 response. 

PeoplePlus
PeoplePlus adapted quickly to the impact of 
the Covid-19 pandemic, deploying its 
business continuity plans successfully with 
all services maintained. Customers and 
learners were supported by market leading 
digital services that had been developed 
prior to the pandemic and were further 
enhanced during this period. In a monitoring 
visit of PeoplePlus’ educational services in 
England in late 2020, Ofsted noted the 
support this approach had provided to 
learners. The impact of lost classroom 
capacity in both adult education and prison 

services was, however, significant, partly 
recovering in the summer of 2020, before 
reducing again as further local and national 
lockdowns occurred.

The fixed cost nature of the business model 
resulted in a loss in the first half of the year. 
With much reduced capacity and declining 
revenues, the leadership team implemented 
a transformation of the business which 
included focusing on core services and 
reducing the overhead base significantly, 
whilst changing the delivery model to a mix 
of online digital as well as traditional 
in-person learning.

This transformation coincided with the 
emergence of rising unemployment as a 
defining factor in the economy and led to a 
strategic refocus of the PeoplePlus division. 
PeoplePlus disposed of the majority of its 
Apprenticeship business in December 2020 
to support this strategic pivot. The 
Chancellor’s “Plan for Jobs” created a 
significant pipeline of new public sector 
funding in these core markets, including 
investments in traineeships, a long-term 
unemployed programme, “Restart”, and 
further adult education budget. 

The Group announced on 2 June 2021 that 
PeoplePlus has secured three significant 
contracts with two of the UK’s leading 
outsourcing providers within the Restart 
programme. 

Looking ahead, PeoplePlus, with its leading 
market positions and reputation for high 
performance, is well positioned across a 
number of opportunities. Therefore, bid 
disciplines will remain an important part of 
PeoplePlus’ sustainable growth strategy. 

The recruitment landscape and our 
offering
Given Staffline’s significant market position 
in blue collar recruitment and the strong 
reputation we have with our blue-chip client 
base for delivery and fulfilment, I firmly 
believe we are ideally placed to benefit from 
the full recovery of the UK and Ireland 
economies.

The UK is still considered to be the world’s 
third largest recruitment market, accounting 
c.10% of the global $498 billion in global 
staffing revenues, with the UK contributing 
c.$51.9 billion and the Republic of Ireland, 
$2.5 billion3 pre-pandemic. Despite the 
ongoing uncertainty and economic impact of 
Covid-19, the UK recruitment market has 

 
Governance

13

proven overall to be highly resilient in the last 
twelve months. The recruitment market has 
also historically proven to return to early 
growth quite rapidly post a crisis or recession 
versus other sectors, and our focus has been 
to ensure that we are optimally placed to 
capitalise on this potential increase in the 
second half of 2021 following the vaccine 
rollout in the UK.

Prior to the pandemic, we operated within a 
tight labour market across wide and diverse 
sectors. These historic dynamics have now 
shifted into essential sectors, such as food 
and distribution, online retail and 
e-commerce. As a result, we have seen a 
significant increase in online activity and 
accelerated demand for logistics, 
warehouse and driving. This shift in 
demand, ultimately driven by the pandemic, 
appears to have permanently changed 
consumer behaviour, illustrated by the 
expansion of the networks and footprints of 
Hello Fresh and Ocado, which are just two 
of the Group’s customers. The pandemic 
has also negatively impacted travel, 
aerospace, hospitality (particularly in city 
centres and “on-the-go food”), high street 
retail and automotive and manufacturing.

Whilst the global uncertainty relating to the 
pandemic continues, we are pleased to see 
the global roll-out of vaccination 
programmes worldwide. However, whilst we 
have adapted at pace to new levels of 
demand, so long as the impacts on the 
macroeconomic environment persist, we 
expect to see some continued volatility in 
our markets. There has also been a seismic 
shift in working practices as a result of 
Covid-19 and we believe many businesses 
will be adopting these for the long term.

Given our market position, we are confident 
that we are well-placed to capitalise on the 
new world of work, and so are investing in 
key areas that we believe will drive future 
growth. We remain committed to investing 
in digital technology to improve our 
customer and candidate experience, 
providing assurance and transparency, and 
with the use of our market leading data, 
also providing insights and identifying 
labour trends, which will further embed our 
valued customer relationships. 

Strategy 
As already noted, I took up the role of CEO 
in October 2020, and alongside the 
executive management team, we have 
focused on creating a sustainable business, 
with our strategy underpinned by the 
following key priorities, as outlined in our 
capital markets presentation in November 
2020, which are:
1.  Operational excellence – focusing on 
simplicity, leadership, strong processes, 
organisational design and implementing 
performance measurement through KPIs.

2.  Governance –  developing a dynamic 
and skilled Board, aligning Group 
polices, strengthening the finance and 
internal audit function and ensuring a 
robust governance framework. 

3.  Cost base – right-sizing the business, 

including identifying synergies in shared 
services, property utilisation and supply 
chain and scale economies, to underpin 
our competitive position in the market.

4.  Digital and technology – bringing 
together the IT estate under one 
leadership team, the appointment of a 
Group CIO and driving forward 
intelligent automation and a strong 
digital platform, whilst strengthening the 
Group’s business continuity 
infrastructure.

5.  Clients and branding –  aligning the 
Group’s brands and brand values and 
upgrading existing client relationships by 
investing in relationships and building 
key strategic partnerships. Driving 
organic sales as a key priority, whilst 
leveraging the significant opportunities 
to increase cross-selling across the 
Group.

6.  Talent – ensuring market leading 

attraction, retention and compensation 
policies are in place, introducing 
performance and productivity 
measurements combined with 
competitive incentive and reward 
schemes both short and long term.

Stakeholders
Due to our position and the breadth of our 
business coverage in terms of sectors, we 
have a wide range of stakeholders from 
governments, consumers, through to our 
employees, business partners, shareholders, 
the community and environment. These 
relationships are all critical to us as we 
deliver against our Purpose, Vision and 
Values – to build and develop the most 
reliable integrated workforce in the country 
and be the leading creator of opportunities, 

jobs and new ideas in the employability, 
skills and justice sectors. We work hard to 
engage with all our stakeholders and to 
create a balance of long-term value for 
each through our strategy. An overview of 
how the Board has fulfilled its duty, as set 
out in Section 172 of the Companies Act 
2006, to promote our long-term success, 
while considering the interests of our 
stakeholders and our impact on the 
community and environment, is explained 
on pages 28 to 29.

Outlook
Our initial view, which was taken in spring 
2020, was that the pandemic would create 
sustained and significant volatility in 
staffing demand, creating new growth 
sectors whilst impacting others. This has 
proven to be correct, and we anticipate 
some uncertainty ahead in several of our 
markets. Despite this, the Group delivered a 
robust performance in 2020 and has 
undergone some fundamental changes 
which have positioned it for future growth 
as we benefit from the resurgence in our 
core markets. Our new strategy so far has 
proven successful, and we will continue to 
drive the Group forward in the coming 
period towards our long-term ambitions. 

Results for the year so far have been strong 
and all three divisions are expected to 
achieve market expectations for the full year, 
with a key assumption being that economic 
growth returns in the second half of the year 
following the easing of lockdown, and the 
successful rollout of the vaccination 
programme. In addition, our recent equity 
fundraise of £48.4 million of gross proceeds, 
and debt refinancing, provides us with a 
renewed platform to capitalise on the 
opportunities that exist for our businesses.

Over the coming year, we will continue to 
invest in our people, data, technology, and 
our go-to market strategy, leveraging the 
power of our platform to reduce the cost of 
customer and candidate acquisition. Our 
current objective remains to continue 
winning market share, working towards our 
ultimate goal of becoming the number one 
talent provider across our chosen markets.

Once again, I would like to thank both our 
temporary and permanent employees for 
their significant contribution, in what was a 
challenging year for the Group.

1   Underlying operating profit before goodwill impairment, amortisation of intangible assets 
arising on business combinations, reorganisation costs and other non-underlying costs.

2   Net debt excludes transaction costs of £0.3m (2019: nil).
3   Staffing Industry Analysts 2019 report.

Albert Ellis
Chief Executive Officer
21 June 2021

Strategic ReportFinancial Statements14

Staffline Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2020

Case Studies

Recruitment GB

Perfectly 
placed

Thank you for ensuring the 
execution of a successful 
Valentine’s Day peak, the 
biggest peak that MM Flowers 
has delivered in its history.
We look forwards to your 
continued support in delivering 
Mother’s Day 2021.

Please pass our thanks on to 
the rest of the Staffline team”

Richard Brannam
Operations Director

Frank Atkinson
Managing Director,  
Recruitment GB

We remain amongst the largest players,  
and on a pure blue collar basis remain the 
biggest by some margin.

Using our size, scale and innovation to meet huge demands

Background
MM Flowers provide flowers to Tesco, 
Co-Op and M&S as well as M&S Online and 
other dot.com flower businesses. We also 
partner with MM’s sister companies AM 
Fresh and AMK Fresh. Together this group 
of companies have multiple modern 
facilities in the East, including a purpose-
built factory in Peterborough which opened 
in May 2020.

We have been providing services to them 
for ten years, supporting their 
unprecedented year on year growth.

Challenge
One of the most challenging tasks we have 
is to supply their needs at MM Flowers due 
to the nature of their demand. MM Flowers 
use our services to ensure that they have 
the workers when they need them.

Under normal circumstances the MM 
Flowers facility will pick and pack in the 
region of 150,000 cases of flowers per 
week. For Valentine’s Day and Mother’s 
Day, this increases to 400,000 cases per 
week, that’s an uplift of 266% over a very 
short time.

To put this into perspective, for the 
Christmas flower peak they will need  
650 workers a day. This will reduce to  
250 during January and then increase to 
900 for Valentine’s Day. Again, a reduction 
follows to normal levels for a few weeks and 
then the site will build up, over a three-
week period, to 1,100 workers for the 
Mother’s Day peak.

All the workers require basic skills; however, 
we need to support similar uplifts with 
workers with specialist skills such as Pallet 
Truck Operators and Reach Truck Drivers.

Solution
To fulfil their requirements, we use our size 
and scale to find workers both locally and 
further afield. During the Mother’s Day 
peak, we will have workers from Leicester, 
Huntingdon, Lincoln, Boston, King’s Lynn, 
Thetford, Newmarket, Cambridge, 
Kettering and Bedford. This is supported  
in the East from our own transport solution. 
We have our own fleet of vehicles which 
includes 16-seater minibuses through to  
70 seat coaches, this ensures the right 
vehicle is used for transportation. 

Governance

15

We’re able to use this to react quickly and 
transport workers to site if required or help 
us stagger worker return journeys if shifts 
finish at different times. In addition to this 
we have strong relationships with several 
transport providers throughout 
Northamptonshire, Bedfordshire and 
Cambridgeshire to ensure we’re able to 
quickly increase the fleet size for planned / 
unplanned peaks in volumes. With multiple 
pick-up points, our transport solution is a 
convenient way to travel to and from work 
for our workers.

We use multiple methods of attraction.  
Our first point of contact is with workers 
who have worked there before. Returning 
workers already know the layout of the 
facility and are more productive from  
day one.

Our next course of action is to mine our 
other locations in the region. Usually the 
increase at the site is matched with a 
downturn in work at several other local 
sites allowing us to smoothly transition 
workers across the sites. For example,  
we use experienced workers from a major 
supermarket distribution centre in Bedford 
as their peaks are decreasing when the 
flowers peaks increase. 

smartphone, tablet or computer to apply 
for work, arrange interviews and when 
working, access rotas and pay slips. When 
assigned and in work, our workers use our 
industry leading employee engagement 
tool “Have Your Say”. Have Your Say 
ensures worker satisfaction is measured “in 
the moment” allowing us to act on issues 
immediately resulting in industry leading 
levels of staff satisfaction and retention.

New candidates are the next strand  
in our recruitment. We have successfully 
managed joint branded Facebook 
campaigns for MM. For example, one of our 
adverts was seen 345,933 times in people’s 
feeds. The reach means it showed in 
people’s timelines 118,464 times. This 
resulted in 2,670 clicks of the 
advertisement. The click is the first stage of 
our online application process.

From this point Flin, our always on, always 
working chatbot took them through some 
pre-screening questions. The questions 
allow for further selection or de-selection. 
It’s better to have candidate say “no” now 
rather than halfway through their first shift.

Candidates create a secure profile on 
Staffline Universe, this profile remains with 
them through their working journey with 
Staffline. This means that candidates and 
workers can access their profile using a 

All the candidates that succeed through 
pre-screen stage with Flin are then 
contacted by our Central Resourcing team, 
where they are booked into a face-to-face 
interview and site tour with our Onsite 
teams. At the interview we use our unique 
Scan, Check, Start smartphone app to 
instantly verify a worker’s right to work via 
their biometric passport or ID against the 
very latest Home Office rules. This provides 
our clients with an exceptional level of 
comfort in the fact that all our workers 
have the right to work in the UK and are 
fully compliant.

Results
These methods have ensured that we have 
continually matched the client’s 
requirements. Valentine’s Day 2020 was a 
great success, 4,598 shifts required over 
seven days, delivering 99% fulfilment 
across this peak period.

Strategic ReportFinancial Statements16

Staffline Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2020

How the Staffline Group works together in partnership to provide 
complementary services for Hermes. 

Hermes is a global service provider for 
trade and logistics services. The company 
is a leading specialist for trade related 
services and the partner of a constantly 
growing number of internationally 
operating companies, multi-channel 
retailers and ecommerce businesses. 

Our relationship with Hermes commenced 
in 2018, when the company won, through a 
highly competitive tender, the master 
vendor position to supply all indirect 
(temporary) labour across 35 national 
locations. Hermes use more than 3.65 
million hours of indirect labour each year, 
with a 30% annual growth potential. 

The aim of the tender process was to 
reduce the number of suppliers from 109, 
which in turn will reduce the number of 
commercial agreements providing 
substantial indirect savings through 
reduced administration and management. 

Staffline was chosen because of our 
existing national footprint of more than 
400 locations, the ability to provide both 
onsite and off-site account management, a 
technology solution for ordering, payroll, 
and recruitment of all white collar and 
permanent recruitment including uplifts in 
contact centres through our brand Omega 
as well as technical, engineering and 
executive search through Omega and 
Techsearch. Hermes have accessed added 
value initiatives in training, apprenticeships 
and recruitment process outsourcing 
models through PeoplePlus and DatumRPO 
as well as the right commercial solution. 

The Staffline master vendor model provides 
Hermes with all their hourly requirements 
and full management of the second-tier 
providers through one partner, one price, 
one invoice, one report and an improved 
way of working. 

Governance

17

Compliance is assured through a robust 
process of scheduled physical and  
online supplier audits ensuring suppliers 
comply with all legislative and contractual 
obligations.

Through Staffline Group collaboration, 
despite requirements increasing by 30%, 
we have reduced the number of suppliers 
from 109 to just nine. We have completed 
apprenticeship training for 80 workers, 
including 30 drivers, increasing skills  
and career opportunities. This has all  
been completed whilst providing full 
compliance and visibility which protect the 
client brand.

In 2019, it was well recognised that the UK 
labour market was tightening, Brexit was 
imminent, and the UK unemployment rate 
was at its lowest since the 1970s. Tried and 
tested recruitment techniques used by the 
industry were not having the desired 
impact with a new evolution of candidates 
leading the market. 

PeoplePlus decided it needed to innovate, 
to think differently, and use its scale for 
good, by focusing on how it could support 
employers and a wider network of training 
providers to connect candidates to funded 
training and therefore vacancies in a more 
innovative and coordinated way. Having a 
long track record in successful master 
vendor delivery through Work Programme, 
PeoplePlus identified a need to address this 
challenge differently. PeoplePlus designed 
the Intelligent Routeway Framework (IRF) 
Master Vendor Model (“MVM”). 

The MVM has the ability to remove barriers 
to recruitment usually found by training 
providers by providing a way to access 
employer vacancies and forecasting 
information, whilst also providing a totally 
unique and national service to support 
employers to access funded training to 
support their recruitment requirements.  
For Hermes, this meant collaboratively 
working with Staffline who can provide  

the necessary forecasting information  
and interview schedules. The MVM enables 
training providers to run courses with 
greater intelligence and job focus and to 
equip candidates with the skills required to 
meet employer requirements supporting 
them into employment and for employers 
to have a one point of contact approach to 
benefitting from pre-employment service. 

In addition to the IRF, PeoplePlus is also 
delivering a Hermes specific apprenticeship 
programme designed to take learners from 
a car licence (category B) to an LGV licence 
(category C) and can be accessed by  
new starters or existing employees.  
The 12-month programme includes four 
CPC modules, supervised driving and  
final qualification. 

DatumRPO specialise in recruitment 
process outsourcing. The Datum models 
harness the capabilities of multiple 
temporary labour suppliers under a single 
platform. This is ideal for Hermes who have 
complex recruitment needs across multiple 
locations. The solution allows the client to 
retain the important supplier relationships 
that have been built up over time, which in 
turn protects SME suppliers, allowing them 
to retain Hermes as a client. Datum 
manage the temporary requirements 
through a single point of contact. 

Strategic ReportFinancial Statements18

Staffline Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2020

Case Studies

Recruitment Ireland

Increasing 
market 
presence

Tina McKenzie
Group Managing Director,  
Ireland

Staffline Ireland’s portfolio of clients 
extends across all sectors, from public to 
private and SMEs to large multinationals.

Linden foods are a market leader within the Northern Ireland Fresh meat 
processing industry, sourcing and processing top quality Beef and Lamb.

Our account team worked closely with the 
team at Linden to develop our candidate 
attraction strategies and ensure we had a 
constant pipeline of suitably experienced 
candidates available for work. We worked 
hard through the pandemic to develop an 
online registration and interview process. 

Our Account team worked in the office 
throughout lockdown as key workers 
supporting the food Industry to better 
facilitate the resourcing activities we were 
undertaking. 

In recognition of the hard work of the team 
we were thrilled to receive the following 
endorsement from our client. 

Thank you for all your 
resourcing this year. Staffline 
has done exceptionally well in 
what was a difficult market 
out there. We have managed 
to grow our business on both 
sites and keep production 
filled with labour so a massive 
thanks on your focus in 
keeping Linden staffed and 
enabling us to drive forward 
with our plans.”

Nicola Purvis
Head of HR

As part of the Linden Food group they 
currently serve a wide range of retail 
multiples, their dedicated convenience 
food manufacturers, and the wider meat 
packing industry in the UK and Europe. 

Staffline has been proud to support  
Linden Foods for the past five years  
with the provision of quality temporary 
staff to both their Retail and Primal sites  
in Dungannon. 

The lead up to Brexit presented us with  
a number of challenges in sourcing staff 
for the site as we were faced with  
a tightening local labour market fuelled  
by reduced availability of migrant  
workers, fierce competition from other  
food manufacturers in the immediate  
area offering permanent opportunities and 
employment at record levels in Northern 
Ireland with unemployment levels sitting  
at 3.2 percent to include the economically 
inactive (Source NISRA labour force Survey). 

Linden were focused on growing their 
business and key to this strategy was 
guaranteed availability of quality 
temporary labour to help them flex up  
and down through peaks and troughs  
of demand. 

Staffline Recruitment is a 
great company to work for. 
I’ve been there nearly two 
years and always got lots of 
work. The Consultants are 
great at what they do! The 
team are fantastic. I’m 
looking forward to the future 
working for them.”

Wendy Brown
Band 2 Administrator
Northern Health Trust

Governance

19

Supporting our NHS

Staffline Ireland is a key supplier of temporary staff to the NHS in 
Northern Ireland and has enjoyed many years working in partnership 
with them across the province, but the provision of this service reached a 
pinnacle during the global pandemic in 2020. 

Our resourcing teams undertook all 
pre-employment checking and vetting, 
often working evenings and weekends  
to ensure a strong pipeline of suitably 
cleared and vetted candidates were 
available to support the Health Trusts  
as and when needed. 

As the pandemic continued, we began  
to see an increase in candidates working  
in this extremely pressurised and ever 
changing environment presenting with 
mental health issues, so we produced a 
number of resources including fact sheets 
and leaflets for our workers to ensure they 
had access to help when and where they 
needed it and implemented welfare calls  
on a regular basis to our NHS workers to 
ensure they were supported. 

In 2021 we continue to support the NHS 
here in Northern Ireland and are proud to 
have been able to play a part in providing 
this service in these unprecedented times. 

Covid-19 presented significant staffing 
challenges to the health service here in 
Northern Ireland on a number of fronts 
– Sickness within own core teams, huge 
surge in number of hospital admissions, 
increased hygiene procedures, and large 
numbers of core staff having to isolate or 
shield thus rendering them out of action. 

Staffline stepped up to the challenge and 
provided almost 2000 additional staff in 
the year to the NHS. These spanned across 
the fields of administration, including track 
and trace administrators, front line 
healthcare professionals, catering and 
domestic staff, ambulance staff and 
warehouse and logistics teams. Our public 
sector teams worked tirelessly throughout 
the year to ensure that the NHS 
requirements were met. Many of our staff 
from other divisions were redeployed to the 
public sector team to help with the huge 
increase in demand.

We harnessed the power of social media  
to ensure that we were able to reach a wide 
and varied audience with details of the 
roles and facilitated online information 
sessions to supply candidates with 
additional information and deal with any 
questions or concerns they may have had. 

Strategic ReportFinancial Statements20

Staffline Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2020

Case Studies

PeoplePlus

Focused on 
skills and 
employability

Simon Rouse
Group Managing Director, 
PeoplePlus

This has been a success and I 
have employed quality people 
in all areas to complement our 
growing team. It has been a 
big support for myself and  
we have a great working 
relationship with PeoplePlus.”

Alex Lacey
Manager, Bella Italia

PeoplePlus offers support and training  
to those who need it most

PeoplePlus aims to make a direct difference to the lives of one million 
people by 2022; they are already halfway to achieving this ambition, 
having supported over 500,000 people since 2018.

PeoplePlus is the UK’s leading outsourced 
provider of Employability and Adult 
Education, with 47% of the Skills Support 
market in the UK. PeoplePlus is well-
positioned, from its experiences with the 
Work Programme, the government’s largest 
employability policy initiative to date, to 
benefit from the post-Covid employability 
landscape. 

Last year saw over 19,000 people receive 
training and education from PeoplePlus.  
So far, we’ve supported over 500,000 
people since 2018 with the challenges 
they’ve faced in finding work and have 
found employment for nearly 200,000 
people across the UK. We already work 
with a number of national and regional 
employers, as well as partnering with many 
Local Authorities and Local Enterprise 
Partnerships to ensure that our training 
meets the needs of the jobs market and 
regional demands.

A significant proportion of people needing 
PeoplePlus’ help have been long-term 
unemployed, or who have learning or social 
difficulties. Here’s a spotlight on just one of 
the people we’ve supported this year.

Luwam came to the UK with her husband 
and two children five years ago as refugees 
from Eritrea in Eastern Africa. As her children 
had now started in school, Luwam’s 

Jobcentre Plus work coach thought doing a 
course with PeoplePlus would help her to 
develop personally and within the 
community.

PeoplePlus Dynamic Purchasing System 
courses not only concentrate on language 
barriers but look holistically at the needs of 
all the attendees; how they interact with the 
community, any facilities or services that 
may benefit them and making them feel 
more aware of possibilities and pathways 
moving forward.

Luwam enjoyed the course and was an 
active member, she was very keen to 
receive the support as she felt it was 
integral to her own and her family’s place 
in the community.

PeoplePlus worked with Luwam to develop 
her confidence and interview skills in order 
to apply for a warehouse position at JD 
Sports that would fit around her childcare 
responsibilities. Luwam was successful in 
the interview and secured the position. She 
said she loved her time on the course, and 
her confidence had grown immensely 
thanks to her tutor, Mo. Her husband even 
rang PeoplePlus, expressing his thanks, 
saying not only had the course had such a 
positive impact on Luwam, but it had 
helped him and their children, giving them 
the boost they needed to feel part of the 
community and at home in UK. 

Being able to move people into what, 
for some, is a totally new industry, 
and provide employment 
opportunities not only when 
Covid-19 was at a peak in the Spring, 
but as the months have gone on has 
been a huge boost to the North East 
area. I am confident that our 
relationship with PeoplePlus and the 
work we are doing together to 
support that national recovery will 
have an impact not just to an 
individual’s life but to the economy 
for years to come.” 

Alex Perkins
Workforce Engagement Programme 
Manager at Amazon 

Governance

21

PeoplePlus supports Amazon  
with recruitment for their new sites

PeoplePlus has worked with Amazon since 2016; originally providing  
them with apprenticeship delivery, but since 2019 they have become  
an employer on our Social Recruitment Framework (SRF). 

The synergy between PeoplePlus and 
Amazon was apparent with their desire  
to support local communities through 
employment of candidates from vulnerable 
backgrounds and the unemployed 
population, alongside wanting to educate 
and empower employees. 

The SRF worked alongside Amazon to 
design and contextualise an employability 
programme to support candidates on  
their journey from unemployment to a 
guaranteed interview and into a job.  
The courses focused on specific skills 
required to fulfil the role alongside 
supporting with soft skills. 

The SRF’s network of 37 Training Provider 
Partners provided a nationwide solution for 
Amazon who had previously worked with 
multiple training providers across 23 of its 
sites. The SRF provided Amazon with one 
point of contact for all the employability 
led programmes initially starting with eight 
sites, and the relationship soon grew, with 
Amazon choosing the SRF and PeoplePlus 
as their preferred employability solution.

During 2020 Amazon announced it was 
opening four new sites in the North East 
and East Midlands. PeoplePlus was chosen 
as the supplier outside of their direct hire 
recruitment and the SRF collaborated with 
its partner providers, Job Centre Plus and 
combined authority in the region to support 
with the training of 1000 candidates and 
the recruitment of 500 candidates for the 
new sites.

Across all of the Amazon sites for 2020  
the SRF and its partner network has 
delivered an Employability and Principles 
of Warehousing training qualification to 
over 1,700 people, preparing them for their 
new opportunities with Amazon and further 
supporting them to enhance their chances 
of employment. 66% of candidates 
interviewed were offered a job with 85%  
of those offered a role starting work with 
Amazon, which has seen over 500 people 
move into new employment.

PeoplePlus and Amazon are planning  
on working together on the training  
and recruitment for the new sites that  
Amazon will be opening in 2021.

Strategic ReportFinancial Statements22

Staffline Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2020

Financial Review

Strengthened balance 
sheet and improved 
control environment

A successful debt refinancing 
and a well supported equity 
raise leaves Staffline well 
positioned for future growth.”

Introduction
During what was an extremely challenging 
year nationwide, the Group encountered 
mixed market demands across its divisions. 
Overall, total revenue for the year of 
£927.6m (2019: restated £1,063.0m) was 
lower than the previous year by 12.7%. 

The Group comprises three divisions, 
namely, Recruitment GB, flexible blue-
collar recruitment; Recruitment Ireland, 
generalist recruitment; and PeoplePlus, 
adult skills and training provision.

Revenues in our Recruitment GB division 
declined by £(107.9)m or (12.8)%. Demand 
from customers varied significantly by 
sector depending on the effect of the 
Covid-19 pandemic on their businesses.  
In particular, demand from supermarket, 
logistics and on-line retail customers 
remained strong. The initial lockdown in the 
spring caused severe disruption to 
manufacturing and non-essential retail 
businesses from which they have not yet 
fully recovered. The division typically 
experiences a pre-Christmas peak in 
demand during Q4 and did so in 2020, 
particularly from the e-commerce and 
logistics sectors. Despite the effect of the 
various forms of lockdown across the 
country, Q4 2020 hours worked were 16.0 
million compared to 17.4 million  
in 2019, only an (8.0)% reduction. Revenue 
generated from temporary recruitment 
accounted for over 99% of total revenue. 

Governance

23

Underlying divisional performance and key performance indicators – continuing operations 

Recruitment 
GB  
2020 
£m

Recruitment 
Ireland 
2020 
£m

PeoplePlus 
2020 
£m

Group 
Costs 
2020 
£m

Total Group 
2020 
£m

Recruitment
GB
Restated
2019
£m

Recruitment
Ireland
2019
£m

PeoplePlus
Restated
2019
£m

Group 
Costs
2019
£m

Total Group
Restated
2019
£m

732.1

120.5

75.0

927.6

840.0

147.7

75.3

1,063.0

Revenue
Year-on-year revenue (decline)/

increase

(12.8)% (18.4)% (0.4)%

– (12.7)% (7.5)% 40.3% (30.0)%

Gross profit
Gross profit as a % of revenue

46.2
6.3%

17.9
10.5
8.7% 23.9%

–
–

74.6
8.0%

56.6
6.7%

15.6

15.3
10.6% 20.3%

–

–
–

(5.2)%

87.5
8.2%

Underlying operating profit/(loss) 
Underlying operating profit as a % 

4.2

1.6

1.6 (2.6)

4.8

4.6

4.3

(3.5)

(2.5)

2.9

of revenue

0.6%

1.3%

2.1%

Underlying operating profit as a  

% of gross profit

9.1% 15.2%

8.9%

Pre-IFRS16 net debt excluding 

unamortised transaction costs
Post-IFRS16 net debt excluding 
unamortised transaction costs

–

–

–

–

Hours worked by temporary workers 58.4m

6.7m

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

0.5%

0.5%

2.9% (4.6)%

6.4%

8.1%

27.6% (22.9)%

8.8

14.3

–

–

–

–

65.1m

68.6m

9.4m

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

0.3%

3.3%

59.5

67.9

78.0m

Comparative results have been restated to exclude the activities that were discontinued in 2020.

Gross profit generated from temporary 
recruitment accounted for 97% of the total, 
with the remaining 3% of gross profit 
generated from permanent recruitment. 

Revenues in our Recruitment Ireland 
division reduced by £(27.2)m or (18.4)% 
mainly due to the effects of the pandemic 
and the uncertainty related to Brexit. 
Revenue generated from temporary 
recruitment accounted for 99% of total 
revenue compared to 1% from permanent 
recruitment. Gross profit generated  
from temporary recruitment accounted  
for 91% of the total, with the remaining  
9% of gross profit generated from 
permanent recruitment. 

PeoplePlus revenues, excluding the 
Apprenticeships business sold during 2020, 
decreased by £(0.3)m. Whilst classroom 
training was severely curtailed, the division 
was quick to transition to online solutions, 
largely maintaining overall revenues 
compared to 2019.

The sales mix between the operating 
divisions was broadly unchanged over  
the year, with the recruitment businesses 
accounting for 92% of 2020 revenue  
(2019: restated 93%). The recruitment 
businesses contributed 76% of the Group’s 
gross profit (2019: 83%).

Overall gross profit decreased by (14.7)% to 
£74.6m (2019: restated £87.5m) with overall 
gross profit margin slightly lower at 8.0% 
(2019: 8.2%), which has been influenced by 
the sales mix, particularly in Recruitment 
GB. PeoplePlus achieved a gross margin of 
23.9% in 2020, which compares to 20.3%  
in 2019 (restated for the disposal of the 
Apprenticeships business), largely due to 
improved productivity following the 
restructuring programme during the year. 
The gross profit margin for Recruitment GB 
decreased to 6.3% (2019: 6.7%). This was 
principally due to the shift towards lower 
margin sectors such as food production, 
due to the pandemic, and also some 
increased costs for social distancing in the 
workplace.  

The increase in the National Minimum 
Wage in April 2020, from £8.21 to £8.72 per 
hour for over 25s, does not impact absolute 
gross profit but does negatively impact  
the gross margin percentage achieved and 
this dynamic will continue with increases  
in April each year. The gross profit margin 
for Recruitment Ireland reduced to 8.7% 
(2019: 10.6%) driven by the reduction  
in permanent recruitment business, which 
consistently achieves a gross margin  
of 100%. 

For continuing operations (excluding the 
exited Apprenticeships business), reported 
loss before taxation was £(51.6)m in 2020 
(2019: restated £(44.4)m). Notwithstanding 
the significant challenges faced in  
the year, underlying operating profit  
was £4.8m (2019: restated £2.9m). Total 
non-underlying charges on continuing 
activities before tax were £52.3m  
(2019: £42.3m), of which £45.3m were 
non-cash, and are described below. 
Finance charges were £7.3m (2019: £8.2m). 
This included £3.2m (2019: £3.2m) of 
non-underlying finance charges relating to 
the June 2020 refinancing of the debt 
facilities, also described below.

The underlying profit before tax on 
continuing operations for 2020 was £0.7m 
(2019: restated £(2.1)m). Underlying profit 
before taxation as a percentage of revenue 
was 0.1% (2019: restated (0.2)%). The 
reported underlying profit after tax on 
continuing operations for 2020 was £3.4m 
(2019 restated: £(1.1)m loss). 

Strategic ReportFinancial Statements24

Staffline Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2020

Financial Review continued

Non-underlying administrative charges 
In the reporting of its financial performance, the Group uses certain measures that are not defined under IFRS, the Generally Accepted 
Accounting Principles (“GAAP”) under which the Group reports. The Directors believe that these non-GAAP measures assist with the 
understanding of the performance of the business. These non-GAAP measures are not a substitute for, or superior to, any IFRS 
measures of performance but they have been included as a means of comparing performance year-on-year. 

Non-underlying items of income or expenditure are items that are non-recurring or of a particular size or nature such that they require 
separate identification. Non-underlying items are included in total reported results but are excluded from underlying results. These 
items can vary significantly from year to year and therefore create volatility in reported earnings which does not reflect the Group’s 
underlying performance. It should be noted that whilst the amortisation of intangible assets arising on business combinations has been 
added back, the revenue from those acquisitions has not been eliminated.

Non-underlying charges on continuing activities before tax amounted to £52.3m in 2020 (2019: £42.3m) as shown below. They include 
exceptional reorganisation, rationalisation and restructuring costs in 2020 of £4.0m relating principally to a rationalisation programme 
across all the divisions in order to reduce the number of properties occupied and reducing administration headcount, transaction costs 
of £0.5m related to the Group exploring strategic options, refinancing costs totalling £3.2m, a £9.2m charge for the amortisation of 
intangible assets arising on business combinations, a £35.3m goodwill impairment charge, and a share-based payment charge of £0.1m.

The charge in the year for amortisation of intangible assets arising on business combinations relates principally to the following 
acquisitions: Vital Recruitment (charge £3.2m: asset will be fully amortised by February 2023), Milestone (£1.0m charge: asset will  
be fully amortised by September 2020), Passionate about People (charge £2.3m: asset will be fully amortised by October 2023), 
Grafton (£1.3m: asset will be fully amortised by June 2023), Brightwork (charge £0.7m: asset will be fully amortised by April 2022).

Non-underlying charges – Continuing operations

Reorganisation, rationalisation and restructuring costs
Legal investigation professional fees
NMW remediation and financial penalties
Revised audit scope and increased audit fees
Transaction costs – business acquisitions and strategic options
Finance costs – refinancing arrangement fees and exit fees
Amortisation of intangible assets arising on business combinations
Goodwill impairment
Share-based payment charges (equity and cash-settled)

Total non-underlying charges before tax for continuing operations

2020 
£m

4.0
–
–
–
0.5
3.2
9.2
35.3
0.1

52.3

2019 
£m

3.7
1.0
 (0.7)
0.8
0.9
3.2
10.9
22.3
0.2

42.3

The Company has recognised a £7.2m impairment charge against its investments in People Plus £(6.9)m and £(0.3)m in the Employee 
Benefit Trust. 

Discontinued activities
On 1 December 2020, the Group sold its loss-making Apprenticeships training business for a nominal sum. The sale agreement required 
PeoplePlus to provide working capital support to the purchaser in the form of reimbursement of relevant salary costs incurred between 
December 2020 and March 2021, which will be repaid over twelve months commencing May 2021. 

The Apprenticeships business recorded an underlying operating loss of £(2.2)m for the year (2019: £(3.6)m), before reorganisation and 
exit costs of £(2.5)m (2019: £nil).

In addition, the Group is in active discussions to sell its subsidiaries in Poland to the incumbent management team. Consequently,  
the results of the Polish activities are deemed to be discontinued and the business is held for sale. The loss for 2020 was £(0.1)m before 
non-underlying costs of £(0.2)m.

Governance

25

The results of these businesses are as follows:

Revenue
Cost of sales

Gross profit
Administrative expenses

Underlying operating loss
Non-underlying costs

Operating loss
Tax credit

Loss for the period

2020 
Apprenticeships 
£m

7.2
(8.3)

(1.1)
(1.1)

(2.2)
(2.5)

(4.7)
0.8

(3.9)

2020 
Poland 
£m

1.0
(1.0)

–
(0.1)

(0.1)
(0.2)

(0.3)
–

(0.3)

2020
Total
£m

8.2
(9.3)

(1.1)
(1.2)

(2.3)
(2.7)

(5.0)
0.8

(4.2)

2019 
Apprenticeships 
£m

12.6
(13.6)

(1.0)
(2.6)

(3.6)
–

(3.6)
0.7

(2.9)

2019 
Poland 
£m

1.1
(1.1)

–
(0.1)

(0.1)
–

(0.1)
–

(0.1)

2019
Total
£m

13.7
(14.7)

(1.0)
(2.7)

(3.7)
–

(3.7)
0.7

(3.0)

Government support
The global Covid-19 pandemic created unprecedented disruption to the business. Consequently, a large number of our temporary 
workers and a much smaller number of administrative staff were placed on furlough at times throughout the year. The total support 
received in the year amounted to £31.4m.

In addition, the Group took advantage of the forbearance scheme for the deferral of VAT due between March and June 2020. The total 
deferral agreed with HMRC under the UK scheme amounted to £42.4m after offset of a Corporation Tax refund due in relation to the 
financial year 2018. Repayment of the balance is due to be paid in instalments, which commenced in June 2021. 

Taxation 
The total tax credit for the year of £3.1m (2019: restated £3.4m), which amounts to 6.0% (2019: restated 7.7%) of the loss for the year, 
relates to the movement of deferred tax balances. The Group has no current Corporation Tax liability in respect of either the current or 
prior years and as a result is anticipating a refund of amounts that were paid on account. An element of losses incurred during 2018 
will be set against taxed profits in previous years, which will also result in a refund. Remaining tax losses of £15.4m carried forward in all 
divisions have been recognised as a deferred tax asset.

The amortisation charge relating to intangible assets arising on business combinations is not deductible under UK corporation tax and 
is therefore added back to taxable profits. A deferred tax liability is recognised in respect of other intangible assets. This liability is 
reduced each year in line with the amortisation charge, giving rise to a deferred tax credit each year. No deferred tax is recognised on 
JSOP charges.

Earnings per share
Statutory basic and diluted loss per share on continuing activities were both (71.5)p (2019: both (89.6)p).

For the year the weighted average number of shares (basic) is 67,790,086 (2019: increased by 22,121,263). 

Removing the non-underlying charges, and their respective taxation impacts, results in underlying basic and diluted earnings per share 
on continuing activities both being 5.0p (2019: restated, both (2.4)p loss).

Improving internal controls
The Board has continued with the implementation of enhanced control procedures and oversight and has appointed a Head of Internal 
Audit during the year. In addition, the Board has been further strengthened by the appointment of two Non-Executive Directors after 
the year-end.

Strategic ReportFinancial Statements 
 
 
 
 
26

Staffline Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2020

Financial Review continued

Statement of financial position, cash generation and financing
The Group’s total equity decreased by £(53.6)m (2019: £(6.7)m) 
over the year. This is as a result of the total comprehensive loss for 
the year of £(53.6)m, which included the goodwill impairment of 
£(35.3)m that was recognised in H1 2020 and amortisation of 
intangibles arising from business combinations of £(9.2)m.

The movement in net debt is shown in the table below. Movements 
in working capital include a decrease in trade and other 
receivables of £27.6m (comprising c.£17.6m due to the decline in 
trading volumes and c.£10.0m due to improved collection rates), 
and a decrease in trade and other payables and provisions of 
£22.8m, primarily due to a reduction in VAT liabilities due to lower 
trading volumes and payment timing.

The Group’s headroom relative to available committed banking 
facilities as at 31 December 2020 was £79.4m (2019: £43.7m) as 
set out below:

Cash at bank 
Receivables Financing Facility 

(“RFF”) unutilised

Overdraft facility unutilised
Committed revolving credit facility 

unutilised 

Banking facility headroom 

2020  
£m

24.5

54.9
–

–

79.4

2019 
£m

25.0

–
18.6

0.1

43.7

2020 
£m

(59.5)

2019  
Restated 
£m

(63.0)

Refinancing: Amendments to Credit Facilities June 2020 
Following discussions with the providers of the revolving credit 
facility, the Company and the lenders agreed on 26 June 2020 to 
a revised financing structure. In summary:

Movement in net debt  
(excluding unamortised transaction costs)

Opening net debt (pre IFRS16)
Cash generated before change in 
working capital and share options

Principal repayment of lease 

liabilities

Change in trade and other 

receivables

Deferred VAT (net of corporation tax 

offset)

Change in trade, other payables 

and provisions

Taxation and interest paid, and 

movement in unamortised 
borrowing costs

Capital investment (net of disposals)
Cash flows relating to acquisitions
Net proceeds from equity issue
Payments from/(into) restricted 

funds for NMW

Settlement of NMW liabilities from 

restricted funds

Other

Closing net debt (pre IFRS16)
IFRS16 lease liabilities 

Closing net debt (post IFRS16)

3.4

0.6

(3.4)

(3.2)

27.6

42.4

24.6

–

(7.8)

(23.8)

(9.0)
(2.4)
(0.3)
–

(7.1)
(5.1)
(7.2)
38.0

11.8

(12.7)

(11.8)
0.2

(8.8)
(5.5)

(14.3)

–
(0.6)

(59.5)
(8.4)

(67.9)

The table below reconciles underlying EBITDA (earnings before 
interest, taxation, depreciation and amortisation), on continuing 
operations to operating loss.

Reconciliation of operating loss to EBITDA

Operating loss
Non-underlying costs

Underlying operating profit
Depreciation

Underlying EBITDA
Lease rental payments

Underlying EBITDA (pre IFRS16)

2020  
£m

(44.3)
49.1

4.8
7.4

12.2
(2.9)

9.3

2019 
Restated 
£m

(36.2)
39.1

2.9
7.3

10.2
(3.2)

7.0

Note: Underlying operating profit before goodwill impairment, amortisation of 
intangible assets arising on business combinations, reorganisation costs and other 
non-underlying costs. EBITDA represents Earnings Before Interest, Taxation, 
Depreciation and Amortisation.

Previous 
arrangement

New 
arrangement

At  
31 December 
2020

Revolving credit facility (“RCF”)

£78.2m £30.0m £20.0m

Overdraft 

£25.0m

-

-

Receivables Finance Facility 

(“RFF”) (invoice discounting)  
– maximum

Total Facility

Expiry date

-

£73.2m £68.2m

£103.2m £103.2m £88.2m

July 2022 July 2022 July 2022

The previous RCF was reduced from £95.0m to £78.2m with 
cancellations in July 2019 and November 2019.

The key terms of the revised facilities are below, with other terms 
of the RCF remaining in place:
i)  Repayment and cancellation of RCF commitments by £10.0m 

on 31 July 2020; 

ii)  The RFF can initially be drawn down against the receivables  
of the Recruitment GB division and the Northern Ireland part 
of the Recruitment Ireland division;

iii)  Interest on the RFF accruing at 3.50% plus Bank of England 

base rate;

iv)  Minimum EBITDA and minimum liquidity covenants until a 

return to leverage and interest cover covenants in January 
2022. The minimum EBITDA covenants have been calculated 
by reference to the Group’s downside case;

v)  Restrictions on new material share, business and asset 

acquisitions until July 2022; and

vi)  No dividends to be declared by the Company until July 2022.

An arrangement fee was paid to the lenders of £0.7m in relation to 
the Receivables Finance Facility.

On 8 October 2020 the limit on the RFF was reduced to £68.2m 
following the transfer of certain customer trade receivables to new 
customer financing arrangements.

Governance

27

The Group is also funded through a number of separate, non-
recourse, customer financing arrangements whereby specific 
customers’ invoices are settled in advance of their normal 
settlement date. The balance funded under these arrangements 
as at 31 December 2020 was £43.0m (2019: £35.1m). In addition, 
the Group has an uncommitted, non-recourse, separate 
receivables financing facility with a maximum value of £25m.  
The balance funded under this facility at 31 December 2020 was 
£24.3m (2019: £25.7m).

An arrangement fee of £0.9m was paid to the lenders in respect of 
the RFA.

The new facility enabled the cancellation of the existing facilities, 
comprising the RCF of £20.0m and the RFF of £68.2m and also 
the non-recourse Receivables Purchase Facility of £25.0m.  
The Group will continue to have access to its existing customer 
financing arrangements in respect of specific customers, under 
which invoices are settled in advance of normal credit terms. 

Equity fundraise and debt refinancing
At the time of the refinancing of the Group’s facilities on  
26 June 2020, the Group’s liquidity forecast for the period  
ending 31 December 2021, which was prepared in support of  
that refinancing, indicated that the Group would not have 
sufficient funds to repay deferred VAT, believed at the time to  
be due for repayment in full on or before 31 March 2021.

In September 2020, the UK Government announced that an 
instalment payment scheme would be introduced, and details of 
the final scheme were published on 23 February 2021. The revised 
repayment profile had the effect of delaying the potential liquidity 
shortfall from March 2021 to later in the year.

In order to address the liquidity shortfall, the Directors engaged 
professional advisors in late 2020 to assess the Group’s options 
for refinancing its debt facilities and to engage with potential 
lenders. On 20 May 2021, following a detailed appraisal by the 
Directors, the Company and certain subsidiary undertakings, 
entered into a new Receivables Financing Agreement (“RFA”)  
to replace the existing Group funding arrangements. The RFA 
contained certain requirements to be met before completion, the 
most significant of which was that the Company raise new equity 
capital of at least £40.0m. This condition was satisfied and the 
RFA became effective on 10 June 2021. 

The key terms of the new facility, which is provided jointly by RBS 
Invoice Finance Limited, ABN AMRO Asset Based Finance N.V., UK 
Branch and Leumi ABL Limited, are set out below:
i)  Maximum receivables financing facility of £90.0m over a 

four-and-a-half-year term, with a one-year extension option;
ii)  An Accordion option of up to an additional £15.0m, subject to 

lender approval;

iii)  Security on all of the assets and undertakings of the Company 

and certain subsidiary undertakings;

iv)  Interest accruing at 2.75% over SONIA, with a margin ratchet 
downward to 2.0%, dependent upon the Group’s leverage 
reducing to 3.00x;

v)  A non-utilisation fee of 0.35% of the margin;
vi)  Maximum net debt (averaged over a rolling three months) to 

EBITDA leverage covenant commencing at 5.95x followed by a 
gradual reduction to 4.0x by October 2023; and

vii)  Minimum interest cover covenant of 2.25x the last twelve 

months EBITDA to finance charges.

The Group announced a proposed Placing, Subscription and 
Open Offer (the “Fundraise”) on 21 May 2021 following conditional 
agreement of the debt refinancing the previous day. The Fundraise 
comprised the following elements:
•  A total of 87,249,500 new ordinary shares of 10 pence each 

placed at a price of 50 pence per share (the “Issue Price”) to 
certain existing shareholders, new institutional investors and 
certain Directors and employees of the Group;

•  A total of 750,500 new ordinary shares of 10 pence each to 
certain Directors and employees of the Group at the Issue 
Price; and

•  An open offer to existing shareholders of 10 shares for every  
78 ordinary shares held, for a total of 8,837,242 new ordinary 
shares of 10 pence each at the Issue Price.

The total gross proceeds of the Fundraise, which was approved by 
the shareholders in a General Meeting on 9 June 2021, were 
£48.4m. The total costs of the Fundraise and debt refinancing 
were c.£4.0m. The net proceeds are to be used to reduce total 
indebtedness and to provide working capital for growth.

Dividends
As a condition of refinancing the debt facility, dividends are 
permitted to be paid from 1 July 2022 subject to no default of the 
RFA and no forecast default on a 6 month look forward basis from 
the date of the dividend payment.

Going Concern
The financial statements have been prepared on a going concern 
basis. The Directors have reviewed this basis and have made full 
disclosure in note 3, concluding that there is a reasonable 
expectation that the Group and Company have adequate resources 
to continue in operational existence for the foreseeable future.

Daniel Quint
Chief Executive Officer
21 June 2021

Strategic ReportFinancial Statements28

Staffline Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2020

Section 172

Stakeholder 
engagement

Section 172 – Fulfilling our duty
Section 172 of the Companies Act 2006 requires the Directors to act in a way that they consider, in good faith, would be most likely to 
promote the success of the Company for the benefit of its members as a whole, and in doing so have regard (amongst other matters) to:
a)  The likely consequences of any decision in the long term;
b)  The interests of the Company’s employees;
c)  The need to foster the Company’s business relationships with suppliers, customers and others;
d)  The impact of the Company’s operations on the community and the environment;
e)  The desirability of the Company maintaining a reputation for high standards of business conduct; and
f)  The need to act fairly as between members of the Company.

In the decisions taken during the year ended 31 December 2020, the Directors have acted in the way they consider to be in good faith, 
most likely to promote the success of the Company and its continuing reputation for high standards of business conduct, and for the 
benefit of its stakeholders, having regard to the stakeholders and matters set out in Section 172 of the UK Companies Act 2006.

Stakeholder engagement
For the Company to meet its 
responsibilities to stakeholders, the Board 
must ensure effective engagement with 
them. The Board follows a formal process 
to regularly consider the identification and 
prioritisation of stakeholders and whether 
its relationships with key stakeholders are 
being managed appropriately. The Board 
ensures that it has effective engagement 
mechanisms in place to gain a clear 
understanding of the views of key 
stakeholders so that their interests and  
the matters set out in Section 172 of the 
Companies Act 2006 can be considered in 
Board discussions and decision making. 

Taking account of the interests of our 
stakeholders is at the centre of Staffline 
Group’s strategic plan and Staffline’s 
purpose is to build and develop the most 
reliable integrated workforce in the  
country and be the leading creator of 
opportunities, jobs and new ideas in the 
employability, skills and justice sectors.  
As such, examples of Staffline’s 
engagement with its key stakeholders from 
governments, consumers, through to our 
employees, business partners, 
shareholders the community and 
environment can be found throughout this 
Annual Report. 

Examples of Staffline’s key engagement 
activities in 2020 include:

Employees 
The Group communicates and engages 
with our people using a variety of channels, 
blending in-person, virtual and electronic 
communication. Underpinning this is a 
people-centred, inclusive and collaborative 
culture. In 2020 we implemented our 
continuous listening strategy to ensure that 
the voice of employees is heard. The 
effectiveness of these strategies is tracked 
through our employee engagement survey. 
Further information on the Group’s 
engagement with its employees can be 
found on pages 30 to 32. The Board is 
committed to the Group being a 
responsible employer and to creating a 
working environment where employees are 
engaged, informed and involved. The 
Group’s employment policies are contained 
in the Responsible Business section on 
page 30.

Governance

29

Community and the environment
The Board recognises its responsibilities in 
achieving good environmental practice and 
making positive contributions to the 
community. The relevant practices are set 
out in the Responsible Business section on 
pages 30 to 32. In response to the Covid-19 
pandemic, the Group, like most businesses, 
had to respond quickly to the threat posed 
to its staff and colleagues with the now 
familiar techniques of isolation, distancing, 
and sanitation. In addition to this 
PeoplePlus and Staffline launched a new 
nationwide worker transition service as 
part of the #FeedTheNation campaign. We 
are continuing to work to move people who 
have been made redundant, are “at risk” or 
in the gig economy into the “essential 
services” industries.

Many industries like travel and retail have 
been savagely hit by Covid-19. At the same 
time many industries associated with food 
production, food supply, supermarkets and 
delivery services experienced a surge in 
demand, which required thousands of 
additional workers. The Group was integral 
part of the campaign to recruit and train a 
temporary workforce with #FeedTheNation 
which supported c.25,000 people back 
into work between March-June 2020.

Employee wellbeing during 
Covid-19
At Staffline we ensure we continue to 
support colleagues with relevant tools  
and advice. We implemented Covid-19 
Response Protocols for each section of  
the business which outlined steps to ensure 
our people and customers remained safe. 
Further information can be found on  
page 32.

Shareholders 
The Board is committed to open 
communication with shareholders to help 
them understand the Group’s strategy and 
objectives. The Group’s engagement with 
shareholders is set out in the Corporate 
Governance statement on page 37.
The Board issued a number of market 
communications throughout the year in 
order to inform stakeholders of important 
developments in the business. In addition 
we hosted a “Capital Markets Day” in 
November at which interested parties were 
able to discuss some of the issues affecting 
the Group.

Business conduct and relationships 
The Board recognises the importance of a 
strong corporate culture that considers the 
best interest of its employees, business 
partners and shareholders. The Board 
recognises its responsibilities to other 
external stakeholders. Its strong customer 
relationships are vital to the business.  
The Group’s purpose and vision are set out 
on page 37 and its ethics policies are set 
out in the Responsible Business section on 
page 30.

Staffline engages regularly through a 
variety of means including communication 
with key account managers, Staffline 
programme of events, customer surveys 
and training academies. In 2020 Staffline 
has worked closely with clients to establish 
solutions to continue working together 
during the Covid-19 pandemic, in particular 
these included:
•  Work From Home made accessible and 

available for our office staff;
•  Stringent application of social 

distancing and hygiene practices for 
on-site staff;

•  Appropriate PPE provided to necessary 

• 

staff and customers;
Investment in plastic screens and desk 
shields in appropriate locations; and
•  Protocols for self-isolation and contact 

tracing; among many others. 

Further information can be found on  
page 6. 

Equality, diversity and inclusion 
The Group believes that equality, diversity 
and inclusion enable delivery of our 
purpose. To benefit from a diverse 
workforce, we apply role-related and 
objective criteria to select and develop 
talent and we focus on building an inclusive 
environment where everyone feels able to 
participate and achieve their potential. The 
Group is committed to providing a work 
environment free from harassment and 
discrimination. We endeavour to treat each 
individual fairly in relation to job 
applications, training, promotion and 
career development. The Board receives an 
overview of diversity and inclusion at 
Staffline and approves the Group Equality 
and Diversity Policy annually. Further 
information can be found on page 31.

Strategic ReportFinancial Statements30

Staffline Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2020

Responsible Business

People, culture  
and values

At Staffline we place great 
importance on the role  
we play in helping support 
local communities and the 
environment surrounding us.

We understand the importance of 
integrating our business values and 
operations to meet the expectations of  
our stakeholders. These include clients, 
Government departments, employees, 
flexible workers, regulators, investors  
and suppliers. 

Learning and Development
Staffline Group believes that driving a 
culture of continuous learning and 
development has never been more 
important and therefore the development 
of our people remains a key initiative in our 
Group strategic priorities. 

We recognise that our social, economic 
and environmental responsibilities to our 
stakeholders are integral to our business. 
We aim to demonstrate these 
responsibilities through our actions and 
within our corporate policies. 

We focus on driving a high-performance 
culture and the Group continues to review 
talent and succession planning at all levels 
to support our agility and to enable further 
growth. As a commercially focused 
business we regularly review our 
headcount to ensure that our lean 
operating model is fit for purpose. 

Developing our people is key to us as an 
organisation and we have many ways of 
encouraging this. Our ethos supports 
nurturing talent within the business at all 
levels and encourages self-development 
which in turn aids succession planning, 
supporting the strategic growth of the 
Group. 

Our Learning and Development schemes in 
2020 have included: 
•  A new Learner Experience Platform 

which was launched in September 2020, 
enabling knowledge sharing, 
collaboration and self-directed learning 
across all our people; 

•  Supporting the formal education of our 

people through a variety of 
apprenticeships and specialist 
qualifications that enable our people to 
focus on their professional development, 
bringing insight and thought leadership 
to our business; 

•  Staffline GB launched the development 

of our Leadership team which has 
created opportunities for them to share 
and showcase their skills and experience 
with others across the business, 
delivering our first virtual “Tomorrow 
Starts Today” roadshow to all 
employees, sharing interactive and 
engaging development events, 
workshops and classes to engage and 
support the skills of our people;

•  Our approach to managing talent and 
succession across our business allows 
us to create developmental 
opportunities and growth for those who 
have aspirations and ambitions to 
progress within the Group. In 2020 we 
have promoted two of our “top talent” 
Regional Manager into Director 
positions, and we continue to create 
both permanent and secondment 
opportunities to share and retain 
talented individuals across the wider 
Staffline Group; 

Governance

31

•  An extensive in-house Coaching 

Programme rolled out across Staffline 
Ireland in 2020, with 26 managers 
benefitting from regular individual 
coaching support; and 

•  Agile support of the business during the 
rapid pandemic response, to include 
development of new Covid-19 policies  
and rollout. 

In addition, this year has been tough for 
many and the mental health and wellbeing 
of our people has been paramount. 
Sharing of information on health and 
wellbeing topics, articles and videos 
through our weekly Staffline Newsletters 
and launching our “Keeping You 
Connected” webinars have supported both 
communication and engagement for 
employees who remained working and 
creating connection for those on furlough 
leave. 

Modern Slavery
Staffline’s commitment to compliance and 
worker welfare is at the forefront of 
everything we do. Our ethos is to 
proactively apply multiple measures to 
reduce Modern Slavery across our business 
and supply chains. 

Staffline Group is proud to work alongside 
authorities and charities to tackle Modern 
Slavery. Together we achieve this by 
educating all permanent staff in how to 
“spot the signs”; analyse and monitor key 
data in order to identify areas of risk; along 
with working closely with our sites who are 
integral to identifying possible victims 
quickly. 

Modern Slavery is a complex, evolving 
crime and through vigilance, caring and 
the proactive approach of our staff we 
strive to stamp it out of Staffline. 

Settled Status
The EU Settlement Scheme, introduced in 
March 2019, allows EU workers to apply for 
settled or pre-settled status within the UK, 
allowing them to continue living and 
working in the UK following the ending of 
the free movement of people, goods and 
services in January 2021. As the UK’s 
largest employer of EU migrant workers 
(representing 59% of our total workforce) it 
is our duty to ensure that our EU workers 
have our continued support in making 
them aware of the EU Settlement Scheme 
and how to apply successfully. 

Following the launch of the scheme we 
have continued to raise awareness of the 
seriousness of it through a variety of 
communication channels and in different 
languages. This has helped to raise 
awareness with our workers, future 
candidates, employees and customers. 
Details of these communication methods 
are listed below: 
•  Active Workers: Active EU workers for 

Staffline have received monthly emails 
reminding them to apply for settled or 
pre-settled status if they have not 
already done so. User guides and onsite 
communications have also been created 
to support with applications; and 
reminders have been placed on 
payslips. 

•  Candidate Attraction: Staffline Group 
has published regular Facebook posts 
across our 13 regional pages and shared 
within relevant job groups. Staffline has 
also included on every re-marketing 
email that is sent out to candidates, an 
EU Settlement Scheme banner is 
included at the bottom, navigating them 
to the Settled Status Support Page. 

Equal Opportunities
It Is Staffline’s Policy to provide 
employment equality to all and abide by 
the equality laws. We promote a fair and 
harmonious recruitment process and will 
not discriminate or harass any person on 
the grounds of: 
•  Gender (including gender re-

assignment) 

•  Marital or family status 
•  Religious belief or political opinion 
•  Disability 
•  Race or ethnic origin 
•  Nationality
•  Sexual orientation
•  Age
•  Pregnancy or maternity 

We are committed to: 
•  Preventing any form of direct or indirect 

discrimination or victimisation;
•  Promoting equal opportunities for 

women and men;

•  Securing fair participation irrespective 
of religious or community background;

•  Promoting equal opportunities for 

people with disabilities; 

•  Promoting equal opportunities for ethnic 

minorities;

•  Promoting a harmonious working 

environment where men and women are 
treated with respect and dignity and in 
which no form of intimidation or 
harassment will be tolerated;

•  Fulfilling all legal obligations under the 
relevant legislation and associated 
codes of practice; and

•  Taking any necessary positive/

affirmative action, including setting 
goals and timetables.

Strategic ReportFinancial Statements32

Staffline Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2020

Responsible Business continued

In 2019 Staffline Ireland introduced an 
enhanced maternity package to support a 
predominantly female work force, that 
encourages work life balance. Staffline 
Ireland also provide private medical 
insurance to every member of staff from 
day one.

We encourage career progression for all 
colleagues in our business, regardless of 
gender, and this has always been and 
remains at the heart of our leadership 
team’s agenda. All of our employees are 
important to us and we remain committed 
to attracting and retaining the very best 
talent to the business and ensuring that 
gender is never a factor in decisions. Being 
a truly diverse and inclusive company is 
not only the right thing to do, it is crucial to 
helping us grow, attract talent and engage 
with our customers. We believe that having 
an inclusive workforce, which represents 
society, is crucial to our long-term success.

Gender pay gap reporting (“GPGR”)
Details of the Group’s gender pay gap 
reporting can be found on our website at: 
www.stafflinegroupplc.co.uk/aboutus/
gender-pay-gap-report/.

On 5 April 2020, Staffline employed 
c.2,500 monthly paid permanent 
employees and c.43,300 weekly paid 
temporary contractors. Overall, 
amalgamating all business areas and 
including the temporary workforce, our 
mean gender pay gap is 8.2% (2019: 9.1%). 
These results are affected by 94% (2019: 
94%) of employees being contractors, of 
which 66% (2019: 64%) are male and 34% 
(2019: 36%) female. On their own, the 
temporary workers’ mean gender pay gap 
is 7.7% (2019: 8.2%). All contractors are 
paid the same hourly rate for the same 
work, irrespective of gender. The gap 
derives purely from the mix of roles 
performed by the workers, and in 
particular the workers involved in the 
higher paid driving sector who are 
predominantly male. In the opinion of the 
Directors, it is relevant to consider 
separately data for the permanent 
employees and the temporary workers. For 
this group of employees, the mean gender 
pay gap is 16.6% (2019: 16.1%).

Health and Safety
Health and Safety has taken on a new level 
of importance and significance for us all in 
2020. It has of course meant that we all 
have adapted to the prominence of 
Covid-19 in our lives and the changes to the 
working environment it has brought. Health 
and Safety measures implanted have 
included: 
• 

Investment in appropriate PPE and 
office desk shields to protect both onsite 
and office employees; 

•  Rigorous implementation of social 
distancing measures for all staff, 
employees and customers; and
•  Self-isolation and contact tracing 

protocols for every regional arm of the 
business, ensuring compliance with 
Government regulation. 

Greenhouse gas emissions – 
Streamlined Energy and Carbon 
Reporting (SECR)
These disclosures are made in accordance 
with Streamlined Energy & Carbon 
Reporting guidelines. The data included 
covers the FY20 financial year, and will 
form the base year for future comparison 
due to this being the first year that the 
Group has been subject to the SECR 
requirements.

The data covers energy usage across all 
large UK entities in the Group. Energy 
usage from subsidiaries outside of the UK 
are outside the scope of this report and 
therefore excluded from the figures below.

UK energy use

Consumption in metric tonnes CO2e

Gas (Scope 1)
Electricity (scope 2)
Total consumption in metric 

tonnes CO2e

Total energy use in kWh

Efficiency ratio:
Scope 1 & scope 2 emissions 
in tonnes CO2e per UK 
employee

2020

59.6
135.6

195.2
1,274,932

0.08

Methodology
The methodology used to calculate our 
emissions is based on guidance issued by 
the SECR and has been calculated using 
the revised carbon conversion factors 
published by BEIS in 2020.

The Group recognises that it has a 
responsibility to the environment beyond 
legal and regulatory requirements. Work 
has now commenced with the development 
of a detailed strategy, focusing on energy 
consumption, waste, travel, and 
sustainable materials to allow the Group to 
implement appropriate systems in order to 
reduce our overall carbon footprint.

Principal Risks and Uncertainties

Governance

33

Managing our risks

The Board of Directors of Staffline Group plc regards effective monitoring and management of exposure to risk as critical to the 
delivery of the Group’s strategic objectives and the creation of sustainable shareholder value. A comprehensive review of risk 
management processes and risk registers at both divisional and Group level was completed during the year and a robust, 
standardised approach has been developed. This will be more fully rolled out across the Group during 2021. 

Risks are identified based on the likelihood of occurrence and the potential impact on the Group. The most significant risks to which, in 
the opinion of the Directors, the Group is exposed are described below, along with an overview of relevant mitigation measures that are 
either in place or planned.

Risk management framework
The Group is exposed to a variety of risks and uncertainties that require ongoing 
monitoring and management in order to mitigate against adverse impacts on long-term 
performance. A variety of policies, systems and processes are in place to monitor and 
respond effectively to these risks and uncertainties. Risk registers are maintained at 
divisional level and consolidated to provide a Group view twice a year, with both the 
process and its outputs formally reviewed by the Audit Committee and the Board.

The Board’s view of the key risks and 
uncertainties to which the Group is 
exposed is set out below, with an indication 
of the year-on-year change in the level of 
risk exposure as follows:

 Increased since prior year
 Reduced since prior year
 Similar to prior year

1. Liquidity risk and compliance with banking facility agreements 
Risk
At 31 December 2020 the Group’s banking facilities comprised a 
£73.2m receivables financing facility and a revolving credit facility 
(“RCF”) of £20.0m.

As at the year-end, the Group’s liquidity forecast (considering its 
then available financing facilities) identified that, absent the 
successful implementation of mitigating actions, there was a 
liquidity issue in the second half of 2021 after commencement of 
repayment instalments of the deferred VAT. This also indicated a 
potential breach of the Group’s covenants under the RCF and 
receivables financing facility. 

Under the new receivables finance agreement (“RFA”), the Group 
has to comply with certain undertakings and two principal 
financial covenants, which cover EBITDA to net debt leverage and 
EBITDA to interest cover. These covenants will be tested monthly 
from September 2021 and quarterly after 31 December 2022, 
subject to compliance prior to that date.

Mitigation 
On 20 May 2021 the Company and certain fellow subsidiary 
undertakings, entered into a new £90 million Receivables Financing 
Agreement (“RFA”) to replace the existing Group banking 
arrangements. The RFA contained certain pre-conditions before 
completion, the most significant of which was that the Company 
raise equity capital of at least £40.0m. This condition was satisfied, 
and the RFA became effective on 10 June 2021. Further details of 
the new facilities are given in note 20. The Placing, Subscription 
and Open Offer has contributed funds of £48.4 million (before 
expenses), which will be used to reduce Group indebtedness and to 
provide working capital for growth. 

Subject to potential extension, if agreed by all parties, the RFA has 
a termination date of 1 December 2025. The Group has prepared 
financial forecasts covering the period to 31 December 2022 and 
has applied a robust sensitivity analysis to the forecasts to ensure 
compliance with the financial covenants in a ‘downside case’. The 
analysis shows compliance with the covenants for the full period of 
the forecasts.

The Group finance team forecasts and monitors cash flows and 
banking facilities on a daily and weekly basis and maintains 
compliance with the other information undertakings required under 
its financing facilities. The Group also prepares a rolling 13-week 
cashflow forecast on a weekly basis to identify potential pinch 
points and ensure that sufficient cash reserves (including undrawn 
facilities) are in place to meet the short-term liabilities of the 
business. These forecasts and the potential availability of financing 
facilities are closely monitored by the Board.

Strategic ReportFinancial Statements34

Staffline Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2020

Principal Risks and Uncertainties continued

2. Legal and Regulatory Environment and Compliance 
Risk
The Group operates in a fluid and increasingly complex legal and 
regulatory environment, particularly in relation to the supply of 
temporary labour. Key elements of this environment include 
immigration laws, which establish ‘right to work’ rules, Agency 
Worker Regulations, National Minimum Wage regulations, 
gangmaster licensing regulations, Modern Slavery regulations and, 
during 2020, Covid-19 related furlough schemes. 

The complex and varied operational environments that exist across 
the Group mean there is a risk of inadvertent breach of one or more 
of these laws or regulations. 

The above and other recent and forthcoming regulatory changes 
affecting the Group have required deployment of resource to 
assess impacts, design and implement responses and monitor 
ongoing compliance.

The costs of compliance in terms of process design and operation, 
monitoring and audit, are built into customer pricing. Costs of 
investigating and remediating any breach and, where relevant, 
fines or other penalties would reduce profitability.

3. Economic conditions 
Risk
In addition to the specific economic impacts of Covid-19 and Brexit 
referenced below, any downturn or unexpectedly slow recovery in 
economic conditions in the UK and/or the Republic of Ireland could 
have an adverse effect on consumer confidence, leading to a 
knock-on effect on our customers’ businesses. 

Whilst any increase in unemployment in the short to medium-term 
might increase the availability of labour, discretionary spending by 
consumers may be adversely affected. An increase in the number 
of unemployed might also make securing a return to work by the 
long-term unemployed even more of a challenge.

Government spending in the medium to long-term is an area of 
ongoing uncertainty, not least due to the impact of Covid-19 on 
public finances. The likelihood of a change in the UK’s governing 
party as a consequence of the pandemic is however seen as having 
receded during the second quarter.

Mitigation
Staffline actively engages with customers, regulators and external 
professional advisers to discuss the requirements and implications 
of relevant regulations and working practices. 

In-house compliance teams monitor compliance with laws and 
regulations such as ‘right to work’ checks and Agency Worker 
Regulations through both planned audits and investigation of 
exceptions identified by data analysis. These teams have seen 
additional investment during 2020 and the Group remains 
committed to continuous improvement of its governance 
arrangements.

New and existing employees are trained on the NMW regulations 
and sites that pay minimum wage are regularly audited by in-house 
compliance teams to ensure that practice is compliant with the 
regulations. An ongoing monitoring process has been established 
and focus is placed on sites that are considered higher risk. 

Furlough payments are closely monitored to ensure that eligibility 
rules have been correctly applied. Detailed records of payments 
have been maintained to facilitate any future audit by HMRC. 

Ensuring a periodic horizon scan for known or possible regulatory 
changes is an important component of the Group’s risk 
management process.

Mitigation
Staffline provides temporary labour into a wide range of businesses 
in both the UK and Ireland. Sectors such as food, food logistics, 
on-line retail and public services are expected to be more resilient 
than automotive or travel and tourism, lessening the overall impact 
of adverse economic conditions on the Group.

The Board believes that flexible labour resourcing becomes more 
important as a mitigation strategy in times of increased 
uncertainty as use of temporary labour allows customers the 
flexibility they need to meet their end customers’ changing 
demands. Staffline works closely with its customers to understand 
their expected future needs. 

The back-to-work education and skills support services delivered 
by PeoplePlus could be subject to higher demand should 
unemployment rates rise in the short to medium term. Significant 
government funding has materialised in these two areas through 
the UK Government’s “Plan for Jobs”.

The Group takes a cautious approach to revenue forecasting. The 
business model operated by PeoplePlus, the division that is most 
reliant on public sector contracts, seeks to minimise fixed costs that 
could not be avoided should Government funding undergo a 
significant reduction.

Governance

35

4. Impact of Covid-19 pandemic 
Risk
Covid-19 had an ongoing impact across the global economy 
throughout 2020 and the uncertainty this has created is expected 
to continue during 2021 as the positive effects of the introduction of 
vaccination programmes in the UK and other countries continue to 
be offset by concerns about emergence of new variants. 

The effect on the Group’s business has varied, with food, driving, 
logistics and e-commerce sectors experiencing strong demand in 
2020. The retail, manufacturing and automotive industries 
continued to be more challenging and whilst there are encouraging 
signs of increasing activity in these sectors, the rate at which 
clients’ businesses will recover as lockdown restrictions are eased 
cannot be predicted with any certainty.

Covid-19 combined with Brexit to have an unexpected impact on 
EU workers who returned from the UK to their countries of origin as 
the pandemic spread and have since been unable to return due to 
travel restrictions. Some workers’ eligibility for settled status under 
the UK government’s EU Settlement Scheme may be at risk as the 
30 June 2021 deadline for applications has not been extended.

Mitigation
As referenced elsewhere, Staffline works closely with its customers 
to understand their expected future needs in both the short and 
longer term.

Weekly activity levels are closely monitored to identify potential 
trends as they start to develop and alternative scenarios are 
modelled to assess the potential impact on the Group.

As referenced elsewhere, Staffline is actively engaging with 
registered workers to promote awareness of the Settlement Scheme 
and encourage workers to apply. In the meantime, efforts to attract 
new workers to maintain fulfilment service levels remain ongoing.

PeoplePlus took strategic steps to quickly pivot the focus of its 
services to the changed economic environment with Covid-19 in 
which increasing levels of unemployment would be a prominent 
feature. PeoplePlus is now focused on its two core markets of 
employability and adult skills, in which it is a market leader, and 
has exited the Apprenticeships market.

5. Customer contracts and service delivery 
Risk
Staffline operates in an increasingly competitive marketplace with 
rising labour costs and legislative and regulatory factors that could 
lead to downward pressure on margins. 

This may lead to irrational pricing of tenders and/or regulatory 
non-compliance by competitors to secure new business, which 
might threaten Staffline’s contract renewals and pipeline 
conversion rates.

Much of the Group’s business is derived through long-term 
contracts. It is therefore essential that contractual service levels are 
achieved and maintained to secure contract renewals or extensions 
and that a healthy pipeline of potential new business is established 
and maintained.

PeoplePlus delivers services through a number of national and 
regional schemes aimed primarily at improving skills in the 
workforce and employability of those currently out of work. These 
schemes are funded by the UK Government and Welsh and 
Scottish devolved governments and local government and have 
complex eligibility rules to control the use of public funds. Delivery 
of these services by PeoplePlus extends to oversight of delivery 
partners’ compliance with funding scheme rules. 

Meeting the standards required by Ofsted in England, Estyn in 
Wales and Skills Development Scotland, who collectively oversee 
PeoplePlus’s education-related services, is an important “licence to 
trade” for the PeoplePlus business. 

The effects of general economic conditions, Covid-19 and Brexit on 
availability of labour and Staffline’s ability to fulfil customers’ 
requirements are discussed elsewhere.

Mitigation
The Group’s strategy is to grow sales with the right customers that: 
pay appropriate pay rates, focus on retention by putting the 
worker first, and pay appropriate margins for our class-leading 
services. In order to achieve this, Staffline has:
(i)  Produced a value proposition chain that clearly explains why a 
customer should choose Staffline and pay more for a better 
service;

(ii) Invested in class-leading technology; and 
(iii) Established a Commercial team to work with divisional directors 
to analyse the current customer portfolio and secure strategic 
new business wins. This will include managed exit from certain 
under-performing contracts.

The Group will invest in its branch network and continue to pursue 
its digital transformation programme in 2021 to increase its 
presence and profile in the labour market and speed up the process 
of attracting, onboarding and deploying workers. 

PeoplePlus maintains robust quality control and compliance 
monitoring processes that operate independently of operational 
management, including due diligence and ongoing compliance 
monitoring of partner delivery organisations and.a Quality 
Improvement Board that provides external scrutiny though its 
independent Chair. Accreditations such as ISO9001, ISO27001 and 
Cyber Essential Plus are maintained and ISO14001 accreditation 
will be sought during 2021.

Funding bodies carry out regular audits of PeoplePlus’s compliance 
against scheme rules. The services concerned have all been 
inspected and found to meet the required standards within the last 
two years. 

Strategic ReportFinancial Statements36

Staffline Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2020

Principal Risks and Uncertainties continued

6. Security and stability of IT systems 
Risk
Staffline is, like all large-scale businesses both within and outside 
the staffing and recruitment sector, reliant on IT systems to operate 
and support our business activities. Failure or disruption due to old 
or poorly maintained hardware or software, or deliberate cyber-
attack, could result in serious business interruption. 

IT infrastructure and support systems need to sufficiently support 
the business in its day-to-day operations, whilst also supporting 
the growth and diversification plans which are being implemented 
in-year. Disaster recovery protocols and capabilities need to be in 
place across the estate.

The Recruitment division carries out material weekly payroll runs 
for our temporary labour workforce. A failure in either key 
operational systems, the payroll system or BACS software could 
lead to workers not being paid correctly and/or on time and to 
consequent reputational damage.

7. Brexit 
Risk
Ongoing uncertainty during the years following the 2016 
referendum on continued UK membership of the EU clearly 
impacted the UK labour market and led to some customers 
transferring a significant part of their temporary workforce, mostly 
notably in the Driving sector, into permanent employment to 
mitigate the risk of a tightening labour market. 

The announcement of an outline trade deal with the EU on 
24 December 2020 and subsequent completion of the UK’s formal 
separation from the EU on 31 December 2020 have provided some 
clarity. However, it is likely that some level of disruption to travel 
and customers’ supply chains will persist in the short to medium 
term. The economic impacts of Brexit in the short, medium and 
long term also remain unpredictable.

Ongoing availability of labour to fulfil customers’ needs remains an 
area of uncertainty. The impact of Brexit on non-UK EU workers’ 
long-term intentions is thought to have largely crystallised following 
the setting of the June 2021 cut-off date for the UK government’s 
EU Settlement Scheme.

8. PeoplePlus contract portfolio 
Risk
The PeoplePlus division is dependent on large, often complex, 
public sector contracts. Individual contract wins or losses could 
have a material impact on the Group’s revenue and profitability. 
Bidding for contracts that PeoplePlus cannot effectively deliver 
and/or poor or unsuccessful mobilisation of new contracts, could 
have an adverse impact on the Group’s profitability and/or 
reputation.

PeoplePlus expects to see growth in demand for its services with an 
associated requirement for rapid mobilisation of new contracts 
including the UK Government’s Restart scheme, which is aimed at 
providing enhanced support to Universal Credit claimants who 
have been out of work for 12 months or more.

Mitigation
Each division has a local Business Continuity Plan that is underpinned 
by a Group-level Disaster Recovery Plan which would be invoked in the 
event of critical interruption to one or more of Staffline’s core IT services. 
This would entail the wholesale transfer of all core technical assets 
and services to the Group’s secondary estate, which is maintained 
as an exact replica of the primary estate via tried and tested 
backup solutions. Disaster recovery capability is tested regularly.

The Group’s cyber security arrangements are continuing to evolve 
with targeted investment deployed to build on systems already in 
place and, where necessary, update or amend services that 
identify and block suspicious or malicious activity.

Covid-19 tested the Recruitment division’s ability to run temporary 
worker payrolls remotely and this operating model is now well 
established. Payrolls could be run and paid via a manual process if 
necessary due to extended system outages. 

Both business interruption and cyber insurance policies are 
maintained. These may not fully cover all risks and potential losses, 
but the Board is satisfied with the level of mitigation provided.

Mitigation
Brexit-related developments and risks are regularly discussed by the 
Board as part of ongoing monitoring of the Group’s risk environment. 

The Group has worked closely with the Home Office and is 
providing appropriate support to EU workers who are interested in 
applying for settled status to allow them to remain and work in the 
UK beyond 30 June 2021. It has developed and deployed an 
engagement and communication strategy driven by a sophisticated 
IT platform and encompassing both active workers and those who 
are registered but currently not working for Staffline. 

PeoplePlus currently benefits from European Social Funding for 
some of its employability and skills programmes. The UK 
Government has committed to maintaining that funding until 2023, 
after which it will be replaced by the new Shared Prosperity Fund.

The Board remains confident that Staffline is in a strong position to 
continue to prosper in the future due to our ongoing investment in 
technology, the extent of our geographic footprint across the UK 
and Republic of Ireland and our proven expertise in accessing new 
sources of labour.

Mitigation
PeoplePlus has a clear strategic focus on its two key markets of 
employability services and adult skills, in which it is a market 
leader. Business development effort is focused on delivering 
sustainable market growth in these two areas and the business has 
a strong bid engine capability that is focused on tight bid 
disciplines to ensure sustainable growth. The impact of these 
disciplines is seen in continued improvement in business 
development outcomes, as evidenced by the division’s bid: win rate 
based on number of bids, which was 56% in 2020 (2019: 53%).

PeoplePlus also has a well-established contract mobilisation model 
that has successfully implemented and delivered high profile 
government contracts at scale in the last two years. It has continued 
to strengthen that implementation approach and overall operational 
management capability in anticipation of increased demand.

Governance

37

Corporate Governance Statement

Our vision and values
Our Group vision is to be a world class recruitment and training Group, the clear market  
leader and trusted partner known for excellent service and integrity, driven forward by  
digital innovation. We do this through our brand values of:

•  Teamwork: working together across the business to achieve more for our customers
•  Respect: taking time to understand, trust and support each other to achieve shared success
•  Commitment: demonstrating a relentless and driven ambition to exceed expectations
•  Reliability: fulfilling all our customer requirements, getting the job done
•  Creativity: solving problems and suggesting new ideas and insights
• 

Integrity: doing things the right way, for the right reason, ethically, honestly, every time

Chairman’s 
Introduction

I am pleased to present the Group’s 
Corporate Governance Report for the year 
ended 31 December 2020.

As an AIM listed company, Staffline is 
required to apply the Quoted Companies 
Alliance Corporate Governance Code for 
Small and Mid-Size Quoted Companies 
(the “QCA Code”). In doing so, we have 
established internal governance processes 
that reflect best practice. Ultimate 
accountability for the governance of 
Staffline lies with our Board of Directors, 
the majority of whom are Non-Executive 
Directors, who can draw on their 
considerable experience in diverse areas of 
business. The Board is supported by Audit, 
Remuneration and Nominations 
Committees, of which the Chair and the 
majority of members are Non-Executive 
Directors. Our corporate values of 
teamwork, respect, commitment, reliability, 
creativity and integrity are driven by the 
Board and are at the heart of all our 
processes and decisions. 

Since my appointment as Executive 
Chairman on 25 April 2020, the Company 
has transformed the Board and made 
significant progress in improving the 
Group’s governance, operational and 
financial processes. The Group also 
strengthened its financial position through 

a refinancing in June 2020. These actions 
were achieved against the backdrop of the 
global Covid-19 pandemic, which created 
both opportunities and challenges across 
Staffline. During the pandemic, ensuring 
the health and safety of our workforce has, 
and continues to be, the Board’s priority. 

One of our strategic priorities during 2020 
was improving Staffline’s corporate 
governance including the strengthening of 
the Board. On 1 January 2021, I was pleased 
to welcome Ian Starkey and Catherine 
Lynch to the Board as Independent 
Non-Executive Directors. We have already 
started to benefit from their highly relevant 
skillsets. Ian has brought a wealth of audit 
and financial management and Catherine, 
significant people experience. This followed 
the appointment of Albert Ellis as Chief 
Executive Officer on 1 October 2020, 
having acted as an Independent Non-
Executive Director since his appointment on 
17 March 2020. Daniel Quint was appointed 
as Chief Financial Officer on 1 February 
2021, having joined the Group as Interim 
Chief Executive in December 2019. Other 
changes during the year included the 
appointment of Richard Thomson as Senior 
Independent Director on 24 April 2020. 
Richard joined the Board as an Independent 
Non-Executive Director on 17 September 2019.

In my letter to shareholders dated 29 June 
2020, I confirmed that we were in the 
process of appointing a Head of Internal 
Audit. Our new Head of Internal Audit 
joined us in September 2020 and we have 
already benefitted from this appointment, 
with a revised risk management framework 
being progressed to ensure that we have a 
robust process that fully encompasses our 
businesses. Further details are provided on 
page 33 of this Report.

On 1 January 2021, following the 
appointment of Albert as Chief Executive 
Officer and the conclusion of the Board 
transformation, I became Non-Executive 
Chair. I firmly believe that we have a 
strong, independent, highly qualified and 
diverse Board, actively engaged in the 
strategic decision-making and oversight of 
the Group. I look forward to working with 
my colleagues on the Board to strengthen 
further our governance processes.

The following pages of this Corporate 
Governance Report set out how the  
Group has complied with the “QCA Code”  
and the activities of each Board Committee 
and the actions that we have taken to 
strengthen further our internal processes 
and controls.

Ian Lawson
Chairman
21 June 2021

Financial StatementsStrategic Report38

Staffline Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2020

Board of Directors

Committees

A    N    R

Ian Lawson
Non-Executive Chairman

Albert Ellis
Chief Executive Officer

Appointed to the Board as Executive Chairman on 25 April 2020,  
and acting as Non-Executive Chairman from 1 January 2021.

Ian brings over 20 years’ public company board-level experience 
across both the support services and engineering sectors.  
He retired from Severfield PLC in January 2018 after serving  
over four years as Chief Executive, and prior to this he was a  
main Board Director of Kier Group PLC from 2005 to 2013,  
with responsibilities for the Services, Property and Residential 
Divisions. Ian is also the Non-Executive Chairman of Billington 
Holdings Plc and NJDR Group Ltd and Non-Executive Director  
of Tolent Plc. Ian is a fellow of the Royal Institute of Chartered 
Surveyors and a fellow of the Chartered Institute of Building.  
Ian is Chair of the Nominations Committee.

Appointed to the position of Chief Executive Officer on 1 October 
2020, having acted as an Independent Non-Executive Director for 
the Company from 17 March 2020.

Albert brings considerable experience in the staffing and human 
capital sector having spent over 21 years at Harvey Nash, the 
technology recruitment and IT solutions group. Albert held the 
position of Group Chief Executive Officer for 14 years, and prior  
to that, Chief Financial Officer. Prior to that, Albert also held a 
number of senior finance roles within Hays Plc, the FTSE 250 
recruitment company. Albert is a qualified Chartered Accountant 
and is also currently a Trustee of Asia House.

Daniel Quint
Chief Financial Officer

Appointed to the Board on 18 May 2020. Appointed as Chief 
Financial Officer on 1 February 2021, having acted as Interim 
Chief Financial Officer since 18 December 2019.

Daniel is an experienced CFO and a Fellow of the Institute of 
Chartered Accountants in England and Wales. With over 10 years’ 
board level experience with private and public companies, Daniel 
also spent five years at Robert Walters plc, one of the world’s 
leading professional recruitment consultancies, where he held  
the role of Finance Director (UK, Middle East and Africa). Most 
recently, Daniel was Interim CFO at AIM-listed Young & Co.’s 
Brewery, P.L.C. Prior to this, Daniel spent three years as CFO of 
SPIE UK, the leading energy, safety and environmental  
solutions provider.

Governance

39

Committees

A

N

R

Committees

A

N

R

Catherine Lynch
Independent Non-Executive Director

Ian Starkey
Independent Non-Executive Director

Appointed to the Board on 1 January 2021.

Appointed to the Board on 1 January 2021.

Catherine is a highly experienced HR director, with over 20 years’ 
experience, and is currently Chief People Officer UK & Ireland at 
Flutter Entertainment plc, the FTSE 100-listed global sports 
betting, gaming and entertainment company. Prior to this, 
Catherine spent over three years as Chief People Officer at  
Virgin Media, with additional experience including leading the HR 
functions of Ardonagh Group and BGL Group. Catherine’s career 
has also included leadership roles at Barclaycard, Santander, 
Sainsbury’s and Tesco. Catherine is a Fellow of the Chartered 
Institute of Personnel & Development (CIPD), and is currently a 
member of the Advisory Board of Dial Global, a community 
focused on inclusion. Catherine is Chair of the Remuneration 
Committee.

Ian has significant financial expertise, specifically in financial 
management, control and reporting. Ian had a 35 year career at 
KPMG, including 23 years as a lead audit engagement partner in 
the UK and Switzerland, and as a member of the UK Board. At 
KPMG, Ian worked with blue-chip corporate clients including BAE 
Systems, Diageo, Roche, Unilever and Vodafone. Ian is currently a 
non-executive member of the board at DAC Beachcroft LLP and a 
member of the Audit Committee of Historic Royal Palaces. Ian is a 
qualified Chartered Accountant. Ian is Chair of the Audit 
Committee.

Committees

  A

N

R

Richard Thomson
Senior Independent Director

Appointed to the Board on 17 September 2019.

Richard has over 20 years’ experience as an independent Director 
and board-level advisor. He began his career at Rothschild where 
he spent seven years, followed by five years at Alcentra, a global 
asset management firm. More recently he has split his time 
between various turnaround director/adviser roles, and a legal-
tech start-up which he co-founded. Richard holds two masters 
degrees from St Catherine’s College Oxford, the Securities 
Institute diploma, the Financial Times Non-executive Director 
diploma, and is a member of The Institute for Turnaround.

Committee Membership

A

N

R

Audit Committee

Nominations Committee

Remuneration Committee

Denotes Chairman

Financial StatementsStrategic Report40

Staffline Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2020

Corporate Governance

Staffline Group plc (the “Company”) is an AIM listed company 
and is committed to maintaining the highest standards of 
corporate governance throughout its operations and ensuring 
that all of its practices are conducted transparently, ethically and 
efficiently. The Company believes that scrutinising all aspects of 
its business and reflecting, analysing and improving its 
procedures will result in the continued success of the Company 
and improve shareholder value. 

In compliance with the AIM Rules for Companies, the Company 
has chosen to comply with the UK’s Quoted Companies Alliance 
Corporate Governance Guidelines for Small and Mid-Size Quoted 
Companies (the “QCA Code”). Staffline Group plc, being a UK 
registered and listed company, is subject to the City Code on 
Takeovers and Mergers.

Details of the QCA Code and how the Company complies with it is 
detailed below: 

1. Establish a strategy and business model 
which promote long-term value for 
shareholders 
Our Vision
To be a world class recruitment and training Group, the clear 
market leader and trusted partner known for excellent service and 
integrity, driven forward by digital innovation.

The Group’s strategy is to drive the long-term growth of the 
business. The Group’s business model is set out on page 8 and the 
strategic priorities for the Group are set out on page 9.

The Group is split into three divisions: Recruitment GB; 
Recruitment Ireland; and PeoplePlus.

The Recruitment GB division is a provider of flexible blue-collar 
workers across a wide range of industries. The Recruitment Ireland 
division is a generalist recruitment solutions provider, operating in 
a branch network covering all major cities across the island of 
Ireland. The PeoplePlus division is a training provider, delivering 
adult education, prison education and skills-based employability 
programmes across the UK.

During 2020, PeoplePlus sold its Apprenticeships business for a 
nominal sum (the “Transaction”). The Transaction formed part of 
PeoplePlus’ strategic re-focus on its core employability and adult 
skills capabilities as it seeks to leverage the Division’s leading 
position within these markets to capitalise on the significant 
increases in funding for central and devolved government 
contracts that were announced in the latter part of 2020.

The principal risks faced by the Group in achieving this strategy 
are detailed on pages 33 to 36.

2. Seek to understand and meet 
shareholder needs and expectations 
The Board is responsible for representing and promoting the 
interests of the Group’s shareholders and is accountable to them 
for the long-term success of the Group. 

All shareholders are encouraged to attend the Annual General 
Meeting, although restrictions due to Covid-19 meant that, due to 
UK Government guidelines, attendance was not permitted at the 
2020 AGM. Shareholders will not be able to attend the 2021 AGM 
meeting in person due to continuing Covid-19 related restrictions. 
Consequently arrangements will be made to enable shareholders 
to submit questions to the Board in advance of the meeting. 
Shareholders will be invited to vote by proxy, the results of will be 
published on the website at www.stafflinegroupplc.co.uk/
investor-relations/shareholder-information/ following the meeting.

In addition to the formal institutional meetings held at the  
interim and year end, the Executive Directors meet existing and 
prospective investors throughout the year as part of the ongoing 
investor relations engagement strategy. The Company also held  
a Capital Markets Day in November 2020, following the 
appointment of Albert Ellis as Chief Executive Officer in October 
2020, at which both existing and potential Shareholders were 
present. A copy of the Capital Markets Day presentation is 
available on the Company’s website at www.stafflinegroupplc.
co.uk/investor-relations/

The Chair also meets key shareholders during the year to discuss 
corporate governance issues and to listen to any concerns that 
are raised. The Company’s Senior Independent Director is also 
available to meet with Shareholders and provides an independent 
point of contact on Board matters. During the year, the Chairman 
consulted with certain of the Company’s major shareholders who 
were opposed to certain resolutions proposed at the Company’s 
2020 Annual General Meeting regarding the authority to issue 
Ordinary Shares of the Company. Following this consultation 
process, the Board withdrew three Resolutions. Further 
information on this matter is provided on page 46 of this Annual 
Report. In his capacity as Remuneration Committee Chair, 
Richard Thomson consulted with a number of the Company’s 
major shareholders on certain remuneration issues, including on 
the design of a new long-term incentive plan for Executive 
Directors and senior executives. The Committee is still progressing 
this matter. In addition, the Board consulted certain major 
shareholders regarding a proposed increase in the fees paid to 
the Independent Non-Executive Directors prior to Directors, who 
had no interest in this matter, considering and approving this 
increase.

A dedicated email address, investors@staffline.co.uk, exists to 
enable all current and prospective shareholders to contact the 
Group directly. The Board recognises that, whilst the majority of 
the shareholders are large institutions, the Company’s private 
shareholders are important and the Board welcomes dialogue 
with them.

Governance

41

3. Take into account wider stakeholder and 
social responsibilities and their implications 
for long-term success 
The Board recognises its social, economic and environmental 
responsibilities to wider stakeholders and is committed to act in a 
way which it considers to be most likely to promote the success of 
the Group for the benefit of its members as a whole, having 
particular regard to:
1.  The likely consequences of any decision on the long term;
2.  The interests of the Group’s employees and flexible workers;
3.  Fostering business relationships with customers, suppliers, 

regulators and investors;

4.  Reducing the risk of modern slavery in our supply chains;
5.  The impact of operations on the community and  

the environment;

6.  Maintaining a reputation for high standards of business 

conduct; and

7.  The need to act fairly between members of the Company.

This underpins the Board’s ability to set the overall strategic 
direction of the Group and support its core values, policies and 
procedures, which in turn, creates an environment in which the 
business and its employees can act with integrity and 
effectiveness, whilst driving profitable growth. We aim to 
demonstrate this through our decisions and within our corporate 
policies. Information on how the Board considered its stakeholders 
when making principal decisions is provided in the Section 172 
Statement on pages 28 to 29.

4. Embed effective risk management, 
considering both opportunities and threats, 
throughout the organisation 
The Board is responsible for maintaining a strong system of 
internal control to safeguard shareholders’ interests, the Group’s 
assets and for reviewing its effectiveness. The system of internal 
financial control is designed to provide reasonable, but not 
absolute, assurance against material misstatement or loss. 

Whilst a Group-level risk register was maintained in the past, this 
was not integrated with Divisional-level risk management 
processes. Following the appointment of a Group Head of Internal 
Audit in September 2020, a comprehensive review of risk 
management processes and risk registers at both Divisional and 
Group level was undertaken as a priority. 

A Group Risk Management Policy and robust, standardised 
approach to risk management was defined and, following 
approval by the Audit Committee is being implemented across the 
businesses, with regular updates provided to the Audit Committee 
and the Board. The approach is based on assessing threats to the 
Group’s financial performance, liquidity, reporting, regulatory 
compliance and reputation, all of which are considered by the 
Board to be key to the ongoing success of the business.

The Head of Internal Audit also led a review of key compliance 
policies in the Group, assisted by external legal counsel. Following 
completion of this review Group-level policies have been defined 
to establish a standard approach across the business in relation 
to matter such as fraud, bribery, competition, whistle-blowing and 
conflicts of interest. Employees will receive training relevant to 
their specific roles as part of the Group’s ongoing compliance 
programme.

The PeoplePlus Governance Director has been seconded to 
Staffline Recruitment since January 2021 and tasked with 
implementing a more formalised governance infrastructure 
drawing, where appropriate, on existing arrangements in  
PeoplePlus.

The Group has an independent compliance audit team 
responsible for checking legality to work and compliance with 
industry body standards (e.g. GLAA and REC). The Payroll team 
receive ongoing training to ensure compliance with relevant 
legislation and procedures.

From a financial control point of view, clear authority levels for a 
range of transactions are in place and there is regular review of 
financial information at all management levels and up to the 
Board. To strengthen these arrangements the Board approved a 
Group Delegation of Authority Policy and matrix in late 2020 for 
implementation from 1 January 2021. In line with best governance 
practice, the Board also approved a formalised Schedule of 
Matters Reserved for the Board.

The framework provided by these documents provides clarity 
around the extent to which the Board, as the body that has 
ultimate responsibility for managing the Group’s business and 
safeguarding the interest of its stakeholders, has chosen to 
delegate its authority in specific areas. Our Principal Risks and 
Uncertainties report can be found on pages 33 to 36 of the  
Annual Report.

5. Maintain the Board as a well-functioning, 
balanced team led by the Chair 
The Board’s role is to provide entrepreneurial leadership of the 
Group within a framework of prudent and effective controls which 
enable risk to be assessed and managed. It has a formal schedule 
of matters reserved for its decision. The Board delegates certain 
functions to its three principal committees: the Audit Committee; 
the Remuneration Committee; and the Nominations Committee.

Audit Committee
Responsible for the integrity of the Company’s financial 
statements and performance, ensuring the necessary internal 
controls and risk management systems are in place and effective. 
The Audit Committee meets at least four times a year.

Remuneration Committee
Responsible for the review, recommendation and implementation 
of the Group’s remuneration strategy, its framework and costs. 
The Remuneration Committee meets twice a year and on an ad 
hoc basis.

Financial StatementsStrategic Report42

Staffline Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2020

Corporate Governance continued

Nominations Committee
Responsible for ensuring that the Company has the executive and 
non-executive Board leadership it requires. The Nominations 
Committee meets as and when required.

Details of the members of the Board are set out on pages 38 to 39.

There is an appropriate combination of Executive and Non-
Executive Directors, with two Executive and three Independent 
Non-Executive Directors, excluding the Chairman. Ian Lawson, 
Non-Executive Chair leads the Board and is responsible for 
promoting the strategic success of the Company and creating 
value for Shareholders in the long-term, whilst ensuring that 
sound, effective corporate governance practices are embedded in 
the Group and in its decision-making processes. Albert Ellis, Chief 
Executive Officer is responsible for developing and delivering the 
Group’s strategy within the policies and values established by  
the Board. 

Daniel Quint, Chief Financial Officer is responsible for managing 
the financial risks, reporting and planning of the Group. 

Richard Thomson, Ian Starkey and Catherine Lynch, the 
Independent Non-Executive Directors, bring independent and 
objective analysis to all matters before the Board and its 
Committees using their substantial and wide-ranging experience. 
They monitor the executives’ delivery of strategy within the risk 
and governance structure agreed by the Board. Richard Thomson 
is the Senior Independent Director. In this role he supports the 
Chairman and provides an independent point of contact to 
shareholders on Board matters. Non-Executive Directors are 
expected to commit two days per month to the Company. This 
includes attendance at Board and Committee meetings, strategy 
sessions, the Annual General meeting and meetings with 
shareholders and employees. 

The Board meets at least six times each year. During 2020, the 
Board held 20 formal Board meetings. The additional number of 
meetings principally related to the Group’s refinancing 
requirements, its liquidity position and the Covid-19 pandemic, 
with a focus on the health and safety of the Group’s employees 
and customers. In addition, the Board focused on strengthening 
the Company’s corporate governance processes, including its 
financial controls. Given the Covid-19 pandemic, the majority of 
meetings were remote. In addition to the standard agenda items, 
the Board considered the following matters during the year:
•  A revised financing structure with the Group’s lenders, 
announced on 29 June 2020, which included a revised 
covenant package more appropriate for the Group’s trading 
levels. The refinancing provided the Group with the platform to 
focus on its turnaround plan, including margin improvement 
measures, cost reduction initiatives and working capital 
improvements;

•  The impact of the Covid-19 pandemic on the Group’s 

operations and mitigating actions to protect the business, with 
a particular focus on ensuring the health and safety of the 
Group’s employees and customers;

•  The disposal of the Apprenticeships business of the Group’s 

PeoplePlus division, which formed part of PeoplePlus’  
strategic re-focus on its core employability and adult skills 
capabilities; and

•  The restructuring of the Board which included the 

appointments of Ian Lawson as Chair in April 2020, Daniel 
Quint, Interim Chief Financial Officer to the Board, in May 
2020 and Albert Ellis as Chief Executive Officer in October 
2020, having acted as an Independent Non-Executive Director 
from March 2020. This extensive period of Board restructuring 
concluded with the appointment of Ian Starkey and Catherine 
Lynch as Independent Non-Executive Directors on 1 January 
2021 and Daniel Quint as Chief Financial Officer on 1 February 
2021. In addition, Richard Thomson was appointed as Senior 
Independent Director on 24 April 2020.

The Board meeting attendance for the 20 Board meetings held in 
2020 is below:

Director

Tracy Lewis1 
Ian Lawson2 (Chair from 25 April 2020)
Ed Barker3
Albert Ellis4
Chris Pullen5
Daniel Quint6
Richard Thomson
Dawn Ward7

Number of 
meetings 
attended

8
12
1
15
9
9
20
8

Maximum 
number of 
meetings 
possible

8
12
1
15
9
9
20
8

1   Tracy Lewis resigned as Chairman on 24 April 2020.
2 

Ian Lawson was appointed as Executive Chairman on 25 April 2020 and moved to 
Non-Executive Chair on 31 December 2020.

3  Ed Barker resigned on 31 January 2020.
4  Albert Ellis was appointed as an Independent Non-Executive Director on 17 March 

2020 and as Chief Executive Officer on 1 October 2020.

5   Chris Pullen resigned on 26 April 2020.
6  Daniel Quint was appointed as a Director on 18 May 2020, having joined the 
Group as Interim Chief Financial Officer on 18 December 2019. In addition, 
following his appointment as Interim Chief Financial Officer, and prior to his 
appointment as a Director, Mr Quint attended Board meetings by invitation of the 
Chairman. This attendance by invitation is not included in the above table.

7   Dawn Ward resigned from the Board on 23 April 2020.

Directors are given timely and relevant management information 
before each Board meeting. Directors are able to obtain 
independent professional advice in the course of their duties, at 
the Group’s expense. All Directors submit themselves for re-
election annually.

6. Ensure that between them the Directors 
have the necessary up-to-date experience, 
skills and capabilities 
The Board currently comprises the Non-Executive Chairman, three 
independent Non-Executive Directors and two Executive Directors, with 
a range of different experience and backgrounds. 

During 2020 the Board made significant progress with its strategic 
priority of improving the Group’s corporate governance structure. This 
included an extensive period of Board restructuring which concluded 
with the appointment of Ian Starkey and Catherine Lynch as 
Independent Non-Executive Directors on 1 January 2021. 

Ian, a qualified chartered accountant, has significant financial 
expertise, specifically in financial management, control and reporting. 
Ian had a 35 year career at KPMG, including 23 years as a lead audit 
engagement partner in the UK and Switzerland, and as a member of 
the UK Board. Ian chairs the Group’s Audit Committee.

Catherine is a highly experienced HR director, with over 20 years’ 
experience, and is currently Chief People Officer UK & Ireland at Flutter 
Entertainment plc, the FTSE 100-listed global sports betting, gaming 
and entertainment company. She is also a member of the Advisory 
Board of Dial Global, a community focused on inclusion. Catherine 
chairs the Group’s Remuneration Committee. 

Other Board appointments during the year were:
• 

Ian Lawson as Executive Chairman in April 2020. Ian has over 
16 years’ public company board-level experience. Ian moved to 
Non-Executive Chairman of the Board on 31 December 2020, 
following a period of operational handover and transition to 
Albert Ellis, who was appointed as Chief Executive Officer in 
October 2020;

•  Daniel Quint as a Director in May 2020, continuing as Interim 

Chief Financial Officer, after joining the Group on 18 December 
2019. Daniel was appointed as Chief Financial Officer on 
1 February 2021. Daniel has over 11 years’ experience at board 
level at both private and public companies. He is a Fellow of the 
Institute of Chartered Accountants in England and Wales;

•  Albert Ellis as Chief Executive Officer in October 2020, prior to 

which, and from 17 March 2020, Albert had acted as an 
Independent Non-Executive Director of the Company. Albert 
has extensive executive level experience in the recruitment and 
human capital sectors; and

•  Richard Thomson, Independent Non-Executive Director, as 

Senior Independent Director on 24 April 2020. Richard has a 
wealth of commercial and financial experience.

The Nominations Committee is responsible for the appointment 
of Directors but ensures that the whole Board is involved in 
the process.

Following the above appointments, the Board believes that the 
Company has a strong, independent, highly qualified and 
diverse Board with the right people in place to lead the business. 
Biographical details of the Directors are set out on pages 38 
and 39. 

Directors are encouraged to keep their skills up to date by 
attending appropriate courses. A number of Directors are either 
currently, or have previously been, members of other Boards 
where new skills can be learned. 

Governance

43

7. Evaluate Board performance based on  
clear and relevant objectives, seeking 
continuous improvement 
2020 was a year of transformation for the Board, which 
culminated with the appointment of Catherine Lynch and Ian 
Starkey as independent Non-Executive Directors on 1 January 
2021. Consequently, given the changes to the Board during the 
year, with five Directors departing and three Directors appointed 
to the Board, the Board did not consider it appropriate to evaluate 
its performance during 2020. The Board intends to conduct a 
Board evaluation in the latter part of this year, once the newly 
constituted Board is fully established.

During 2021, the Board proposes to conduct the Board evaluation 
internally, with the use of a questionnaire, which will focus on the 
remit and key issues facing the Board. In particular, the Board will 
consider how it discharges its strategic remit and reviews key 
issues facing the Group. If required, Directors will discuss any 
matters with the Chairman or Senior Independent Director as 
appropriate. The Chairman will discuss the outcome of the 
evaluation, including any recommendations and actions, with the 
Board. Details of this evaluation, including details of the outcome 
and actions will be included in the 2021 Annual Report.

Thereafter the Board evaluation will be on an annual basis.  
The Board intends to carry out an external evaluation in the latter 
part of 2022.

8. Promote a corporate culture that is based 
on ethical values and behaviours 
Our corporate values are:
•  Teamwork: working together across the business to achieve 

more for our customers;

•  Respect: taking time to understand, trust and support each 

other to achieve shared success;

•  Commitment: demonstrating a relentless and driven ambition 

to exceed expectations;

•  Reliability: fulfilling all our customer requirements, getting the 

job done;

•  Creativity: solving problems and suggesting new ideas and 

• 

insights; and
Integrity: doing things the right way, for the right reason, 
ethically, honestly, every time.

These values are driven by the Board and are at the heart of all 
our processes and decisions.

We take compliance with legislation and industry standards 
extremely seriously. A review of certain of the Group’s compliance 
policies including bribery, fraud and whistle-blowing led by the 
Group’s Head of Internal Audit is being undertaken together with 
the Group’s external legal counsel. In addition the Group’s 
Compliance Manager presented to the Board in February 2021. 
Further details are provided on page 45.

We are committed to reducing the threat of modern slavery and 
human trafficking and work with likeminded organisations to try 
to achieve this. This is described in the Corporate and Social 
Responsibility section, along with our commitment to health and 
safety and our approach to General Data Protection Regulations.

Financial StatementsStrategic Report44

Staffline Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2020

Corporate Governance continued

9. Maintain governance structures and 
processes that are fit for purpose and support 
good decision-making by the Board 
During the year, and in accordance with best governance 
practice, the Board approved a Schedule of Matters Reserved for 
the Board. These matters include:
•  Setting the Group’s strategy, including the values  

and standards;

•  Approving any changes to the Company’s structure  

and capital;

•  Approval of (i) Annual Report and Accounts (ii) half-yearly 

reports (iii) dividend policy and (iv) approval of any significant 
changes in accounting policies or practices;

•  Ensuring maintenance of a sound system of internal controls 

and risk management;

•  Approval and oversight of major capital projects;
•  Approval of contracts of the Group or proposed by any 

subsidiary not in the ordinary course of business;

•  Major investments; 
•  Communications with shareholders;
•  Board and Committee membership;
•  Remuneration of Directors, Company Secretary and other 

senior executives;

•  Prescribing a matrix of authority limits for delegation to the 
various tiers of management and oversight bodies; and
•  Approval of key policies including, Code of Conduct, Share 

Dealing Code, Bribery Prevention Policy and Whistleblowing 
Policy.

The Chair is responsible for leading the Board, facilitating the 
effective contribution of all members and ensuring that it operates 
effectively in the interests of the shareholders. 

As noted under Principle 5, the Board delegates certain functions 
to its three committees: the Audit Committee; the Remuneration 
Committee; and the Nominations Committee.

Audit Committee 
The Audit Committee has responsibility for: 
1.  Oversight of the effectiveness, integrity and quality of the 

Company’s financial reporting; 

2.  Reviewing the effectiveness of whistleblowing arrangements
3.  Oversight of the design, implementation and effectiveness of 
internal financial controls - identifying and commissioning 
specific internal control reviews;

4.  Overseeing the independence and effectiveness of the internal 

audit function;

5.  Appointment of external auditors, their independence and 

performance;

6.  The external audit process – meeting the external auditors and 
reviewing any reports from them regarding financial reporting 
and internal control systems;

7.  Oversight of the Group’s Risk Register (see pages 33 to 36),  

risk appetite and tolerance; and

8.  Oversight of developments in relevant financial reporting 

legislation and regulation.

In accordance with its terms of reference, the Audit Committee 
meets at least four times a year at appropriate intervals in the 
financial reporting and audit cycle and otherwise as required.  
The Committee met eight times during 2020. 2020 meeting 
attendance is provided below, along with the key agenda items:

Director

Ed Barker1
Albert Ellis2
Ian Lawson3
Tracy Lewis4
Richard Thomson5
Dawn Ward6

Number of 
meetings 
attended

Maximum 
number of 
meetings 
possible

1
5
4
2
8
3

1
5
4
2
8
3

1 

Ed Barker resigned as a Director and as Chair of the Committee on  
31 January 2020.

2  Albert Ellis was appointed as Chairman of the Committee on 17 March 2020.  
He resigned as Committee Chair and as a member of the Committee on 
1 October 2020 upon his appointment as Chief Executive Officer.
Ian Lawson was appointed as Executive Chairman and as a member of the 
Committee on 27 April 2020.

3 

4  Tracy Lewis resigned as a Director and member of the Committee on  

24 April 2020.

5  Richard Thomson was a member of the Committee during 2020, acting as 

Committee Chair from 1 February 2020 to 17 March 2020 and from 1 October 
2020 to 31 December 2020.

6  Dawn Ward resigned as a Director and as a member of the Committee on  

23 April 2020.

Key items considered by the Committee
•  Annual external audit plan;
•  Year-end external audit findings;
•  Fees of the external auditors;
•  Results announcement and Annual Report, including  

form of the external audit opinion;
Interim results announcement;

• 
•  Letters of Representation provided to the external auditors;
•  Appropriateness of applying the going concern basis of 

preparation in the Financial Statements;
•  Key accounting judgements and estimates;
•  Establishment of a Group internal audit function and 

appointment of Head of Internal Audit; 

•  Reviewing and approving the internal audit strategy and  

work plan for 2021;

•  The Group’s risk management arrangements, including 

consideration of a new Risk Management Framework and 
review of the Risk Register;

•  Ongoing project to improve internal controls; 
•  Review of compliance policies;
•  Review of delegation of authority matrix and Matters Reserved 

for the Board; and

•  Prior year adjustments (considered in 2020 as part of  

the 2019 year-end audit).

Since the year end the Audit Quality Review (“AQR”) group of the 
Financial Reporting Council has completed a review of Grant 
Thornton’s audit of our financial statements for the year ended 
31 December 2019. The Audit Committee considered the report 
from the AQR and discussed the findings with Grant Thornton. 
There were no key findings arising from the review.

Governance

45

Strengthening of governance arrangements and  
internal controls
During 2020, the following actions were taken by the Committee 
as part of the Group’s commitment to strengthen its governance 
arrangements:

1.  Internal Audit Function: the Committee approved the 

establishment of an internal audit function, including the 
appointment of a Group Head of Internal Audit and approval of 
an Internal Audit Charter. In accordance with the Charter the 
internal audit function:
-  Evaluates and reports to the Committee on the adequacy 
and effectiveness of internal controls and governance 
arrangements across the Group;

-  Promotes awareness of business risk, supporting 

management in developing and maintaining appropriate 
risk management processes;

-  Monitors and reviews the development and implementation 

- 

of appropriate compliance policies across the Group;
Identifies and supports the implementation of business 
process and control improvements; and

-  Provides expertise in relation to business controls, risk 

management and governance.

2.  Risk Management Framework: the Committee received a report 
from the Group Head of Internal Audit following his review of 
the risk management arrangements across the Group. 
Following consideration by the Committee a number of 
recommendations were adopted to establish a well-defined 
and embedded risk management framework within the Group. 
Management of risk and the continued development of the risk 
management framework will be a key focus for the Committee 
during 2021. Further details of the Group’s risk management 
framework and its consideration of risks are provided on pages 
33 to 36.

3.  Delegation of Authority Matrix and Matters Reserved for the 
Board: The Committee reviewed and approved a formal 
Delegation of Authority Policy and Schedule of Matters 
Reserved for the Board.

4.  Compliance Policies: The Committee commenced a review of 

the Group’s compliance policies including: (i) specific approval 
procedures for all related party transactions (ii) Whistleblowing 
Policy (iii) Anti-Bribery Policy; (iv) Risk Management Policy  
(v) Money Laundering Policy and (vi) Delegation of Authority 
Policy. The Committee’s review of the Group’s compliance 
policies, which is led by the Head of Internal Audit, with the 
assistance of external legal counsel, is ongoing. Following 
completion of this review and amendment to any policies, 
relevant employees will receive training as part of the Group’s 
ongoing compliance programme.

5.  Company Secretary: in order to improve governance and 

regulatory compliance the Committee recommended to the 
Board the appointment of a qualified Company Secretary.  
This resulted in the appointment of Prism Cosec Limited as 
Company Secretary on 1 August 2020 and subsequently the 
appointment of Louise Barber FCG on 15 March 2021.  
Non-Executive Directors have access to the Executive Directors, 
the Company Secretary and the Company’s advisors.

The key audit matters considered by the Committee: 
•  Revenue recognition
•  Going concern
•  Valuation of goodwill and intangible assets
•  Valuation of investments held by the Company
•  Non-underlying administrative expenses
•  Quality of earnings

Remuneration Committee
The Remuneration Committee ensures that remuneration 
arrangements support the strategic aims of the business and 
enable the recruitment, motivation and retention of senior 
executives in a manner that is aligned to shareholder interests, 
while also complying with the requirements of regulation. In 
addition to reviewing and agreeing Directors’ remuneration, the 
Committee also approves proposed remuneration packages for 
new appointments and remuneration changes for all employees 
where their basic gross salary is £120,000 or above.

The members of the Committee are all Non-Executive Directors. 
Except as shareholders and Directors, none of the members has 
any personal financial interest in the Group.

The Remuneration Committee meets at least twice a year and on 
an ad hoc basis to agree remuneration of new appointments or 
deal with exceptional circumstances. The meeting attendance for 
the nine meetings held in 2020 is below:

Director

Dawn Ward (Chair)1
Richard Thomson (Chair)2
Ed Barker3
Albert Ellis4
Ian Lawson5
Tracy Lewis6

Number of 
meetings 
attended

Maximum 
number of 
meetings 
possible

4
5
1
5
5
4

4
5
1
5
5
4

1  Dawn Ward resigned as a Director and as Chair of the Committee on  

24 April 2020.

2  Richard Thomson was appointed as Committee Chair on 24 April 2020.  

He resigned as Committee Chair on 31 December 2020.

3  Ed Barker resigned as a Director and member of the Committee on  

31 January 2020.

4    Albert Ellis was appointed as a member of the Committee on 17 March 2020.  
He resigned as a member of the Committee on 1 October 2020 upon his 
appointment as Chief Executive Officer.
Ian Lawson was appointed as a Director and as a member of the Committee on 
25 April 2020.

5  

6  Tracy Lewis resigned as a Director and as a member of the Committee on  

24 April 2020.

Financial StatementsStrategic Report46

Staffline Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2020

Corporate Governance continued

Key items considered by the Committee during 2020
•  Consideration of remuneration arrangements to be offered to:
 – Ian Lawson in respect of his appointment as Executive 

Chair; 

Key items considered by the Committee 
•  Approval of the appointment of Albert Ellis as a Non-Executive 
Director on 17 March 2020 and as Chief Executive Officer on 
1 October 2020;

 – Albert Ellis in respect of his appointment as Chief Executive 

•  Approval of the appointment of Ian Lawson as Executive 

Officer; 

Chairman; 

 – Daniel Quint in respect of his appointment as Chief 

•  Approval of the appointment of Daniel Quint, Interim Chief 

Financial Officer; and

 – Other senior management appointments within the Group

•  Bonus objectives for 2021 annual bonuses for the Chief 

Financial Officer as a Director on 18 May 2020 and 
appointment as Chief Financial Officer on 1 February 2021; 
and

Executive Officer, Chief Financial Officer, Divisional Managing 
Directors and Divisional Finance Directors;

•  Approval of appointment of Catherine Lynch and Ian Starkey 
as Independent Non-Executive Directors on 1 January 2021.

•  Discussion on Executive remuneration and Non-Executive fees;
•  Proposed increase in Non-Executive Directors fees, including 

additional fee for Committee Chair;

•  Compensation to be offered to departing Executive Director;
•  Approval to offer remuneration packages to proposed senior 

appointments; 

•  Current share option schemes;
•  A new Long-Term Incentive Plan for Executive Directors and 

senior executives; and

•  Standardisation of contracts for the Group’s senior executive 

management.

Nominations Committee
The Nominations Committee reviews the structure and 
composition of the Board and its Committees, particularly the 
skills, knowledge and experience of Directors. Succession planning 
and approval of Board appointments form an important part of 
the Committee’s responsibilities.

The Nominations Committee meets as and when required. The 
meeting attendance for the eight meetings held in 2020 is below, 
along with the key agenda items: 

Director

Dawn Ward (Chair)1
Richard Thomson (Chair)2
Ian Lawson (Chair)3
Ed Barker4
Albert Ellis5
Tracy Lewis6
Chris Pullen7

Number of 
meetings 
attended

Maximum 
number of 
meetings 
possible

4
8
3
1
4
4
5

4
8
3
1
4
4
5

1  Dawn Ward was appointed Chair of Nominations Committee on 18 October 2019 

and resigned on 23 April 2020.

2  Richard Thomson was appointed as Chair on 24 April 2020.
3 

Ian Lawson was appointed as a Director and as Committee Chair on  
25 April 2020.

4  Ed Barker resigned as a Director and as a member of the Committee on 

31 January 2020.

5  Albert Ellis was appointed as a Director and as a Committee Member on  

17 March 2020.

6  Tracy Lewis resigned as a Director and as a member of the Committee on  

24 April 2020.

7  Chris Pullen resigned on 26 April 2020. He recused himself from the part  

of certain meetings that discussed his successor.

10. Communicate how the Company is 
governed and is performing by maintaining  
a dialogue with shareholders and other 
relevant stakeholders
The Board is responsible for representing and promoting the 
interests of the Group’s shareholders and is accountable to them 
for the long-term success of the Group.

The Executive Directors endeavour to hold regular meetings with 
institutional shareholders. They also update on the performance 
of the Group to shareholders and wider stakeholders at the 
interim and annual results presentations. 

On 11 August 2020, the Company announced the withdrawal of 
the following three Resolutions to be proposed at the Company’s 
Annual General Meeting to be held on 12 August 2020  
(the “2020 AGM"):
•  Resolution 9: General authority to allot shares
•  Resolution 10: Disapplication of pre-emption rights (General)
•  Resolution 11: Disapplication of pre-emption rights  

(Acquisition or Capital Investment)

Resolutions 10 and 11 were Special Resolutions, requiring at least 
75% of shareholders voting to vote in favour of the resolution. The 
Board decided to withdraw these resolutions following shareholder 
consultation. The Board has maintained a dialogue with these 
shareholders to ensure that it fully understands the concerns that 
they have raised. The Company proposes to seek authority for 
similar resolutions at the 2021 Annual General Meeting and 
understands that, following further consultation, these 
shareholders will be supportive. The Board welcomes dialogue 
with all shareholders.

All other Resolutions proposed at the 2020 AGM were passed on a 
poll, with more than 99% of shareholders voting, voting in favour 
of the resolution. Votes were cast in respect of approximately 49% 
of the issued share capital.

The Executive Directors also hold regular meetings and maintain 
an ongoing dialogue with the Group’s lenders.

Details of the governance structure and work of the Board 
committees are included in the Annual Report.

Report on Remuneration 

Governance

47

The Remuneration Committee comprises four Directors, of which 
three were Independent Non-Executive Directors: Catherine Lynch 
(Chairman), Richard Thomson and Ian Starkey. In addition, during 
the year, Ian Lawson was Executive Chair and was not considered 
to be an independent Director. The Board notes that this did not 
comply with the QCA Corporate Governance Code which states 
that all members of a remuneration committee must be 
independent. However, the Board deemed it appropriate for Ian 
Lawson to be appointed as a member of the Committee given that 
Albert Ellis had only joined the Board on 17 March 2020, and 
without Ian’s membership the Committee would have comprised 
of two members only. 

Basic salary
The Committee reviews the basic salary of Executive Directors 
annually. In addition, salary may be reviewed if an individual 
changes position or responsibility. In deciding appropriate levels, 
the Committee takes into account objective research on 
comparable companies, general market conditions and business 
and personal performance. 

Mr Chris Pullen resigned as Chief Executive Officer on 19 February 
2020, but continued in this role to ensure an orderly succession in 
order to maintain business continuity. He resigned as a Director on 
26 April 2020. He did not receive any salary increase during 2020.

Policy on Executive Directors’ remuneration
The Executive Directors’ remuneration packages are designed to 
attract, motivate and retain Directors of the high calibre needed 
to help the Group successfully compete in its market-place. The 
Group’s policies are to pay Executive Directors a salary at market 
levels for comparable jobs in the sector whilst recognising the 
relative size and complexity of the Group. 

The remuneration of the Directors, which was all paid by the 
Group, is detailed on page 49 of these financial statements.

Advisers to the Committee
In the latter part of 2020, the Committee appointed Mercer to act 
as the Committee’s advisers to provide services to the Committee, 
including in connection with the design and implementation of a 
new long term incentive plan (the New Long Term Incentive Plan). 
The Committee has consulted with a number of the Company’s 
major shareholders on this proposed long-term incentive 
arrangement. The Committee plans to make awards under the 
New Long Term Incentive Plan to the Executive Directors and 
certain members of the senior management team during 2021. 
Vesting of awards will be conditional upon the satisfaction of 
performance conditions over a three-year vesting period and 
continuous employment within the Staffline Group. The  
Company will announce details of the awards made to the 
Executive Directors, including details of the performance 
conditions via a Regulatory News Service immediately upon 
granting of the awards. 

Responsibilities
The Committee acts in accordance with its formal Terms of 
Reference, which are available on the Company’s website. The 
Committee makes recommendations to the Board, within its Terms 
of Reference, on the remuneration and other benefits, including 
bonuses and long-term incentive plans, of the Executive Directors 
and members of senior management. In addition, the Committee 
considers the remuneration for the Chairman.

The Board sets the annual base fees payable to the Non-Executive 
Directors and they do not receive any additional benefits, nor are 
they eligible to participate in any pension, bonus or share-based 
incentive arrangements.

No Director plays a part in any decision about his or her own 
remuneration. Executive Directors may accept appointments 
outside the Group subject to prior Board approval. 

The Company appointed three Executive Directors during the 
year, including the appointment of Ian Lawson as Executive 
Chairman on 25 April 2020. Details of their basic salary are 
provided below:
• 

Ian Lawson was appointed as Executive Chairman on 25 April 
2020. His salary was agreed at £195,000 p.a. based on a three 
day per week time commitment, ratcheting down to £100,000 
p.a. on the basis of a one day per week time commitment, or 
upon the appointment of a Chief Executive Officer;

•  Albert Ellis, Independent Non-Executive Director, was appointed 
as Chief Executive Officer on 1 October 2020, on a base salary 
of £350,000 p.a. Details of the fee he received for the period 
26 April 2020 to 30 September 2020 in his position as an 
Independent Non-Executive Director is provided on page [xx]; 
and

•  Daniel Quint, Interim Chief Financial Officer, was appointed as 
a Director of the Company on 18 May 2020. During the period 
from 18 May 2020 to 31 January 2021, he continued to receive 
payment in his capacity as Interim Chief Financial Officer. 
Following his appointment as Chief Financial Officer on 
1 February 2021, Daniel receives a basic salary of  
£275,000 p.a.

Salary review: The Committee will review the salary of Messrs 
Ellis and Quint in January 2022. There is no obligation for the 
Committee to increase their salaries following this review.

Entitlement to reduce salary: The Committee recognises that 
there may be circumstances where the continual normal operation 
of the Company’s business is reasonably perceived to be at risk 
due to exceptional and/or unexpected serious national or 
international events which directly or indirectly impact on the 
Company (including, but not limited to a catastrophe, a 
pandemic, war, terrorism or financial crisis). In these 
circumstances, the Company has reserved the right acting 
reasonably to reduce the salary of Albert Ellis, Chief Executive 
Officer or Daniel Quint, Chief Financial Officer by a maximum of 
20%, without any corresponding reduction in their normal working 
hours. This reduction has not been applied to the salary of either 
Mr Ellis or Mr Quint during the Covid-19 pandemic given that they 
only commenced employment under their service agreements, 
which contained this provision, on 1 October 2020 and 1 February 
2021 respectively.

Financial StatementsStrategic Report 
48

Staffline Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2020

Report on Remuneration continued

Annual bonus
Annual bonuses are awarded at the discretion of the 
Remuneration Committee as an incentive and to reward 
performance during the financial year pursuant to specific 
performance criteria. In exercising its discretion, the Committee 
takes into account the underlying profit before taxation 
performance against budget amongst other things. The 
Committee believes that incentive compensation should recognise 
the growth and profitability of the business, which should be 
aligned to the interests of shareholders.

From the date of award, the right to sell the JSOP shares was not 
at the discretion of the executives but instead at the discretion of 
the Employee Benefit Trust. On disposal of the shares, the amount 
received by the executives is calculated based on certain business 
performance conditions, as follows: 
1.  A range of underlying diluted EPS of between 180.0p and 

200.0p required in the financial year 2022 (maximum 50%  
of the award). No shares vest if the EPS is below 180.0p in  
that year; and

2.  50% of the award is subject to an additional condition that 

2020 Annual bonus
No bonus was due or payable to Chris Pullen, Chief Executive 
Officer who resigned on 19 February 2020 and departed the 
Company as Chief Executive Officer and as a Director on  
26 April 2020.

Albert Ellis did not participate in a 2020 annual bonus plan due to 
his appointment on 1 October 2020 and in light of the ongoing 
Covid-19 pandemic. 

Daniel Quint was appointed as a Director on 18 May 2020, having 
been appointed as Interim Chief Financial Officer on 17 December 
2019. Mr Quint received a fee through a limited company during 
his appointment as Interim Chief Financial Officer. Daniel was not 
entitled to receive any benefits or bonus from the Company until 
his appointment as a Chief Financial Officer on 1 February 2021.

2021 Annual bonus
Albert Ellis and Daniel Quint will be entitled to a bonus equivalent 
to a maximum of 100% of their base salary, subject to the 
achievement of pre-determined performance conditions. The 
annual bonus is not contractual and is at the sole discretion of 
the Committee.

Details of the 2021 annual bonus outcome will be provided in the 
2021 Annual Report.

Directors’ share options
No Directors participate in the Company’s Save As You Earn 
(“SAYE”) share scheme.

Joint Share Ownership Plan 2018
In October 2017, the Remuneration Committee approved a Joint 
Share Ownership Plan (“JSOP”) to provide additional incentives to 
certain senior executives, covering the five-year period ending 
31 December 2022. 

The JSOP shares are held jointly between the Directors and the 
Staffline Group plc Employee Benefit Trust. Under the terms of the 
JSOP rules the Directors are eligible to receive the excess of any 
disposal proceeds received for the JSOP shares over the 
participation price. The JSOP shares do not carry dividend or 
voting rights whilst they are jointly held by the Directors and the 
Staffline Group plc Employee Benefit Trust.

total shareholder return exceeds the increase in the AXX over 
the period 1 January 2018 to 30 June 2023 (nil award if the 
minimum EPS requirement above is not achieved). The 
Company’s share price at 1 January 2018 was 1,040p and the 
AXX stood at 1,050. As at 31 December 2019, the Company’s 
share price had decreased by 92% to 87p, albeit the number of 
issued shares having increased by 147%, whereas the AXX had 
fallen by 8% to 958.

The Directors’ interests are detailed below:

Director

Award date

C Pullen1

24 Jan
2018

Participation 
price

Interest over 
number of 
shares

Lapsed 
during the 
year

Date on 
which 
exercisable

999p 275,000 275,000

30 June 
2023

1   C Pullen resigned on 26 April 2020 and his entitlement to the shares subject to the 

JSOP lapsed.

Pension arrangements
The Group has a defined contribution pension scheme with 
Scottish Widows for all permanent employees. Executive Directors 
are entitled to receive a contribution from the Group equivalent to 
10% of their basic salary into this or another scheme of their 
choice. A cash allowance of 10% of basic salary is paid in lieu of 
Company pension contribution at the request of the Director.

Daniel Quint was not entitled to receive any pension contribution 
or cash allowance from the Company during his appointment as 
Interim Chief Financial Officer.

The Group operates a defined benefit pension scheme. However, 
no Directors are members. 

Other benefits and benefits in kind
Albert Ellis and Daniel Quint are entitled to receive the following 
benefits from 1 October 2020 and 1 February 2021 respectively:
1.  Life assurance cover of four times salary;
2.  Private medical insurance for themselves, their spouse and 

their children;

3.  Car allowance of £12,000 p.a.; and
4.  Permanent Health Insurance.

Daniel Quint was not entitled to receive any benefits or benefits  
in kind during 2020. Chris Pullen received private medical 
insurance, life cover and car allowance until his date of  
departure on 26 April 2020.

None of the Non-Executive Directors or the Chairman received 
any benefits or benefits in kind.

Governance

49

Policy on Non-Executive Directors’ remuneration
The remuneration of the Non-Executive Directors is determined by the Board and is based upon independent surveys of fees paid to 
Non-Executive Directors of similar companies. 

The Non-Executive Directors do not receive any benefits apart from their basic salaries or fees.

From 1 January 2020 to 31 May 2020, the Non-Executive Directors received a salary of £30,000 p.a.

During the year, the Board approved the following changes to the remuneration of the Non-Executive Directors, effective from 
1 June 2020:
•  An increase in the base salary of the Independent Non-Executive Directors from £30,000 to £40,000;
•  An additional fee of £5,000 p.a. payable to (i) the Chair of the Audit Committee and (ii) the Chair of the Remuneration  

Committee; and

•  That subject to prior agreement by the Remuneration Committee a day-rate can be charged at a rate of £1,500 per day (plus VAT, if 
applicable), by any Non-Executive Director, in the event that there is work required in addition to their normal duties. The normal 
duties of a Non-Executive Director are anticipated to take two days per month.

Service contracts
The Executive Directors have entered into service agreements with the Company. Albert Ellis has a service agreement which is 
terminable on six months’ notice given by Mr Ellis, and 12 months’ notice given by the Company, Daniel Quint has a service agreement 
which is terminable on 12 months’ notice given by either party. 

Letters of appointment
Ian Lawson, Richard Thomson, Ian Starkey and Catherine Lynch each have contracts terminable on six months’ notice given by either 
party. There are no contractual termination payments other than as a result of the contractual notice period.

Directors’ remuneration summary (audited)
The table below sets out the remuneration received by the Directors in respect of the year ended 31 December 2020 and for the year 
ended 31 December 2019:

Executive Directors
A Ellis1
D Quint2
C Pullen3

M Watts

Chair
I Lawson4
T Lewis5

J Crabtree

Non-Executive Directors
E Barker6

A Ellis1
R Thomson7

D Ward8

Year

Salary, fees
£000

Annual bonus 
£000

Car allowance 
£000

Pension9  
£000

Compensation for 
loss of office  
£000

Others10
£000

2020
2020
2020
2019
2019

2020
2020
2019
2019

2020
2019
2020
2020
2019
2020
2019

2020

2019

88
413
125
325
220

133
25
47
58

3
30
27
61
9
10
30

885

719

–
–
–
–
–

–
–
–
–

–
–
–
–
–
–
–

–

–

3
–
5
12
12

–
–
–
–

–
–
–
–
–
–
–

8

24

9
–
14
33
22

–
–
–
–

–
–
–
–
–
–
–

23

55

–
–
–
–
165

–
–
–
38

–
–
–
–
–
–
–

–

203

–
–
–
1
1

–
–
–
–

–
–
–
–
–
–
–

–

2

Total
£000

100
413
144
371
420

133
25
47
96

3
30
27
61
9
10
30

916

1,003

1  Albert Ellis was appointed as Chief Executive Officer on 1 October 2020, having been an Independent Non-Executive Director of the Company for the period  

17 March 2020 to 30 September 2020.

2  Daniel Quint, Interim Chief Financial Officer, was appointed to the Board on 18 May 2020. During the period from his date of appointment as a Director until 31 December 

2020, he received a fee through a limited company. He did not receive any pension or any benefits and he was not entitled to a bonus in respect of the year ended 
31 December 2020.

Ian Lawson was appointed as Executive Chairman on 25 April 2020. 

3  Chris Pullen resigned as Chief Executive Officer on 19 February 2020 and as a Director on 26 April 2020. Chris Pullen received a termination payment of £135,000. 
4 
5  Tracy Lewis assumed the role of Chair on 17 September 2019 and resigned on 24 April 2020.
6  Ed Barker resigned on 31 January 2020.
7  Fees to Richard Thomson included a payment of £25,000 for advisory services to the Company during the three months up to the Board changes, announced on  

27 April 2020. 

8  Dawn Ward resigned as an Independent Non-Executive Director on 23 April 2020.
9  Pensions include both Company contributions and cash allowances where the Directors have elected not to have contributions paid into a pension fund.
10  Others represent medical insurance for C Pullen.

Financial StatementsStrategic Report 
 
50

Staffline Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2020

Report on Remuneration continued

In addition, the Group received an income statement credit of £Nil (2019: charge of £129,000) in relation to cash and equity-settled 
share options held by the Directors. The total is split as follows: 

C Pullen (2018 JSOP)
M Watts (2018 JSOP)

2020 credit
£000

2019 credit
£000

–
–

–

(89)
(40)

(129)

The above credits and charges were principally driven by movements in the Company’s share price as follows:

Opening share price p
Closing share price p
% (decrease) / increase during the year
% (decrease) / increase during the year adjusted for the equity issue in July 2019

2020
£000

87
44
(49)%
–

2019
£000

1,240
87
(93)%
(83)%

On 15 July 2019, a total of 40,986,097 ordinary 10p shares were issued by the Company, resulting in a total of 68,930,486 ordinary  
10p shares now being in issue.

Report of the Directors

Governance

51

The Directors present their Annual Report for the Group and the Company together with the audited financial statements for the year 
ended 31 December 2020. 

Reporting requirements

The following information is provided in other appropriate sections and is included in this Directors’ Report by reference and so is 
deemed to be part of it:

Information

Strategic Report
Corporate Governance

• Corporate Governance Report
• Statement of Directors’ Responsibilities

Report on Remuneration

Future Development and events occurring after  
the balance sheet date

Reported

Pages 1 to 36

Pages 37 to 46
Page 53

Pages 47 to 50

Details can be found in the Strategic Report on pages 10 to 13

Stakeholder Engagement and Key Decisions

Details can be found in the Strategic Report on pages 28 to 29

Greenhouse gas emissions – Streamlined Energy and Carbon 

Reporting

Financial instruments 

Details can be found in the Strategic Report on page 32

Details can be found in the notes to the financial statements  
on pages 107 to 109

Principal activities
A review of the activities of the Group, including financial and non-financial information, can be found in the Strategic Report, along 
with details of the Group’s future developments. 

Dividends
As a condition of refinancing the debt facility, dividends are permitted to be paid from 1 July 2022 subject to no default of the new 
Receivables Financing Facility and no forecast default on a 6 month look forward basis from the date of the dividend payment.

Directors
The names and biographies of the Directors who held office at the date of this Annual Report are set out on pages 38 to 39.  
Changes to Directors from 1 January 2020 and up until the date of this Report are provided in the table below:

Director

Ed Barker

Albert Ellis

Ian Lawson

Tracy Lewis

Chris Pullen

Daniel Quint 

Dawn Ward CBE

Catherine Lynch

Ian Starkey

Position

Date of appointment

Date of resignation

Independent Non-Executive Director

31 January 2020

Independent Non-Executive Director

17 March 2020

30 September 2020

Chief Executive Officer

1 October 2020

Chairman

Chair 

Chief Executive Officer

25 April 2020

Chief Financial Officer

18 May 2020

Independent Non-Executive Director

Independent Non-Executive Director

Independent Non-Executive Director

1 January 2021

1 January 2021

24 April 2020

26 April 2020

23 April 2020

Qualifying third party indemnity provisions
A qualifying third party indemnity provision as defined in Section 232(2) of the Companies Act 2006 is in force at the date of approval 
of the financial statements for the benefit of each of the Directors in respect of liabilities incurred as a result of their office, to the extent 
permitted by law. In respect of those liabilities for which Directors may not be indemnified, the Company maintained a directors’ and 
officers’ liability insurance policy throughout the financial year.

Branches
The Group has operations in the United Kingdom, Republic of Ireland, Portugal and Poland.

Employee involvement
The Directors recognise the value of involving employees in the business and ensure that matters of concern to them, including the 
Group’s strategic objectives, vision, values and principles, are communicated in an open and regular manner. Employees are kept 
aware of progress versus these objectives and key developments within the Group by regular briefings. Senior staff participate in 
various bonus scheme arrangements linked to financial performance. Further details of the Company’s engagement with its employees 
during the year and how it ensured their health and safety during the Covid-19 pandemic are provided on page 6.

Financial StatementsStrategic Report 
52

Staffline Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2020

Report of the Directors continued

Disabled persons
It is the Group’s policy to give full and fair consideration to suitable 
applications for employment from disabled persons. Once 
employed, disabled persons receive equal opportunities for 
training, career development and promotion. Opportunities exist for 
employees of the Group who become disabled to continue their 
employment or to be trained for other positions within the Group.

Annual General Meeting
The 2021 Annual General Meeting will be held at 9am on 
Wednesday 28 July 2021 at the offices of Liberum, Ropemaker 
Place, 25 Ropemaker Street, London EC2Y 9LY, subject to any UK 
Government restrictions in place at the time. The business to be 
considered at the meeting is set out in a separate Notice of 
Meeting dispatched to the members.

Payments to suppliers
The Group aims to comply with the payment terms agreed with 
suppliers when goods or services have been provided in 
accordance with the agreed conditions.

Political donations
The Group has made no political donations in the current or  
prior years.

Charitable donations
The Group made charitable donations of £16,000 in the year  
(2019: £17,000).

Research and Development
The Group continues to invest in and develop its digital platforms 
as discussed in the Strategic Report.

Share Capital
At 31 December 2020 the Company’s issued share capital 
consisted of 68,930,486 Ordinary Shares with a nominal value of 
10p each (“Ordinary Shares”), each share having equal voting 
rights.

On 21 May 2021 the Company announced a proposed Placing, 
Subscription and Open Offer for new ordinary shares, which 
comprised the following elements:
•  A total of 87,249,500 new ordinary shares of 10 pence each 
placed at a price of 50 pence per share (the “Issue Price”) to 
certain existing shareholders and new institutional investors;
•  A total of 750,500 new ordinary shares of 10 pence each to 

certain Directors and employees of the Group at the issue price;
•  An open offer to existing shareholders for 10 shares for every 78 
ordinary shares held, for a total of 8,837,242 new ordinary 
shares of 10 pence each at the issue price; and

•  The proposed Placing, Subscription and Open Offer was 

approved by the shareholders in a General Meeting on 9 June 
2021. The total number of shares in issue following the Placing, 
Subscription and Open Offer is 165,767,728.

On 9 June 2021 the Shareholders, at a General Meeting, 
approved the creation and issue of 96,837,242 new ordinary 
shares pursuant to the Placing, Subscription and Open Offer.

The Company currently has no authority to purchase its own 
shares or to allot new Ordinary Shares, except in relation to its 
Save As You Earn share option scheme. Resolutions will be 
proposed at the 2021 annual general meeting.

Share Options
In addition to the Joint-Share Ownership Plan (details of which are 
provided on page 88), the Company operates a Save As You Earn 
share option scheme.

Going concern
The financial statements have been prepared on a going concern 
basis. The Directors have reviewed this basis and have made full 
disclosure in note 3, concluding that there is a reasonable 
expectation that the Group and Company have adequate resources 
to continue in operational existence for the foreseeable future.

Substantial shareholdings
The interests, by parent Company, of our top ten shareholders in 
the issued ordinary share capital of the Company, which have 
been notified as at 31 December 2020, were as follows, 
representing 82.7% of the total issued ordinary share capital:

HRNetGroup
Henry Spain Investment Services
Gresham House
Hargreaves Lansdown
Interactive Investors
A J Bell
Barclays Smart Investor
HSDL
Aberdeen Standard Investments
HSBC

Ordinary shares  
of 10p each

Percentage of 
Ordinary Shares

20,641,959
13,059,363
8,013,995
5,015,939
3,429,387
3,156,160
1,753,558
1,208,011
1,139,424
1,043,750

58,461,546

29.95
18.95
11.63
7.28
4.98
4.58
2.54
1.75
1.65
1.51

84.82

In accordance with AIM Rule 26, in so far as the Company is 
aware, the total and percentage of the Company’s issued share 
capital that was not in public hands at 31 December 2020 was 
1,372,163 shares and 2.0% respectively. This percentage comprises 
the holdings of Directors of the Company, as noted below, and 
the Employee Benefit Trust. Following the Fundraise on 10 June 
the above shareholdings have changed. The latest allocation can 
be viewed on the Group’s website at: www.stafflinegroupplc.co.
uk/investor-relations/shareholder-information.

Directors’ shareholdings
The beneficial holdings of the Directors as at 31 December 2020  
in the Company’s issued share capital at 31 December 2020 was 
as follows: 

Director

Ian Lawson

Daniel Quint

Richard Thomson 

Ordinary shares of 
10p each in issue

131,577

25,320

42,579

% of total

0.2%

–

– 

Post balance sheet events
A number of Board changes occurred after the balance sheet 
date, as disclosed above. 

Auditors
A resolution to appoint Grant Thornton UK LLP as auditor will be 
proposed at the forthcoming Annual General Meeting. 

The Directors’ Report was approved by the Board and signed on 
its behalf by:

Louise Barber FCG
Company Secretary
21 June 2021

Statement of Directors’ Responsibilities
in respect of the financial statements

Governance

53

The Directors confirm that: 
•  so far as each Director is aware, there is no relevant audit 
information of which the Group and Company’s auditor is 
unaware; and
the Directors have taken all the steps that they ought to have 
taken as Directors in order to make themselves aware of any 
relevant audit information and to establish that the Group and 
Company’s auditor is aware of that information.

• 

The Directors are responsible for preparing the Annual Report in 
accordance with applicable law and regulations.

To the best of our knowledge:
• 

the Group financial statements, prepared in accordance with 
IFRSs as adopted by the European Union, give a true and fair 
view of the assets, liabilities, financial position and loss of the 
group and the undertakings included in the consolidation taken 
as a whole; 
the Company financial statements, prepared in accordance 
with United Kingdom Generally Accepted Accounting Practice 
give a true and fair view of the assets, liabilities, financial 
position and loss of the company; and 
the Strategic Report and Directors’ Report includes a fair 
review of the development and performance of the business 
and the position of the Group and the undertakings included in 
the consolidation taken as a whole, together with a description 
of the principal risks and uncertainties that they face.

• 

• 

By Order of the Board

Louise Barber FCG
Company Secretary
21 June 2021

The Directors are responsible for preparing the Annual Report  
and the financial statements in accordance with applicable law 
and regulation.

Company law requires the Directors to prepare financial 
statements for each financial year. Under that law the Directors 
have prepared the Group financial statements in accordance with 
International Financial Reporting Standards (“IFRSs”) as adopted 
by the European Union and Company financial statements in 
accordance with United Kingdom Generally Accepted Accounting 
Practice (United Kingdom Accounting Standards, comprising FRS 
101 “Reduced Disclosure Framework”, and applicable law). Under 
company law the Directors must not approve the financial 
statements unless they are satisfied that they give a true and fair 
view of the state of affairs of the Group and Company and of the 
profit or loss of the Group and Company for that period. In 
preparing the financial statements, the Directors are required to:
•  select suitable accounting policies and then apply them 

consistently;

•  state whether applicable IFRSs as adopted by the European 
Union have been followed for the Group financial statements 
and United Kingdom Accounting Standards, comprising FRS 
101, have been followed for the Company financial statements, 
subject to any material departures disclosed and explained in 
the financial statements;

•  make judgements and accounting estimates that are 

reasonable and prudent; and

•  prepare the financial statements on the going concern basis 
unless it is inappropriate to presume that the Group and 
Company will continue in business.

The Directors are responsible for keeping adequate accounting 
records that are sufficient to show and explain the Group and 
Company’s transactions and disclose with reasonable accuracy 
at any time the financial position of the Group and Company and 
enable them to ensure that the financial statements comply with 
the Companies Act 2006.

The Directors are also responsible for safeguarding the assets of 
the Group and Company and hence for taking reasonable steps 
for the prevention and detection of fraud and other irregularities.

The Directors of the Company are responsible for the 
maintenance and integrity of the of the ultimate Parent 
Company’s website. Legislation in the United Kingdom governing 
the preparation and dissemination of financial statements may 
differ from legislation in other jurisdictions.

The Directors consider that the 2020 Annual Report (“the Annual 
Report”), taken as a whole, is fair, balanced and understandable 
and provides the information necessary for shareholders to assess 
the Group and Company’s performance, business model  
and strategy.

Financial StatementsStrategic Report54

Staffline Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2020

Independent auditor’s report

to the members of 
Staffline Group plc

Conclusions relating to going concern
We are responsible for concluding on the appropriateness of the 
directors’ use of the going concern basis of accounting and, 
based on the audit evidence obtained, whether a material 
uncertainty exists related to events or conditions that may cast 
significant doubt on the group’s and the parent company’s ability 
to continue as a going concern. If we conclude that a material 
uncertainty exists, we are required to draw attention in our report 
to the related disclosures in the financial statements or, if such 
disclosures are inadequate, to modify the auditor’s opinion. Our 
conclusions are based on the audit evidence obtained up to the 
date of our report. However, future events or conditions may 
cause the group or the parent company to cease to continue as a 
going concern.

A description of our evaluation of management’s assessment of 
the ability to continue to adopt the going concern basis of 
accounting, and the key observations arising with respect to that 
evaluation, is included in the Key Audit Matters section of our 
report.

Based on the work we have performed, we have not identified any 
material uncertainties relating to events or conditions that, 
individually or collectively, may cast significant doubt on the 
group’s and the parent company’s ability to continue as a going 
concern for a period of at least twelve months from when the 
financial statements are authorised for issue.

In auditing the financial statements, we have concluded that the 
directors’ use of the going concern basis of accounting in the 
preparation of the financial statements is appropriate. 

The responsibilities of the directors with respect to going concern 
are described in the ‘Responsibilities of directors for the financial 
statements’ section of this report.

Opinion
Our opinion on the financial statements is unmodified
We have audited the financial statements of Staffline Group plc 
(the ‘parent company’) and its subsidiaries (the ‘group’) for the 
year ended 31 December 2020 which comprise the consolidated 
statement of comprehensive income, consolidated statement of 
changes in equity, company statement of changes in equity, 
consolidated and company statements of financial position, 
consolidated statement of cash flows and notes to the financial 
statements, including a summary of significant accounting 
policies. The financial reporting framework that has been applied 
in the preparation of the group financial statements is applicable 
law and International accounting standards in conformity with 
the requirements of the Companies Act 2006. The financial 
reporting framework that has been applied in the preparation of 
the parent company financial statements is applicable law and 
United Kingdom Accounting Standards, including Financial 
Reporting Standard 101 ‘Reduced Disclosure Framework’ (United 
Kingdom Generally Accepted Accounting Practice).

In our opinion:
• 

the financial statements give a true and fair view of the state 
of the group’s and of the parent company’s affairs as at 
31 December 2020 and of the group’s loss for the year then 
ended;
the group financial statements have been properly prepared in 
accordance with International accounting standards in 
conformity with the requirements of the Companies Act 2006;
the parent company financial statements have been properly 
prepared in accordance with United Kingdom Generally 
Accepted Accounting Practice; and
the financial statements have been prepared in accordance 
with the requirements of the Companies Act 2006.

• 

• 

• 

Basis for opinion
We conducted our audit in accordance with International 
Standards on Auditing (UK) (ISAs (UK)) and applicable law. Our 
responsibilities under those standards are further described in the 
‘Auditor’s responsibilities for the audit of the financial statements’ 
section of our report. We are independent of the group and the 
parent company in accordance with the ethical requirements that 
are relevant to our audit of the financial statements in the UK, 
including the FRC’s Ethical Standard as applied to listed entities, 
and we have fulfilled our other ethical responsibilities in 
accordance with these requirements. We believe that the audit 
evidence we have obtained is sufficient and appropriate to 
provide a basis for our opinion.

Our approach to the audit

Materiality

Key Audit
Matters

Scoping

Governance

55

Overview of our audit approach 
Overall materiality: 
Group: £1.66m, which represents 3.2% of the group’s loss before taxation and 
0.18% of group revenue.
Parent company: £1.08m, which represents 2.1% of the parent company’s total 
assets, capped at 65% of group materiality. 

Group key audit matters were identified as: 
•  Recruitment revenue journals – occurrence and accuracy (New);
•  Going concern basis of accounting (Same as previous period);
•  Accrued income in PeoplePlus  – occurrence and accuracy (New);
•  Non underlying administrative expenses – occurrence, accuracy and 

presentation and disclosure (Same as previous period); and

•  Goodwill and other intangible assets – valuation (Same as previous period).

Parent company key audit matter identified:
• 

Investments – valuation (Same as previous period).

Our group auditor’s report for the year ended 31 December 2019 included three 
key audit matters that have not been reported as key audit matters in our current 
year’s  report. These relate to:
•  Opening balances at 1 January 2019 – accuracy and completion. Management 
have not idenfied any prior period adjustments and therefore this key audit 
matter is no longer relevant;

•  Transition to IFRS 16 – valuation, presentation and disclosure. Transition has 

now been completed and audited in the prior year and therefore this key audit 
matter is no longer relevant; and

•  Provisions – completeness, accuracy, presentation and disclosure. Provisions 

contain less judgement and estimation uncertainty this year and therefore are 
not identified as a key audit matter.

Our parent company auditor’s report for the year ended 31 December 2019 
included one key audit matter which has not been reported as a key audit matter 
in our current year’s  report. This relates to:
• 

Inter-company balances – valuation. Recoverability risk has reduced in the 
current year due to the decrease in the balance since prior year and therefore 
this key audit matter is no longer relevant.

Our work performed over components covered 91% of the Group’s revenue and 
106% of the Group’s loss before tax.

Key audit matters
Key audit matters are those matters that, in our professional 
judgement, were of most significance in our audit of the financial 
statements of the current period and include the most significant 
assessed risks of material misstatement (whether or not due to 
fraud) that we identified. These matters included those that had 
the greatest effect on: the overall audit strategy; the allocation of 
resources in the audit; and directing the efforts of the 
engagement team. These matters were addressed in the context 
of our audit of the financial statements as a whole, and in forming 
our opinion thereon, and we do not provide a separate opinion on 
these matters. 

In the graph below, we have presented the key audit matters, 
significant risks and certain other risks relevant to the audit:

Description

Audit
Response

KAM

Disclosure

Key
Observations

Financial StatementsStrategic Report56

Staffline Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2020

Independent auditor’s report continued

to the members of 
Staffline Group plc

HIGH

t
c
a
p
m

i

t
n
e
m
e
t
a
t
s

l

i

a
c
n
a
n
fi

l

a
i
t
n
e
t
o
P

3

5

2

7

1

4

6

Key audit matter

Significant risk

Other risk

8

17

18

9

11

12

10

13

14

15

16

LOW

Extent of management judgement

HIGH

1.  Going concern basis of accounting
2.  Goodwill and other intangible assets - valuation
3.  Recruitment revenue journals – 
occurrence and accuracy
Investments - valuation
Accrued income in PeoplePlus – 
occurrence and accuracy

4. 
5. 

6.  Non underlying administrative expenses -
occurrence, accuracy and presentation 
and disclosure

7.  Management over-ride of controls
8.  Recruitment revenue
9. 
10.  Coronavirus Job Retention Scheme
11.  Trade receivables

PeoplePlus revenue

12.  Borrowings
13.  Defined benefit pension scheme
14.  Holiday pay accrual
15.  Provisions
16.  Deferred income
17.  Payroll
18.  Trade creditors

Key Audit Matter – Group

How our scope addressed the matter – Group

Recruitment revenue journals –  
occurrence and accuracy
We identified recruitment revenue journals – occurrence 
and accuracy as one of the most significant assessed risks 
of material misstatement due to fraud. 

Under ISA 240 (UK) there is a presumed risk that revenue 
may be misstated due to the improper recognition of 
revenue.The revenue recorded by the group is one of the key 
factors that impacts EBITDA and is a Key Performance 
Indicator for the group.

The majority of revenues within the recruitment segment are 
considered non-complex. Journals outside of the normal 
business process therefore pose a risk of fraud due to their 
unusual nature.

In responding to the key audit matter, we performed the following audit 
procedures:
•  Assessing whether the accounting policies adopted by the directors are 

in accordance with the requirements of IFRS 15, and whether 
management accounted for revenue in accordance with the accounting 
policies, including journal entries outside of the normal course of 
business;

•  Using audit data analytics techniques to identify journal entries and 

other transactions where revenue and receivables transactions had a 
financial impact on unexpected balances or classes of transactions and 
then obtaining sufficient and appropriate evidence to support those 
transactions; and

•  Substantively testing revenue transactions from the provision of 

recruitment services by agreeing a sample of sales transactions to 
timesheets, remittance, and bank receipts, or alternative evidence 
where appropriate.

Relevant disclosures in the Annual Report and 
Accounts 
•  Corporate govenance code: Audit Committee, The key 

audit matters considered by the Committee
•  Financial statements: Note 3, Accounting policies

Key observations
Our audit work did not identify any material adjustments in relation to the 
occurrence and accuracy of recruitment revenue journals.

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Governance

57

Key Audit Matter – Group

How our scope addressed the matter – Group

Going concern basis of accounting
We identified going concern basis of accounting as one of 
the most significant assessed risks of material misstatement 
due to error.

The going concern basis of accounting was assessed as a 
Key Audit Matter for the following reasons:
•  Continued dependence upon debt facilities to service 

cashflow;

In responding to the key audit matter, we performed the following audit 
procedures:
•  Obtaining an understanding of how management prepared their base 
case and sensitised case forecasts for the period to 31 December 2022;
•  Assessing the accuracy of management’s forecasting by comparing the 

reliability of past forecasts to management’s base case forecast;
•  Obtaining an understanding of key trading, balance sheet and cash 

flow assumptions and testing key assumptions to underlying historical 
financial analysis and available information; 

•  The material uncertainty related to going concern in the 

•  Assessing the accuracy of the refinance cashflows and new debt 

prior year and disclosed in the prior year audited 
accounts;

•  The trading, liquidity and financing uncertainties 
present in the prior year remaining in place. In  
particular the uncertainties arising from Covid-19 
pandemic and national lockdowns, the Brexit transition 
uncertainties, trade related bank covenants, and the 
non-recourse factoring facility being uncommitted; and 

•  Discussions with management and cashflow forecasts 
that indicated unless mitigating actions were effected, 
the group did not have the liquidity to meet its cashflow 
requirements throughout 2021.

In response to the liquidity shortfall, management 
refinanced their debt agreements post year-end and raised 
£48.4m of equity from a subscription and open offer in June 
2021. Their existing debt facilities were replaced with a 
£90m receivables financing facility. 

As a result of the refinance, management have concluded 
that the group remains a going concern and that a material 
uncertainty does not exist.

Relevant disclosures in the Annual Report
and Accounts
•  Principal risks and uncertainties: Risk one
•  Corporate governance code: Audit Committee, The key 

audit matters considered by the Committee

•  Financial statements: Note 3, Accounting policies and 

Note 33, Post balance sheet events

covenant calculations within the forecasts by agreeing the forecasts to 
the new debt agreements and equity regulatory announcements;

•  Agreeing net proceeds of the equity raise to bank statements;
•  Assessing the appropriateness and robustness of management’s 

forecasts by applying our own sensitivities;

•  Assessing the feasibility of the mitigating actions available to 

management to continue as a going concern if downside sensitivities 
were to crystalise;

•  Performing arithmetical and consistency checks on management’s 

going concern model using internal modelling specialists; and

•  Assessing the adequacy of related disclosures within the annual report, 
including post balance sheet event disclosures relating to the 2021 
equity raise and debt refinance.

Key observations
We have nothing to report in addition to that stated in the ‘Conclusions 
relating to going concern’ section of our report.

Financial StatementsStrategic Report 
58

Staffline Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2020

Independent auditor’s report continued

to the members of 
Staffline Group plc

Key Audit Matter – Group

How our scope addressed the matter – Group

PeoplePlus accrued income – occurrence and 
accuracy of revenue accrued in the year
We identified PeoplePlus accrued income – occurrence 
and accuracy of revenue accured in the year as one of the 
most significant assessed risks of material misstatement 
due to fraud. 

In the prior year, management identified a material 
manual manipulation of internal reports relating to 
accrued income, which they derecognised in the 2019 
financial statements.

The unbilled portion of revenue within PeoplePlus was 
identified as a key audit matter due to the material impact 
on profit, and due to the increased judgement associated 
with the accrued revenue in comparison to those amounts 
billed in the year.

In responding to the key audit matter, we performed the following audit 
procedures:
•  Assessing whether the accounting policies adopted by the directors 
are in accordance with the requirements of IFRS 15, and whether 
management accounted for revenue in accordance with the 
accounting policies;

•  Obtaining an understanding of performance obligations within key 

contracts and application of revenue recognition for those contracts;
•  Obtaining management’s reconciliation of accrued income to the trial 
balance at year-end and testing significant reconciling items; and

•  Testing a sample of accrued income at year-end to underlying 

documentation, including where relevant subsequent invoice and 
receipt.

Relevant disclosures in the Annual Report
and Accounts
•  Corporate governance code: Audit Committee, The key 

Key observations
Our audit work did not identify any material adjustments in relation to the 
occurrence and accuracy of PeoplePlus accrued income.

audit matters considered by the Committee
•  Financial statements: Note 3, Accounting policies

Governance

59

Key Audit Matter – Group

How our scope addressed the matter – Group

Non-underlying administrative expenses – 
occurrence, accuracy, presentation 
and disclosure
We identified non-underlying administrative expenses as 
one of the most significant assessed risks of material 
misstatement due to fraud.

The group has presented separately certain items in 
relation to reorganisation, rationalisation and restructuring 
costs, amortisation and impairment charges, refinancing 
and other non underlying costs on the face of the 
consolidated statement of comprehensive income. The 
Directors believe that the resulting “underlying” 
consolidated statement of comprehensive income informs 
a user of the financial statement’s understanding of the 
performance of the business.

In the group’s reported results, significant adjustments 
have been made to statutory operating loss of £44.3m to 
derive underlying operating profit of £4.8m, and to 
statutory loss before tax of £51.6m to derive underlying 
profit before tax of £0.7m. The most significant of these 
are discussed in detail in Note 5.

These costs are not defined by International Accounting 
Standards. Consequently, management have written an 
accounting policy to define non-underlying administrative 
charges in the group financial statements, which is set out 
in Note 3. In applying this accounting policy, management 
exercises significant judgement in respect of what it 
determines as non-underlying administrative charges. In 
making this assessment, management has identified 
significant costs that by their size or nature require 
separate presentation. As such, there is a risk of 
management bias in the selection of the items identified.

In responding to the key audit matter, we performed the following audit 
procedures:

Occurrence and accuracy
• 

Inspecting and challenging the nature of the items included within 
non-underlying administrative expenses by obtaining a detailed 
breakdown of these items and obtaining an understanding of the 
nature of each item;

•  Testing a sample of items to invoices or other supporting evidence; and
•  Checking that the specific cost incurred is one identified in the policy 

drafted by management. 

Presentation and disclosure
•  Challenging management’s rationale for the basis for inclusion of 

certain classes of items within non-underlying administrative charges, 
particularly around the areas of higher judgement such as identified 
reorganisation, rationalisation and restructuring  costs, to check 
whether the types of items identified meet the criteria of the 
accounting policy for such items defined by the group; 
•  Assessing the prominence given to the ‘underlying’ financial 

information and related commentary in the Annual Report compared 
to the statutory financial information and related commentary could 
be misleading;

•  Assessing whether the statutory and adjusted financial information are 
reconciled, with sufficient prominence given to that reconciliation; and

•  Assessing whether the basis of the adjusted financial information is 
clearly and accurately described and consistently applied, and 
assessing the appropriateness of the  accounting policy.

Relevant 
disclosures in the Annual Report and Accounts
•  Corporate governance code: Audit Committee, The key 

Key observations
Our audit work did not identify any material adjustments in relation to 
non-underlying administrative expenses.

audit matters considered by the Committee

•  Financial statements: Note 3, Accounting policies and 

Note 5, Expenses by nature

Financial StatementsStrategic Report 
60

Staffline Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2020

Independent auditor’s report continued

to the members of 
Staffline Group plc

Key Audit Matter – Group

How our scope addressed the matter – Group

Goodwill and other intangible assets – valuation
We identified the valuation of goodwill and other 
intangible assets - valuation as one of the most significant 
assessed risks of material misstatement due to error. 

Under International Accounting Standard (IAS) 36 
‘Impairment of Assets’, management is required to assess 
at the end of each reporting period whether there is any 
indication that an asset may be impaired and to perform 
an annual assessment to determine whether the group’s 
goodwill and other intangible assets within a cash 
generating unit (“CGU”) are impaired. 

The impact of Covid-19 on the financial results of the 
business in the year is an indicator for impairment. 
An impairment review was performed at the half year 
reporting period resulting in an impairment totalling 
£35.3m across two CGU’s.

The process for assessing whether impairment of assets 
exists under IAS 36 is complex. Management prepare 
impairment models to assess the valuation in use. The 
process of determining the value in use, through 
forecasting cash flows related to CGUs and the 
determination of the CGUs, appropriate discount rate and 
other assumptions to be applied can be highly 
judgemental and can significantly impact the results of the 
impairment review.

In responding to the key audit matter, we performed the following audit 
procedures:
•  Obtaining management’s assessment of the alignment of subsidiaries 
to either Recruitment GB, Recruitment Ireland or PeoplePlus, being the 
relevant CGUs used in their impairment calculations and challenging 
those to our understanding of the business units and operating 
structure of the group;

•  Challenging management’s assessment of impairment indicators 

relating to intangible assets by assessing whether any CGUs showed 
further indicators of impairment such as a decline in performance or 
performance below budget;

•  Checking the arithmetical accuracy of each CGU impairment 
calculation, including the associated sensitivity analyses;

•  Using our internal valuation specialists to inform our challenge of 

management and their valuation expert, that the assumptions used 
within the calculation of weighted average cost of capital are 
reasonable and consistent with other similar groups in the market;
•  Assessing whether trading, working capital and cash flow assumptions 
are reasonable based on the historical performance of each different 
CGU and that the assumptions are consistent with our knowledge of 
the business;

•  Testing the accuracy of management’s forecasting through a 

comparison of budget to actual data and historical variance trends 
and inspecting the forecast cash flows;

•  Assessing whether one-off items in the impairment models which 
management have identified as impacting the current year are 
actually one-off and the risk of these items being pervasive in the 
business in the future; and

•  Where we identified significant shortfalls in key performance metrics 
against budget in prior years, this informed our determination of 
sensitivities to apply as we formed our independent view about 
reasonable downside scenarios.

Relevant disclosures in the Annual Report  
and Accounts
•  Corporate governance code: Audit Committee, The key 

Key observations
An impairment review was performed at the half year reporting period 
resulting in an impairment toalling £35.3m across two CGU’s.

audit matters considered by the Committee

•  Financial statements: Note 3,  Accounting policies and 

Note 11, Goodwill

Our audit work did not identify any material adjustments in relation to the 
valuation of goodwill and other intangible assets.

Governance

61

Key Audit Matter – Parent company

How our scope addressed the matter– Parent company

Investments – valuation
Investments – valuation
We identified the valuation of investments as one of the 
most significant assessed risks of material misstatement 
due to error.

The parent company holds material investment balances 
and under IAS 36 management are required to assess at 
the end of each reporting period whether there is any 
indication that an asset may be impaired.

As the market value of the group was significantly below 
the net asset value of the parent company at the reporting 
date an impairment review was required.

The process for assessing whether impairment of assets 
exists under IAS 36 is complex. Management prepare 
impairment models to assess the valuation in use. The 
process of determining the value in use, through 
forecasting cash flows related to investment and the 
determination of the appropriate discount rate and other 
assumptions to be applied can be highly judgemental  
and can significantly impact the results of the  
impairment review.

In responding to the key audit matter, we performed the following audit 
procedures:
•  Checking the arithmetical accuracy of the impairment calculation;
•  Using our internal valuation experts to inform our challenge of 

management and their valuation specialist, that the assumptions used 
within the calculation of weighted average cost of capital are 
reasonable and consistent with other similar groups in the market;
•  Checking trading, working capital and cash flow assumptions are 

reasonable based on the historical performance of each different CGU 
and that the assumptions are consistent with our knowledge of the 
business;

•  Testing the accuracy of management’s forecasting through a 

comparison of budget to actual data, historical variance trends and 
inspecting the forecast cash flows; and 

•  Comparing the investments held to the net assets of the subsidiary 
and challenging management on whether there were indicators of 
impairment.

Relevant disclosures in the Annual Report and 
Accounts 
•  Corporate governance code: Audit Committee, The key 

audit matters considered by the Committee.

•  Financial statements: Note 3, Accounting policies and 

Note 13, Investments.

Key observations
Management concluded that additional adjustments were required 
having considered our audit findings in relation to the valuation of 
investments.

There are no further material misstatements identified from our audit 
work which have not been adjusted by management.

Financial StatementsStrategic Report62

Staffline Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2020

Independent auditor’s report continued

to the members of 
Staffline Group plc

Our application of materiality
We apply the concept of materiality both in planning and performing the audit, and in evaluating the effect of identified misstatements 
on the audit and of uncorrected misstatements, if any, on the financial statements and in forming the opinion in the auditor’s report.

Materiality was determined as follows:

Materiality measure

Group

Parent company

Materiality for financial 
statements as a whole

We define materiality as the magnitude of misstatement in the financial statements that, individually 
or in the aggregate, could reasonably be expected to influence the economic decisions of the users of 
these financial statements. We use materiality in determining the nature, timing and extent of our 
audit work.

Materiality threshold

£1.66m, which represents 3.2% of the group’s loss 
before taxation and 0.18% of group revenue.

£1.08m, which represents 2% of the parent 
company’s total assets, capped at 65% of  
group materiality.

Significant judgements made 
by auditor in determining the 
materiality

In determining materiality, we made the following 
significant judgments:
•  The selection of an appropriate benchmark
•  The selection of an appropriate percentage to 

In determining materiality, we made the following 
significant judgments:
•  The selection of an appropriate benchmark
•  The selection of an appropriate percentage to 

apply to that benchmark

apply to that benchmark

•  The consideration of other qualitative factors

•  The consideration of other qualitative factors

We have also used loss before tax as an 
underlying benchmark. We selected this 
benchmark as it is also a key performance 
measure for the company and is therefore of 
interest to stakeholders.

Total assets is is considered to be the most 
appropriate benchmark as the company’s purpose 
is that of holding of investments in subsidiary 
entities. The company does not undertake any 
trading activities.

Materiality for the current year is higher than the 
level that we determined for the year ended 
31 December 2019, due to the loss for the year 
being higher than the prior year. 
The materiality determined was not revised during 
the audit.

We have capped materiality at 65% of group 
materiality.

Materiality for the current year is higher than the 
level that we determined for the year ended 
31 December 2019, due to the group loss for the 
year being higher than the prior year.

The materiality determined was not revised during 
the audit. 

Performance materiality 
used to drive the extent of 
our testing

We set performance materiality at an amount less than materiality for the financial statements as a 
whole to reduce to an appropriately low level the probability that the aggregate of uncorrected and 
undetected misstatements exceeds materiality for the financial statements as a whole.

Performance materiality 
threshold

£1.08m which is 65% of financial statement 
materiality.

£0.75m which is 70% of financial statement 
materiality.

Significant judgements made 
by auditor in determining the 
performance materiality

In determining performance materiality, we made 
the following significant judgments:
•  Our experience with auditing the financial 

In determining performance materiality, we made 
the following significant judgments:
•  Our experience with auditing the financial 

statements of the group in previous years – 
based on the number of identified 
misstatements in the prior year audit and 
management’s attitude to correcting 
misstatements identified.

•  The number of components within the group 
and the extent of audit procedures planned 
and performed at these components.

The performance materiality determined was not 
revised during the audit.

statements of the group in previous years – 
based on the number of identified 
misstatements in the prior year audit and 
management’s attitude to correcting 
misstatements identified.

The performance materiality determined was not 
revised during the audit.

Governance

63

Specific materiality

We determine specific materiality for one or more particular classes of transactions, account 
balances or disclosures for which misstatements of lesser amounts than materiality for the financial 
statements as a whole could reasonably be expected to influence the economic decisions of users 
taken on the basis of the financial statements.

Specific materiality threshold We determined a lower level of specific 

materiality for the following areas:
•  Related party transactions  
•  Directors remuneration and transactions  

We determined a lower level of specific materiality 
for the following areas:
•  Related party transactions
•  Directors remuneration and transactions with 

Communication of 
misstatements to the audit 
committee

Threshold for communication

with Directors 

Directors

We determine a threshold for reporting unadjusted differences to the audit committee.

£83,000 and misstatements below that threshold 
that, in our view, warrant reporting on qualitative 
grounds.

£54,000 and misstatements below that threshold 
that, in our view, warrant reporting on qualitative 
grounds.

The graph below illustrates how performance materiality interacts with our overall materiality and the tolerance for potential 
uncorrected misstatements.

Overall materiality – Group

Overall materiality – Parent company

Loss before tax
£51.6m

FSM
£1.66m
3.2%

PM
£1.08m
65%

TFPUM
£0.58m
35%

Total assets
£75.7m

FSM
£1.08m
2.0%

PM
£0.8m
70%

TFPUM
£0.3m
30%

FSM: Financial statements materiality

PM: Performance materiality

TFPUM: Tolerance for potential uncorrected misstatement

Financial StatementsStrategic Report64

Staffline Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2020

Independent auditor’s report continued

to the members of 
Staffline Group plc

An overview of the scope of our audit
Our group audit was scoped by obtaining an understanding of 
the group and its environment, including group-wide controls, 
and assessing the risks of material misstatement at the group 
level.

Management currently identifies three reporting segments: 
Recruitment GB, being the provision of workforce recruitment and 
management to industry, Recruitment Ireland, being the provision 
of generalist recruitment services and PeoplePlus, being the 
provision of skills training and probationary services. These 
reporting segments are monitored by the Chief Operating 
Decision Maker, the group’s Board, and strategic decisions are 
made on the basis of reporting segment operating results. All 
companies report their financial results and position using the 
group accounting policies. We viewed these companies as 
separate components for the purposes of determining the scope 
of our audit. 

In setting our audit scope we determined any individual 
component which contributed more than 10% to consolidated 
revenues or consolidated underlying profit before taxation to be 
financially significant to the group.

The audit of the financial information of each of the following 
components was completed using  component materiality:
•  Staffline Group plc
•  Staffline Recruitment Limited
•  Staffline Recruitment (NI) Limited
•  PeoplePlus Group Limited

Our audit work on the above components covers 91% of each of 
consolidated revenue, underlying consolidated loss before tax 
and reported consolidated loss before tax.

Audit approach

No. of components

Full-scope audit
Analytical 

procedures

4

13

% coverage  
Revenue

% coverage  
Loss before tax

91

9

106

-6

Other information
The directors are responsible for the other information. The other 
information comprises the information included in the annual 
report, other than the financial statements and our auditor’s 
report thereon. Our opinion on the financial statements does not 
cover the other information and, except to the extent otherwise 
explicitly stated in our report, we do not express any form of 
assurance conclusion thereon. 

In connection with our audit of the financial statements, our 
responsibility is to read the other information and, in doing so, 
consider whether the other information is materially inconsistent 
with the financial statements or our knowledge obtained in the 
audit or otherwise appears to be materially misstated. If we 
identify such material inconsistencies or apparent material 
misstatements, we are required to determine whether there is a 
material misstatement in the financial statements or a material 
misstatement of the other information. If, based on the work we 
have performed, we conclude that there is a material 
misstatement of this other information, we are required to report 
that fact. 

For all other components across the group,  analytical procedures 
of the component using group materiality was completed.  

We have nothing to report in this regard.

The audit of the Recruitment GB component were carried out by 
a Grant Thornton London based audit team. We engaged a 
Grant Thornton UK team to audit the key component within the 
PeoplePlus reporting segment and we engaged Grant Thornton 
Ireland to audit the key component in the Recruitment Ireland 
reporting segment. The group team performed reviews of the 
component auditors’ work. All work was carried out remotely.We 
determined the level of involvement we needed to have in their 
audit work at those reporting units to be able to conclude whether 
sufficient, appropriate audit evidence had been obtained as a 
basis for our opinion on the group financial statements as a 
whole. Detailed audit instructions were issued to the component 
auditors where a full scope audit approach had been identified. 
The audit instructions detailed the significant risks to be 
addressed through the audit procedures and indicated the 
information we required to be reported back to the group audit 
team. We were involved in the planning of the audit work for all 
full scope audit components and communicated with all 
component auditors throughout the planning, fieldwork and 
concluding stages of their audit work.

Our opinion on other matters prescribed by the Companies Act 
2006 is unmodified
In our opinion, based on the work undertaken in the course of the 
audit:
• 

the information given in the strategic report and the directors’ 
report for the financial year for which the financial statements 
are prepared is consistent with the financial statements; and
the strategic report and the directors’ report have been 
prepared in accordance with applicable legal requirements.

• 

Matter on which we are required to report under the 
Companies Act 2006
In the light of the knowledge and understanding of the group and 
the parent company and its environment obtained in the course 
of the audit, we have not identified material misstatements in the 
strategic report or the directors’ report.

Matters on which we are required to report 
by exception
We have nothing to report in respect of the following matters in 
relation to which the Companies Act 2006 requires us to report to 
you if, in our opinion:
•  adequate accounting records have not been kept by the 

parent company, or returns adequate for our audit have not 
been received from branches not visited by us; or
the parent company financial statements are not in agreement 
with the accounting records and returns; or

• 

•  certain disclosures of directors’ remuneration specified by law 

are not made; or

•  we have not received all the information and explanations we 

require for our audit. 

Responsibilities of directors for the 
financial statements
As explained more fully in the Statement of Directors’ 
responsibilities, the directors are responsible for the preparation 
of the financial statements and for being satisfied that they give 
a true and fair view, and for such internal control as the directors 
determine is necessary to enable the preparation of financial 
statements that are free from material misstatement, whether 
due to fraud or error.

In preparing the financial statements, the directors are 
responsible for assessing the group’s and the parent company’s 
ability to continue as a going concern, disclosing, as applicable, 
matters related to going concern and using the going concern 
basis of accounting unless the directors either intend to liquidate 
the group or the parent company or to cease operations, or have 
no realistic alternative but to do so.

Auditor’s responsibilities for the audit of the 
financial statements
Our objectives are to obtain reasonable assurance about whether 
the financial statements as a whole are free from material 
misstatement, whether due to fraud or error, and to issue an 
auditor’s report that includes our opinion. Reasonable assurance 
is a high level of assurance but is not a guarantee that an audit 
conducted in accordance with ISAs (UK) will always detect a 
material misstatement when it exists. Misstatements can arise 
from fraud or error and are considered material if, individually or 
in the aggregate, they could reasonably be expected to influence 
the economic decisions of users taken on the basis of these 
financial statements.

A further description of our responsibilities for the audit of the 
financial statements is located on the Financial Reporting 
Council’s website at: www.frc.org.uk/auditorsresponsibilities. This 
description forms part of our auditor’s report.

Governance

65

Explanation as to what extent the audit was considered 
capable of detecting irregularities, including fraud
Irregularities, including fraud, are instances of non-compliance 
with laws and regulations. We design procedures in line with our 
responsibilities, outlined above, to detect material misstatements 
in respect of irregularities, including fraud. Owing to the inherent 
limitations of an audit, there is an unavoidable risk that material 
misstatements in the financial statements may not be detected, 
even though the audit is properly planned and performed in 
accordance with the ISAs (UK). 

The extent to which our procedures are capable of detecting 
irregularities, including fraud is detailed below:
•  We understood how Staffline Group plc is complying with 

those legal and regulatory frameworks by making enquiries of 
management, internal audit, those responsible for legal and 
compliance procedures and the company secretary. We 
corroborated our enquiries through our review of board 
minutes, papers provided to the Audit Committee and 
correspondence received from regulatory bodies.

•  We obtained an understanding of the legal and regulatory 

• 

frameworks that are applicable to the group and determined 
that the most significant which are directly relevant to specific 
assertions in the financial statements are those related to the 
reporting frameworks (IFRS, the Companies Act 2006 and the 
QCA Corporate Governance Code).
In addition, we concluded that there are certain significant 
laws and regulations that may have an effect on the 
determination of the amounts and disclosures in the financial 
statements and those laws and regulations relating to health 
and safety, employee matters, environmental, and bribery and 
corruption practices. 

•  We assessed the susceptibility of the group’s financial 

statements to material misstatement, including how fraud 
might occur, by evaluating management’s incentives and 
opportunities for manipulation of the financial statements.  
This included the evaluation of the risk of management 
override of controls. We determined that the principal risks 
were in relation to:
 – journal entries that increased revenues or that reclassified 
costs from the income statement to the balance sheet; and

 – potential management bias in determining accounting 
estimates, especially in relation to the calculation of 
impairment of goodwill and intangible assets and 
investments.

•  Our audit procedures involved: 

 – evaluation of the design effectiveness andassessing the 
design effectiveness of controls that management has in 
place to prevent and detect fraud;

 – journal entry testing, with a focus on material manual 

journals, including those with unusual account 
combinations and those posted directly to the consolidation 
that increased revenue or that reclassified costs from the 
income statement to the balance sheet; 

 – challenging assumptions and judgements made by 

management in its significant accounting estimates; 
 – testing the completeness of the group’s related party 

transactions through information obtained at the parent 
and component entities and testing that these transactions 
had a valid business purpose; and

 – assessing the extent of compliance with the relevant laws 
and regulations as part of our procedures on the related 
financial statement item.

Financial StatementsStrategic Report66

Staffline Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2020

Independent auditor’s report continued

to the members of 
Staffline Group plc

• 

In addition, we completed audit procedures to conclude on the 
compliance of disclosures in the annual report and accounts 
with applicable financial reporting requirements.

•  These audit procedures were designed to provide reasonable 
assurance that the financial statements were free from fraud 
or error. However, detecting irregularities that result from fraud 
is inherently more difficult than detecting those that result 
from error, as those irregularities that result from fraud may 
involve collusion, deliberate concealment, forgery or 
intentional misrepresentations.  Also, the further removed 
non-compliance with laws and regulations is from events and 
transactions reflected in the financial statements, the less 
likely we would become aware of it.

•  The engagement partner assessed whether the engagement 

team collectively had the appropriate competence and 
capabailities to identify or recognise non-compliance with 
laws and regulations through the following:
 – understanding of, and practical experience with audit 

engagements of a similar nature and complexity through 
appropriate training and participation; and

 – knowledge of the industry in which the client operates.
•  Matters in respect of potential non-compliance with laws and 

regulations and fraud included the potential for fraud in 
revenue recognition through manipulation of accrued income 
have been communicated with the audit team. This is also 
reported as a key audit matter in the key audit matter section 
of our report where the matter and specific prcedures were 
performed in response to this matter is described in more 
detail.

•  For components at which audit procedures were performed, 

we requested component auditors to report to us instances of 
non-compliance with laws and regulations that gave rise to a 
risk of material misstatement of the group financial 
statements.   

Use of our report
This report is made solely to the company’s members, as a body, 
in accordance with Chapter 3 of Part 16 of the Companies Act 
2006. Our audit work has been undertaken so that we might 
state to the company’s members those matters we are required to 
state to them in an auditor’s report and for no other purpose. To 
the fullest extent permitted by law, we do not accept or assume 
responsibility to anyone other than the company and the 
company’s members as a body, for our audit work, for this report, 
or for the opinions we have formed.

Marc Summers, BSc (Hons), FCA
Senior Statutory Auditor
for and on behalf of Grant Thornton UK LLP
Statutory Auditor, Chartered Accountants
LONDON

21 June 2021

Strategic 
Report

Governance

Financial 
Statements

67

Financial Statements

Inside this 
section

Financial Statements

68  Consolidated Statement  
of Comprehensive Income
69  Consolidated Statement  
of Changes in Equity
70  Company Statement  
of Changes in Equity

71  Consolidated and Company 
Statements of Financial 
Position

72  Consolidated Statement  

of Cash Flows

73  Notes to the Financial 

Statements

112  Staffline Group plc  

Unaudited Five Year Summary 
of Financial Data
113  Company Details

68

Staffline Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2020

Consolidated Statement of Comprehensive Income

For the year ended 
31 December 2020

2020 
Underlying 
£m

2020 Non-
underlying*
£m

Note

2020 Total
£m

2019
Underlying
Restated
£m

2019 Non-
underlying*
Restated
£m

927.6
(853.0)

74.6

(69.8)

4.8

(4.1)

0.7

2.7

3.4

Continuing operations

Revenue
Cost of sales

Gross profit

Administrative expenses

Operating (loss)/profit

Finance costs

(Loss)/profit for the year before 

taxation

Tax credit

4
5

5

6

8

(Loss)/profit from continuing 

activities

Loss from discontinued operations

10

Loss for the year

Items that will not be reclassified 
to profit and loss – actuarial 
losses, net of tax 

Items that may be reclassified to 

profit and loss –cumulative 
translation loss

Total comprehensive loss for 

the year

Loss per ordinary share
Continuing operations: 

Basic and diluted

Discontinued operations: 

Basic and diluted

9

*  An analysis of the non-underlying items is provided in note 5.

–
–

–

(49.1)

(49.1)

(3.2)

927.6
(853.0)

74.6

(118.9)

(44.3)

(7.3)

(52.3)

(51.6)

0.4

3.1

1,063.0
(975.5)

87.5

(84.6)

2.9

(5.0)

(2.1)

1.0

2019 Total
Restated
£m

1,063.0
(975.5)

87.5

(123.7)

(36.2)

(8.2)

–
–

–

(39.1)

(39.1)

(3.2)

(42.3)

(44.4)

2.4

3.4

(51.9)

(48.5)

(4.2)

(52.7)

(0.8)

(0.1)

(53.6)

(71.2)p

(6.2)p

(1.1)

(39.9)

(41.0)

(3.0)

(44.0)

(0.7)

–

(44.7)

(89.6)p

(6.7)p

Comparative results have been restated for the effect of the activities that were discontinued in 2020, see note 10 for details.

The accompanying notes form an integral part of these financial statements.

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Governance

69

Consolidated Statement of Changes in Equity

For the year ended 
31 December 2020

At 1 January 2019

Issue of share capital
Costs of issue of share capital
Save As You Earn (“SAYE”) share scheme 

– equity-settled

Transactions with owners

Loss for the year
Actuarial loss on pension scheme, net of 

taxation

Total comprehensive loss for the year, net 

of tax

At 31 December 2019

Save As You Earn (“SAYE”) share scheme 

– equity-settled

Transactions with owners

Loss for the year
Actuarial loss on pension scheme, net of 

taxation

Cumulative translation adjustments

Total comprehensive loss for the year, net 

of tax

At 31 December 2020

Share 
capital
£m

2.8

4.1
–

–

4.1

–

–

–

Own 
shares 
JSOP
£m

(4.8)

–
–

–

–

–

–

–

Share 
premium
£m

41.2

36.9
(3.0)

–

33.9

–

–

–

6.9

(4.8)

75.1

–

–

–

–
–

–

–

–

–

–
–

–

–

–

–

–
–

–

Share-
based 
payment
 reserve
£m

0.3

–
–

0.2

0.2

–

–

–

0.5

0.1

0.1

–

–
–

–

6.9

(4.8)

75.1

0.6

Profit 
and loss 
account
£m

43.0

–
–

(0.2)

(0.2)

Total 
equity
£m

82.5

41.0
(3.0)

–

38.0

(44.0)

(44.0)

(0.7)

(0.7)

(44.7)

(1.9)

(0.1)

(0.1)

(44.7)

75.8

–

–

(52.7)

(52.7)

(0.8)
(0.1)

(53.6)

(55.6)

(0.8)
(0.1)

(53.6)

22.2

The accompanying notes form an integral part of these financial statements. 

Strategic ReportFinancial Statements70

Staffline Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2020

Company Statement of Changes in Equity

For the year ended 
31 December 2020

At 1 January 2019

Issue of share capital
Costs of issue of share capital

Transactions with owners

Loss for the year

Total comprehensive income for the year, net of tax

At 31 December 2019

Profit for the year

Total comprehensive income for the year, net of tax

At 31 December 2020

Share 
capital
£m

2.8

4.1
–

4.1

–

–

6.9

–

–

6.9

Own 
shares 
JSOP
£m

(4.8)

–
–

–

–

–

Share 
premium
£m

41.2

36.9
(3.0)

33.9

–

–

(4.8)

75.1

–

–

–

–

Profit 
and loss 
account
£m

37.5

–
–

–

(76.7)

(76.7)

(39.2)

13.5

13.5

(4.8)

75.1

(25.7)

Total 
equity
£m

76.7

41.0
(3.0)

38.0

(76.7)

(76.7)

38.0

13.5

13.5

51.5

The accompanying notes form an integral part of these financial statements. 

Consolidated and Company Statements of  
Financial Position

As at 31 December 
2020

Governance

71

Assets
Non-current
Goodwill
Other intangible assets
Investments
Property, plant and equipment
Deferred tax asset 

Current
Trade and other receivables
Current tax asset
Cash and cash equivalents
Restricted cash

Total assets

Liabilities
Current
Trade and other payables
Borrowings
Other liabilities
Provisions
Lease liabilities

Non-current
Borrowings
Other liabilities
Provisions
Lease liabilities
Deferred tax liabilities

Total liabilities

Equity
Share capital
Own shares
Share premium 
Share-based payment reserve
Profit and loss account

Total equity

Total equity and liabilities

Note

11
12
13
14
23

17

18
18

19
20
21
22
15

20
21
22
15
23

24

Consolidated

Company

2020
£m

59.6
24.3
–
9.6
4.4

97.9

104.8
1.7
24.5
0.9

131.9

229.8

153.3
13.0
–
3.8
1.6

171.7

20.0
7.3
1.2
3.9
3.5

35.9

2019 
Restated
£m

94.9
34.0
–
14.6
1.4

144.9

132.4
5.3
25.0
12.7

175.4

320.3

126.4
6.4
0.7
16.0
2.6

152.1

78.1
1.4
2.4
5.8
4.7

92.4

207.6

244.5

6.9
(4.8)
75.1
0.6
(55.6)

22.2

229.8

6.9
(4.8)
75.1
0.5
(1.9)

75.8

320.3

2020
£m

–
–
67.8
–
–

67.8

7.7
0.2
–
–

7.9

2019
£m

–
–
75.0
–
–

75.0

51.3
–
–
–

51.3

75.7

126.3

3.8
–
–
–
–

3.8

20.0
0.4
–
–
–

20.4

24.2

6.9
(4.8)
75.1
–

(25.7)

51.5

75.7

8.8
–
–
–
–

8.8

78.1
1.4
–
–
–

79.5

88.3

6.9
(4.8)
75.1
–

(39.2)

38.0

126.3

The Company has taken advantage of Section 408 of the Companies Act 2006 and has not included its own profit and loss account in 
these financial statements. The Company’s profit for the year was £13.5m (2019: loss of £76.7m). The accompanying notes form an 
integral part of these financial statements.

The 2019 balance sheet has been restated to present Current Tax assets being corporation tax receivable.

The financial statements were approved by the Board of Directors on 21 June 2021 and signed on their behalf by:

Albert Ellis 
Director  
21 June 2021 

Daniel Quint
Director
21 June 2021 

Strategic ReportFinancial Statements 
 
 
 
 
 
72

Staffline Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2020

Consolidated Statement of Cash Flows

For the year ended 
31 December 2020

Cash flows from operating activities 

Taxation paid

Net cash inflow from operating activities

Cash flows from investing activities – trading
Purchases of property, plant and equipment
Sale of property, plant and equipment
Purchase of intangible assets – software
Cash flows from investing activities – acquisitions
Acquisition of businesses – deferred consideration for prior year acquisitions

Total cash flows arising from investing activities

Total cash flows arising from operating and investing activities

Cash flows from financing activities
New loans (net of transaction fees)
Reduction in Receivables Finance Facility
Loan repayments
Principal repayment of lease liabilities
Interest paid
Payment from/(into) restricted fund
Settlement of NMW liabilities from restricted funds
Gross proceeds from the issue of share capital
Costs relating to the issue of share capital

Net cash flows from financing activities

Net change in cash and cash equivalents

Cash and cash equivalents at beginning of year

Cash and cash equivalents at end of year

The accompanying notes form an integral part of these financial statements.

Note

29

8

14

12

30

20
20
20
15

18
18

24

18

2020
£m

65.8

(0.5)

65.3

(1.3)
0.2
(1.3)

(0.3)

(2.7)

62.6

43.0
(29.7)
(58.1)
(3.4)
(8.5)
11.8
(11.8)

–
–

(56.7)

5.9

18.6

24.5

2019
£m

1.6

(1.1)

0.5

(2.5)
0.6
(3.2)

(7.2)

(12.3)

(11.8)

24.9
–

(26.8)
(3.2)
(6.0)
(12.7)

–
41.0
(3.0)

14.2

2.4

16.2

18.6

Governance

73

Notes to the Financial Statements

For the year ended 
31 December 2020

1 Nature of operations
The principal activities of Staffline Group plc and its subsidiaries (the “Group”) include the provision of recruitment and outsourced 
human resource services to industry and the provision of skills training and probationary services. 

2 General information and statement of compliance 
Staffline Group plc, a Public Limited Company limited by shares listed on AIM (the “Company”), is incorporated and domiciled in 
England, United Kingdom. The Company acts as the holding company of the Group. The registered office and principal place of 
business of the Group and its subsidiary companies is disclosed on the Company details page to these financial statements, page 113, 
and within note 13. The Company’s registration number is 05268636.

The financial statements for the year ended 31 December 2020 (including the comparatives for the year ended 31 December 2019) 
were approved and authorised for issue by the Board of Directors on 21 June 2021.

There have been no new accounting standards that have required adoption in the current year. In 2019 the Group adopted new 
guidance for the recognition of leases. The standard was applied using the modified retrospective approach, with the cumulative effect 
of adoption as at 1 January 2019 being recognised as a single adjustment to retained earnings. 

The Company does not have an ultimate controlling party. As noted on page 52, the largest shareholder held 29.9% of the Company’s 
issued share capital as at 31 December 2020.

3 Accounting policies
Basis of preparation
The Consolidated financial statements are prepared for the year ended 31 December 2020. The Consolidated financial statements of 
the Group have been prepared on a going concern basis using the significant accounting policies and measurement bases 
summarised below, and in accordance with international accounting standards in conformity with the requirements of the Companies 
Act 2006. The financial statements are prepared under the historical cost convention except for cash-settled share options which are 
measured at fair value.

The Company financial statements of Staffline Group plc have been prepared under the historical cost convention and in accordance 
with Financial Reporting Standard 101 (FRS 101) and the Companies Act 2006. The following exemptions from the requirements of IFRS 
have been applied in the preparation of these financial statements, in accordance with FRS 101:
•  Paragraphs 45(b) and 46 to 52 of IFRS 2, Share-based Payment (details of the number and weighted-average exercise prices of 

share options, and how the fair value of goods or services received was determined);
IFRS 7, Financial Instruments: Disclosures;

• 
•  Paragraphs 91 to 99 of IFRS 13, Fair Value Measurement (disclosure of valuation techniques and inputs used for fair value 

measurement of assets and liabilities);

•  Paragraph 38 of IAS 1, Presentation of Financial Statements comparative information requirements in respect of:

 – paragraph 79(a)(iv) of IAS 1;
 – paragraph 73(e) of IAS 16;
 – paragraph 118(e) of IAS 38;
 – requirements of paragraphs 62 and B64 of IFRS 3 Business Combinations; and
 – paragraph 33(c) of IFRS 5

•  The following paragraphs of IAS 1, Presentation of Financial Statements:

 – 10(d) (statement of cash flows);
 – 10(f) (a statement of financial position as at the beginning of the preceding period when an entity applies an accounting policy 

retrospectively or makes a retrospective restatement of items in its financial statements, or when it reclassifies items in its 
financial statements);

 – 16 (statement of compliance with all IFRS);
 – 38A (requirement for minimum of two primary statements, including cash flow statements);
 – 38B-D (additional comparative information);
 – 40A-D (requirements for a third statement of financial position;
 – 111 (cash flow statement information); and
 – 134-136 (capital management disclosures)
IAS 7, Statement of Cash Flows;

• 
•  Paragraph 30 and 31 of IAS 8 Accounting Policies, Changes in Accounting Estimates and Errors (requirement for the disclosure of 

information when an entity has not applied a new IFRS that has been issued but is not yet effective);

•  Paragraph 17 of IAS 24, Related Party Disclosures (key management compensation); and
•  The requirements in IAS 24, Related Party Disclosures to disclose related party transactions entered into between two or more 

members of a group.

At the date of authorisation of these financial statements, there were no new Standards or amendments to existing Standards and 
Interpretations that became effective in the year. No Standards or amendments to existing Standards have been adopted early by 
the Group.

Strategic ReportFinancial Statements74

Staffline Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2020

Notes to the Financial Statements continued

For the year ended 
31 December 2020

3 Accounting policies continued
Basis of preparation continued
The Directors anticipate that all relevant pronouncements will be adopted for the first period beginning on or after the effective date of 
the pronouncement. New Standards, amendments and Interpretations not adopted in the current year have not been disclosed as they 
are not expected to have a material impact on the Group’s financial statements.

The Consolidated and Company financial statements are presented in sterling, which is the functional currency of the Parent 
Company and Group. The principal accounting policies of the Group and Company are set out below and have been consistently 
applied, unless stated otherwise.

Going concern
The Group’s business activities, together with the factors likely to affect its future development, performance and position are set out in 
the Chief Executive Officer’s Review on pages 10 to 13. The financial position of the Group, its cash flows, liquidity position and 
borrowing facilities are described in the Financial Review on pages 22 to 27. The principal risks and uncertainties to which the Group is 
exposed are described on pages 33 to 36.

As described in the Chief Executive Officer’s Review on pages 10 to 13, despite the challenging trading conditions experienced across 
all divisions in the Group during 2020, the Group reported an underlying operating profit for the year on continuing activities. In the 
recruitment divisions, the impact of Covid-19 was mixed with customers in the food distribution and online retail sectors experiencing 
increased demand. Other sectors such as manufacturing and automotive industries were severely impacted by the lockdowns and 
subsequent reduced demand. The Group’s PeoplePlus division was impacted by the disruption to its training programmes, with all 
face-to-face training cancelled or transferred to digital delivery. In response to the pandemic, the Directors enabled the majority  
of its permanent staff to work from home and provided additional support with Covid-secure working practices implemented at  
client’s premises.

As a result of the pandemic, trading volumes in the first half of the year were severely impacted. The Directors maintained tight cost 
control throughout and maintained overheads at reduced levels, benefitting from previous restructuring programmes. These initiatives 
resulted in improved performance in the second half of the year and lockdown restrictions eased, resulting in underlying profit and 
positive cash generation.

The Directors had previously highlighted that the Group’s financial forecasts indicated a liquidity issue in early 2021 when VAT of 
£46.5m deferred from March and June 2020 had to be repaid. In September 2020 the UK Government announced that an instalment 
payment scheme would be introduced, and details of the final scheme were published on 23 February 2021. The revised repayment 
profile had the effect of delaying the potential liquidity shortfall from March 2021 to later in the year.

In order to address the liquidity shortfall the Directors engaged professional advisors in late 2020 to assess the Group’s options for 
refinancing its debt facilities and to engage with potential lenders. On 20 May 2021, following a detailed appraisal by the Directors, the 
Company and certain subsidiary undertakings, entered into a new £90m Receivables Financing Agreement (“RFA”) to replace the 
existing Group funding arrangements. The RFA contained certain requirements to be met before completion, the most significant of 
which was that the Company raise new equity capital of at least £40.0m. This condition was satisfied and the RFA became effective on 
10 June 2021.

The new facility has repaid the existing facilities comprising the RCF of £20.0m and RFF of £68.2m and also the non-recourse 
receivables purchase facility of £25.0m. The Group will continue to have access to its existing supplier financing arrangements in 
respect of specific customers, under which invoices are settled in advance of normal credit terms.

The Group announced a proposed Placing, Subscription and Open Offer (the “fundraise”) on 21 May 2021 following conditional 
agreement of the debt refinancing. The fundraise comprised the following elements:
•  A total of 87,249,500 new ordinary shares of 10 pence each placed at a price of 50 pence per share (the “Issue Price”) to certain 

existing shareholders and new institutional investors;

•  A total of 750,500 new ordinary shares of 10 pence each to certain Directors and employees of the Group at the issue price; and
•  An open offer to existing shareholders for 10 shares for every 78 ordinary shares held, for a total of 8,837,242 new ordinary shares of 

10 pence each at the issue price.

The total proceeds of the Fundraise, which was approved by the shareholders in a General Meeting on 9 June 2021, was £48.4m. The 
total cost of the Fundraise and debt refinancing was £4.0m.  The net proceeds are to be used to reduce total indebtedness and to 
provide working capital for growth.

The Directors have prepared updated forecasts and cash flow projections to 31 December 2022 which is considered to be a reasonable 
period over which a reasonable view can be formed. These forecasts, which incorporate the effect of the fundraise and debt 
refinancing described above, have been used to assess going concern and have been stress-tested by applying sensitivity analysis, 
principally involving significant reductions to revenues across all three divisions over the period to 31 December 2022. 

Governance

75

The Covid-19 pandemic has caused considerable disruption to significant parts of the business and even as lockdown and social 
distancing measures are eased, there remains uncertainty over the rate at which economic activity will recover. The Group reacted 
swiftly to the immediate effects of the pandemic in the first half of the year with continuing tight cost control combined with support 
from the government through the furlough scheme and VAT payment deferral. The sensitivity testing undertaken on the forecasts 
demonstrated that there are a number of mitigating actions available to the Group, which would constrain losses and conserve 
working capital.

The sensitivity analysis also demonstrated that under the stress-tests applied, the Group would be able to comply with the financial 
covenants, as specified in the RFA, which are described in note 20.

In forming their opinion, the Directors have performed a robust assessment of the principal risks and uncertainties facing the Group as 
set out on pages 33 to 36. In addition, note 28 to the accounts includes the Group’s objectives, policies and processes for managing its 
capital; its financial risk management objectives; and its exposure to credit risk and liquidity risk. Consequently, the Directors believe 
that the Group is well placed to manage its business risks successfully.

At 31 December 2020, the Group had net debt of £8.8m (2019: £59.5m), on a pre-IFRS 16 basis, and following the debt refinancing has 
committed facilities until 1 December 2025. Further details of the financial position of the Group, its cash flows, liquidity position and 
borrowing facilities are described in the Financial Review.

At 31 December 2020, the Group had net debt of £8.8m (2019: £59.5m), on a pre-IFRS 16 basis, and following the debt refinancing has 
committed facilities until 1 December 2025. Further details of the financial position of the Group, its cash flows, liquidity position and 
borrowing facilities are described in the Financial Review.

As at 18 June 2021, the Group had cash at bank of £63.2m and, an unutilised facility of £25.5m under its RFA, resulting in aggregate 
available liquidity of £88.7m.

As a result, the Directors have formed a judgement, at the time of approving the financial statements, that there is a reasonable 
expectation that the Group has adequate resources to continue in operational existence and meet its liabilities as they fall due over the 
assessment period. The Directors have not identified any material uncertainties relating to events or conditions that, individually or 
collectively, may cast significant doubt on the Group’s ability to continue as a going concern for a period of at least eighteen months 
from when the financial statements are authorised for issue. For this reason, the Directors continue to adopt the going concern basis in 
preparing the financial statements.

Consolidation of subsidiaries
The Group financial statements consolidate those of the parent Company and all of its subsidiaries as at 31 December 2020 in 
accordance with IFRS 10. Subsidiaries are all entities to which the Group is exposed or has rights to variable returns and the ability to 
affect those returns through control over the subsidiary. The results of subsidiaries whose accounts are prepared in a currency other 
than sterling; are translated at the average rates of exchange during the period and their year-end balances at the year-end rate of 
exchange. Translation adjustments are taken to the profit and loss reserves.

Material intra-Group balances and transactions, and any unrealised gains or losses arising from intra-Group transactions, are 
eliminated in preparing these financial statements.

Underlying profit – non-GAAP measures of performance
In the reporting of its financial performance, the Group uses certain measures that are not defined under IFRS, the Generally Accepted 
Accounting Principles (“GAAP”) under which the Group reports. The Directors believe that these non-GAAP measures assist with the 
understanding of the performance of the business. These non-GAAP measures are not a substitute, or superior to, any IFRS measures 
of performance but they have been included as the Directors consider them to be an important means of comparing performance 
year-on-year and they include key measures used within the business for assessing performance. 

Non-underlying items of income and expenditure
These non-underlying charges are regarded as recurring or non-recurring items of income or expenditure of a particular size and/or 
nature relating to the operations of the business that in the Directors’ opinion require separate identification. These items are included 
in “total” reported results but are excluded from “underlying” results. These items can vary significantly from year to year and 
therefore create volatility in reported earnings which does not reflect the Group’s underlying performance. 

Underlying EBITDA
Underlying operating profit before the deduction of underlying depreciation and amortisation charges. This is considered a useful 
measure because it approximates the underlying cash flow by eliminating depreciation and amortisation charges.

Strategic ReportFinancial Statements76

Staffline Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2020

Notes to the Financial Statements continued

For the year ended 
31 December 2020

3 Accounting policies continued
Underlying profit – non-GAAP measures of performance continued
Net debt
Net debt is the amount of bank debt less available cash balances excluding escrow funds. This is a key measure as it is one on which 
the terms of the banking facilities are based and shows the level of external debt utilised by the Group to fund operations. Net debt is 
also presented on a pre-IFRS 16 basis which excludes lease liabilities.

The Directors acknowledge that the adjustments made to arrive at underlying profit may not be comparable to those made by other 
companies, mainly in respect of the adjustment for share-based payment charges including both equity and cash-settled components. 
It should be noted that whilst the amortisation of acquisition-related intangible assets has been added back, the revenue from those 
acquisitions has not been eliminated.

All of these alternative performance measures are utilised by the Board to monitor performance and financial position. They show a 
comparable level of performance excluding one-off items, with which underlying performance and ability to service debt can be judged.

Business combinations
The Group applies the acquisition method in accounting for business combinations. The consideration transferred by the Group to 
obtain control of a subsidiary is calculated as the sum of the acquisition-date fair value of assets transferred, liabilities incurred and 
the equity interests of the Group, which includes the fair value of any asset or liability arising from a contingent consideration 
arrangement. Acquisition costs are expensed as incurred.

Goodwill is stated after separate recognition of identifiable intangible assets. It is calculated as the sum of a) fair value of consideration 
transferred, b) the recognised amount of any non-controlling interest in the acquiree and c) acquisition-date fair value of any existing 
equity interest in the acquiree, over the acquisition-date fair values of identifiable net assets. If the fair values of identifiable net assets 
exceed the sum calculated above, the excess amount (i.e. gain on a bargain purchase) is recognised in the statement of comprehensive 
income immediately.

Segment reporting
The Group has three material reportable operating segments: the provision of recruitment and outsourced human resource services to 
industry, in Great Britain (Recruitment GB) and also in Ireland (Recruitment Ireland), plus the provision of skills training and 
probationary services, together “PeoplePlus”. Each of these reportable operating segments is managed separately as each requires 
different technologies, marketing approaches and other resources. For management purposes, the Group uses the same measurement 
policies as those used in its financial statements. 

Revenue recognition
Recruitment divisions
Income from the provision of temporary contractors is recognised as services are rendered, based on hours worked multiplied by the 
contracted hourly rate, net of rebates. In the case of temporary contractors, there is deemed to be one performance obligation, being 
the satisfactory completion of the daily hours. Income from permanent placements is recognised when the candidates start work, since 
there is deemed to be one performance obligation, being the commencement of employment of the worker. In the occasional instances 
where a permanent worker is deemed to be unsatisfactory and a suitable replacement cannot be found, a credit will be issued. No 
provision is held for this since the amounts are not material. In each case, revenue is only recognised when the labour or service has 
been provided and the Group is contractually entitled to the revenue.

Revenue is measured at the fair value of the consideration received or receivable for the supply of services, net of value added tax, 
rebates and discounts and after eliminating sales within the Group. Provisions for rebates are accounted for in the period to which the 
sale relates and are calculated in accordance with the contractual arrangements in place. The rebate provision recognised is the full 
amount invoiced less the potential impact of other reasonably foreseen constraints. Management calculates an estimate of the most 
likely amount of the rebate based upon the terms agreed within the contract and adopt a prudent approach.

The Group assesses whether it is acting as agent or principal depending on whether the customer has a direct relationship with the 
Group, whether the Group has the primary responsibility for providing the services and whether the Group has control over the 
placement of the worker. Where the Group acts as a principal in the supply, revenue is recognised as the gross amount due, net of 
value-added tax, rebates and discounts. The Recruitment GB division has a limited number of second tier arrangements whereby 
another recruitment company will provide contractors to the Group to enable the Group to fulfil a customer’s requirement. Where this 
arrangement constitutes an agency relationship rather than principal, the amount of revenue recognised is limited to the management 
fee or margin receivable for that service after making provision for any losses foreseen, volume rebates and any other amounts 
payable, rather than the full amount invoiced. Trade receivables and payables related to these sales are recorded at full invoice value.

The Recruitment division recognises Contract assets to reflect revenue recorded in relation to work that is part way through completion 
of a performance obligation and is yet to be invoiced. 

Contract liabilities are short term in nature (<1 year) and are recognised in the profit and loss account in the year following recognition.

Governance

77

PeoplePlus division
Income is generated from skills-based contracts, and the provision of welfare to work services. The segment recognises revenue upon 
fulfilment of the performance obligation, being the provision of a specified individual level of training, support or advice for a person 
enrolled in the programme. There is one contract that has more than one performance obligation, however, the revenue was not 
material in either the current or prior year.

For contracts where the contractual obligation relates to providing individuals with training, support or advice for a specific period of 
time, ranging between 3-24 months, the revenue is recognised over time as this reflects when the individual receives the benefit and 
the end client is simultaneously receiving and consuming the benefits provided by PeoplePlus’s performance. Progress towards 
satisfaction of the performance obligation is determined based upon, for example, activities carried out. Where income is received in 
advance this is initially held in the statement of financial position as deferred income and released to the statement of comprehensive 
income as services are provided. Accrued income is recognised where services have been provided in advance of invoiced income and, 
based on all available evidence, the division expects to receive payment in accordance with the contract.

Revenue is accounted for over the period the services are provided in accordance with IFRS 15 including where the outcomes are 
variable in nature. There are a few contracts that have a variable element of revenue associated with them, for example one contract 
has an element of payment by results and potential penalties if insufficient activities are carried out. Detailed management 
information is used to support the basis of the variable element of the revenue recognition calculation to provide the most likely 
amount. This will take into account historical experience, as well as future expectations in terms of success rates and the anticipated 
length of period over which the services are ultimately provided and ensure that a prudent approach is adopted.

Operating expenses 
Operating expenses are recognised in the statement of comprehensive income when incurred and are classified according to their 
nature. 

Furlough claims
Where the Group has been entitled to receive a government grant, it has determined the treatment of the grant under either a capital 
approach or the income approach. The Group has only been in receipt of grants determined as appropriate to account for under the 
income approach. The grant income has been matched with the related costs, for which they are intended to compensate, on a 
systematic basis. The grant income has only been recognised where there is reasonable assurance that the Group will comply with all 
conditions attached to the grant and that the grant will be received. During the year, the Group utilised the Coronavirus Job Retention 
Scheme (“CJRS”) in the UK and the Temporary Wage Subsidy Scheme (“TWSS”) in the Republic of Ireland and claimed and received a 
total of £31.4m. At the year end, £0.1m has been recognised on the balance sheet as a grant receivable within other debtors. There are 
no unfulfilled conditions and contingencies attached to the grants recognised within these financial statements.

Goodwill
Goodwill represents the excess of the fair value of the cost of a business acquisition over the Group’s share of the fair value of assets 
and liabilities acquired as at the date of acquisition. Goodwill is tested annually for impairment and carried at historic fair value less 
accumulated impairment losses.

Intangible assets
Assets acquired as part of a business combination
In accordance with IFRS 3 Business Combinations, an intangible asset acquired in a business combination is deemed to have a cost to 
the Group of its fair value at the acquisition date. The fair value of the intangible asset reflects market expectations about the 
probability that the future economic benefits embodied in the asset will flow to the Group. An independent valuation is undertaken in 
order to assess the fair value of intangible assets acquired in a business combination. 

The fair value is then amortised over the expected useful economic life of the asset as detailed below. Where an intangible asset might 
be separable, but only together with a related tangible or intangible asset, the group of assets is recognised as a single asset 
separately from goodwill where the individual fair values of the assets in the Group are not reliably measurable. Where the individual 
fair values of the complementary assets are reliably measurable, the Group recognises them as a single asset provided the individual 
assets have similar useful lives.

Customer contracts, customer lists, brands and licences
The fair value of acquired customer contracts, customer lists, brands and licences is capitalised and, subject to impairment reviews, 
amortised over their estimated lives (estimated to be five years). The amortisation is calculated so as to write off their fair value less 
their estimated residual values over their estimated lives. An impairment review is undertaken when events or circumstances indicate 
the carrying amount may not be recoverable.

Computer software
Computer software is carried at historical cost less subsequent amortisation and impairment losses. Amortisation is charged on the 
cost less the estimated residual value, which is assessed annually, of these assets on a straight-line basis over the estimated useful 
economic life of each asset.

The useful lives of computer software are three to five years and are amortised on a straight-line basis.

Strategic ReportFinancial Statements78

Staffline Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2020

Notes to the Financial Statements continued

For the year ended 
31 December 2020

3 Accounting policies continued
Property, plant and equipment
Freehold land and property, computer equipment, fixtures and fittings and motor vehicles are carried at acquisition cost less 
subsequent depreciation and impairment losses. Depreciation is charged on the cost less the estimated residual value, which is 
assessed annually, of these assets over the estimated useful economic life of each asset.

The estimated useful economic lives of property, plant and equipment and the depreciation basis can be summarised as follows:
Land and buildings 
Computer equipment 
Fixtures and fittings 
Motor vehicles 

50 years straight-line
3-5 years straight-line
3-5 years straight-line
25% reducing balance

Right-of-use assets are depreciated over their lease term. Assets in the course of construction are not depreciated until they are 
available for use.

Impairment assessment
Goodwill, other intangible assets and property, plant and equipment are subject to impairment testing.

For the purposes of assessing impairment, assets are grouped at the lowest levels for which there are separately identifiable cash flows 
(cash-generating units). As a result, some assets are tested individually for impairment and some are tested at cash-generating unit 
level. Goodwill is allocated to those cash-generating units that are expected to benefit from synergies of the related business 
combination and represent the lowest level within the Group at which management monitors the related cash flows.

Individual intangible assets or cash-generating units that include goodwill with an indefinite useful life are tested for impairment at 
least annually. All other individual assets or cash-generating units are tested for impairment whenever events or changes in 
circumstances indicate that the carrying amount may not be recoverable.

An impairment loss is recognised for the amount by which the asset’s or cash-generating unit’s carrying amount exceeds its 
recoverable amount. The recoverable amount is the higher of fair value, reflecting market conditions less costs to sell, and value-in-use 
based on an internal discounted cash flow evaluation. Impairment losses recognised for cash-generating units, to which goodwill has 
been allocated, are credited initially to the carrying amount of goodwill. Any remaining impairment loss is charged pro rata to the other 
assets in the cash-generating unit. With the exception of goodwill, all assets are subsequently reassessed for indications that an 
impairment loss previously recognised may no longer exist.

Investments
Investments in the subsidiary undertakings are held at cost less provision for impairment. 

Leases
The Group is not party to any material leases where it acts as a lessor, but the Group does have a large number of material property 
and equipment leases, under which it is a lessee.

Following the adoption of IFRS 16, for any new contracts entered into on or after 1 January 2019, the Group considers whether a 
contract is, or contains a lease. A lease is defined as “a contract, or part of a contract, that conveys the right to use an asset (the 
underlying asset) for a period of time in exchange for consideration”. To apply this definition the Group assesses whether the contract 
meets three key evaluations which are whether:
•  The contract contains an identified asset, which is either explicitly identified in the contract or implicitly specified by being identified 

at the time the asset is made available to the Group;

•  The Group has the right to obtain substantially all of the economic benefits from use of the identified asset throughout the period of 

use, considering its rights within the defined scope of the contract; and

•  The Group has the right to direct the use of the identified asset throughout the period of use. The Group assess whether it has the 

right to direct “how and for what purpose” the asset is used throughout the period of use. 

Measurement and recognition of leases as a lessee
At lease commencement date, the Group recognises a right-of-use asset and a lease liability on the balance sheet. The right-of-use 
asset is measured at cost, which is made up of the initial measurement of the lease liability, any initial direct costs incurred by the 
Group, an estimate of any costs to dismantle and remove the asset at the end of the lease, and any lease payments made in advance 
of the lease commencement date (net of any incentives received). The Group depreciates the right-of-use assets on a straight-line 
basis from the lease commencement date to the earlier of the end of the useful life of the right-of-use asset or the end of the lease term. 
The Group also assesses the right-of-use asset for impairment when such indicators exist.

At the commencement date, the Group measures the lease liability at the present value of the lease payments unpaid at that date, 
discounted using the interest rate implicit in the lease if that rate is readily available or the Group’s incremental borrowing rate. Lease 
payments included in the measurement of the lease liability are made up of fixed payments (including in substance fixed), variable 
payments based on an index or rate, amounts expected to be payable under a residual value guarantee and payments arising from 
options reasonably certain to be exercised.

 
Governance

79

Subsequent to initial measurement, the liability will be reduced for payments made and increased for interest. It is remeasured to 
reflect any reassessment or modification, or if there are changes in in-substance fixed payments. When the lease liability is 
remeasured, the corresponding adjustment is reflected in the right-of-use asset, or profit and loss if the right-of-use asset is already 
reduced to zero.

The Group has elected to account for short-term leases and leases of low-value assets using the practical expedients. Instead of 
recognising a right-of-use asset and lease liability, the payments in relation to these are recognised as an expense in profit or loss on a 
straight-line basis over the lease term.

On the statement of financial position, right-of-use assets have been included in property, plant and equipment and lease liabilities are 
disclosed separately.

Taxation
Current income tax assets and/or liabilities comprise those obligations to, or claims from, fiscal authorities relating to the current or 
prior reporting period, that are unpaid at the balance sheet date. They are calculated according to the tax rates and tax laws 
applicable to the fiscal periods to which they relate, based on the taxable profit or loss for the year.

Deferred income taxes are calculated using the liability method on temporary differences. This involves the comparison of the carrying 
amounts of assets and liabilities in the Consolidated financial statements with their respective tax bases. However, in accordance with 
the rules set out in IAS 12, no deferred taxes are recognised on the initial recognition of goodwill. This applies also to temporary 
differences associated with shares in subsidiaries if reversal of these temporary differences can be controlled by the Group and it is 
probable that reversal will not occur in the foreseeable future. In addition, tax losses available to be carried forward as well as other 
income tax credits to the Group are assessed for recognition as deferred tax assets.

Deferred tax liabilities are provided for in full if material. Deferred tax assets are recognised if it is probable that they will be able to be 
offset against future taxable income. Deferred tax assets and liabilities are calculated, without discounting, at tax rates that are 
expected to apply to their respective period of realisation, provided they are enacted or substantively enacted at the statement of 
financial position date.

Most changes in deferred tax assets or liabilities are recognised as a component of tax expense in the profit or loss. Only changes in 
deferred tax assets or liabilities that relate to a change in value of assets or liabilities that are charged directly in other comprehensive 
income or equity are charged or credited directly to other comprehensive income or equity.

Cash and cash equivalents
For the purposes of the cash flow statement, cash and cash equivalents include cash at bank and in hand and overdrafts which are 
repayable on demand. Cash held in escrow is excluded from net debt.

Pensions
The Group contributes to a number of pension arrangements. The schemes are generally funded through payments to insurance 
companies or trustee-administered funds, determined by periodic actuarial calculations. The Group has both defined contribution and 
defined benefit plans. A defined contribution plan is a pension plan under which the Group pays fixed contributions into a separate 
entity. The Group has no legal or constructive obligation to pay further contributions if the fund does not hold sufficient assets to pay 
all employees the benefits relating to employee service in the current and prior periods. A defined benefit plan is a pension plan that is 
not a defined contribution plan. Typically, defined benefit plans define an amount of pension benefit that an employee will receive on 
retirement, usually dependent on one or more factors such as age, years of service and compensation.

Defined benefit plan
The liability recognised in the balance sheet in respect of defined benefit pension plans is the present value of the defined benefit 
obligation at the end of the reporting period less the fair value of plan assets. The defined benefit obligation is calculated annually by 
independent actuaries using the projected unit credit method. The present value of the defined benefits obligation is determined by 
discounting the estimated future cash outflows using interest rates of high-quality corporate bonds that have terms to maturity 
approximating to the terms of the related pension obligations.

Actuarial gains and losses arising from experience adjustments and changes in actuarial assumptions are charged or credited within 
other comprehensive income in the period in which they arise.

Defined contribution plan
A defined contribution plan is a pension plan under which the Group pays fixed contributions to an independent entity. The Group has 
no legal or constructive obligations to pay further contributions after payment of the fixed contribution. Contributions recognised in 
respect of personal pension plans are expensed as they fall due. Liabilities and assets may be recognised if an underpayment or 
prepayment has occurred and are included in current liabilities or current assets as they are normally of a short-term nature.

Strategic ReportFinancial Statements80

Staffline Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2020

Notes to the Financial Statements continued

For the year ended 
31 December 2020

3 Accounting policies continued
Financial assets
The Group’s financial assets include cash, trade receivables and other receivables. The Company’s financial assets relate to amounts 
owed by subsidiary companies which are initially recorded at fair value and subsequently at amortised cost. 

All financial assets are initially recognised at fair value, plus transaction costs. After initial recognition, these are measured at 
amortised cost using the effective interest method. Discounting is omitted where the effect of discounting is immaterial. The Group’s 
cash and cash equivalents, trade and most other receivables fall into this category of financial instruments.

The Group uses a receivables financing facility against certain customer trade receivables, and a number of separate customer 
financing arrangements. Under these arrangements the associated trade receivables are non-recourse to the Group and as such 
substantially all the risks and rewards of ownership of these trade receivables are transferred at the point the trade receivables are 
transferred to third parties. Consequently, those trade receivables are de-recognised at the point of transfer. 

The Group makes use of a simplified approach in accounting for trade and other receivables and records the loss allowance as lifetime 
expected credit losses. These are the expected shortfalls in contractual cash flows, considering the potential for default at any point 
during the life of the financial instrument. In calculating, the Group uses its historical experience, external indicators and forward-
looking information to calculate the expected credit losses using a provision matrix. The Group assess impairment of trade receivables 
on a collective basis as they possess shared credit risk characteristics, they have been grouped based on the days past due. Refer to 
note 28 for a detailed analysis of how the impairment requirements of IFRS 9 are applied.

The Company assesses at each balance sheet date whether amounts owed by subsidiary companies are impaired by reference to any 
evidence indicating that the Company may not be able to collect all amounts due in full.

Financial liabilities
The Group’s financial liabilities include bank loans, receivables finance facilities, trade and other payables, including liabilities for 
share-based payments, and other liabilities, which include deferred and contingent consideration payable in respect of business 
acquisitions.

Financial liabilities are recognised when the Group becomes a party to the contractual agreements of the instrument. All interest-
related charges are recognised as an expense in “finance costs” in the statement of comprehensive income.

Bank funding is raised to support the long-term capital requirements of the Group’s operations. They are recognised at the proceeds 
received and any direct issue costs are charged to profit and loss when incurred. Direct issue costs capitalised from the refinancing of 
debt in previous years has been charged to profit and loss in the current year. Exit fee liabilities are recognised on the balance sheet at 
the time of refinancing. All other finance charges are charged to the profit and loss account on an accruals basis.

Trade payables are recognised initially at their fair value and subsequently measured at amortised cost less settlement payments.

Dividend distributions to shareholders are included in “other short-term financial liabilities” when the dividends are approved by the 
shareholders’ meeting prior to the financial year-end but remain unpaid at the year-end.

Contingent consideration is measured at fair value through profit and loss.

Short-term employee benefits
Short-term employee benefits, including holiday entitlement, are current liabilities included in accruals, measured at the undiscounted 
amount that the Group expects to pay as a result of the unused entitlement.

Provisions and contingent liabilities 
Provisions are recognised when present obligations will probably lead to an outflow of economic resources from the Group and they 
can be estimated reliably. The timing or amount of the outflow may still be uncertain. A present obligation arises from the presence of 
a legal or constructive commitment that has resulted from past events, for example, legal disputes or onerous contracts. 

Provisions are measured as the estimated expenditure required to settle the present obligation, based on the most reliable evidence 
available at the balance sheet date, including the risks and uncertainties associated with the present obligation. Where there are a 
number of similar obligations, the likelihood that an outflow will be required in settlement is determined by considering the class of 
obligations as a whole. In addition, long-term provisions are discounted to their present values, where the time value of money is 
material.

All provisions are reviewed at each balance sheet date and adjusted to reflect the current best estimate.

Contingent liabilities reflect those cases where the possible outflow of economic resource as a result of present obligations is 
considered improbable or remote, or the amount to be provided for cannot be measured reliably, no liability is recognised in the 
consolidated statement of financial position. Instead, they are disclosed in note 26.

Governance

81

Equity
An equity instrument is any contract that evidences a residual interest in the assets of an entity after deducting all of its liabilities.

Share capital is determined using the nominal value of shares that have been issued.

Own shares is determined using the nominal value of shares that were issued to the Employee Benefit Trust in relation to the Joint 
Share Ownership Plan (“JSOP”). This Trust is deemed to be controlled by the Group and therefore consolidated, resulting in the “Own 
shares” deducted from equity.

The share premium account represents premiums received on the initial issuing of the share capital. Any transaction costs associated 
with the issuing of shares are deducted from share premium, net of any related income tax benefits.

The share-based payment reserve represents the value of shares granted under share-based payment arrangements.

The profit and loss account includes all current and prior period results as disclosed in the statement of comprehensive income.

Dividends
Final dividends are recognised as a distribution in the period in which they are approved by the shareholders. Interim dividends are 
recorded in the period in which they are paid. Distributions to owners of the Company are not recognised in the statement of 
comprehensive income under IFRS but are disclosed as a component of the statement of changes in equity.

Share-based employee remuneration
All share-based payment arrangements are recognised in the Consolidated financial statements. The Group operates equity-settled 
and cash-settled share-based remuneration plans for remuneration of certain of its Directors and employees.

Equity-settled share-based remuneration
All employee services received in exchange for the grant of any share-based remuneration are measured at their fair values at the date 
of grant. These are indirectly determined by reference to the fair value of the share options awarded. Their value is appraised at the 
grant date and excludes the impact of any non-market vesting conditions (for example, profitability and sales growth targets). All 
share-based remuneration is ultimately recognised as an expense in profit or loss in the statement of comprehensive income with a 
corresponding credit to the share-based payment reserve, net of deferred tax where applicable.

If vesting periods or other vesting conditions apply, the expense is allocated over the vesting period, based on the best available 
estimate of the number of share options expected to vest. Non-market vesting conditions are included in assumptions about the 
number of options that are expected to become exercisable. Estimates are subsequently revised, if there is any indication that the 
number of share options expected to vest differs from previous estimates. No adjustment is made to the expense recognised in prior 
periods if fewer share options ultimately are exercised than originally estimated.

Upon exercise of share options, the proceeds received net of any directly attributable transaction costs up to the nominal value of the 
shares issued are allocated to share capital with any excess being recorded as share premium.

Cash-settled share-based remuneration
The Group has in place certain issued cash-settled share-based payment schemes in respect of services provided by key employees. 
The share-based payment is measured at the fair value of the liability at the grant date and remeasured at fair value of the liability at 
each subsequent balance sheet date. A financial liability is recognised for the fair value of the share-based payments at the date of 
the grant and is remeasured at the end of each reporting period and at settlement with any changes to the fair value recognised in 
profit or loss in the statement of comprehensive income. The fair value of awards is recognised over the periods in which employees 
render service.

Critical judgements and estimate uncertainty in applying the Group’s accounting policies
Significant management judgements
The following are the judgements made by management in applying the accounting policies of the Group that have the most 
significant effect on the financial statements. 

Revenue recognition
The Group assesses the nature of the commercial arrangements with its customers to determine whether it is acting as the principal or 
as an agent. When the Group acts as a principal, revenue is recognised as the full amount invoiced, net of value-added tax, rebates 
and discounts. When the Group provides a secondary service in which it acts as agent for the customer, typically in partnership with 
another employment agency, the amount of revenue recognised is limited to the margin receivable for that service after making 
provision for any losses foreseen, volume rebates and any other amounts payable, rather than the full amount invoiced.

In most cases the Group acts as principal due to its direct relationship with its customers and its primary relationship with the worker, 
with control over when and where they are placed, and pricing. Revenue is recognised on an agency basis when the Group does not 
have a direct relationship with the worker for control or remuneration and does not have primary responsibility for their placement. 

Strategic ReportFinancial Statements82

Staffline Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2020

Notes to the Financial Statements continued

For the year ended 
31 December 2020

3 Accounting policies continued
Critical judgements and estimate uncertainty in applying the Group’s accounting policies continued
Significant management judgements continued
Non-underlying items
The Group supplements the performance disclosures that are required under IFRS with additional measures and information that is 
intended to assist the understanding of exceptional income or charges, and to demonstrate the underlying results of the business. 

Non-underlying income or expenditure items are typically non-recurring items of a particular size and/or nature relating to the 
operations of the business that are judged to merit separate disclosure in the income statement. Additional explanation is given 
regarding the circumstances that gave rise to each item and its likely outcome, see note 5.

Investment in subsidiary undertakings and intercompany loans
The Company initially recognises its investments in, and loan balances with, subsidiary undertakings at cost, plus transaction costs, 
less impairment. After initial recognition, these are measured at amortised cost. The intercompany loan balances are not subject to 
formal loan agreements and are therefore classified as interest free and on demand.

Details of the Company’s investments are given in note 13 and details of intercompany loans are given in note 17. 

Leases
Under IFRS 16 Leases, a right-of-use asset and associated lease liability have been recognised. The amounts to be recognised are 
affected by the expected lease term, which may not be the same as the formal term of the lease. Consequently, a judgment is required 
to determine the expected lease termination date based on anticipated operational requirements. The circumstances of each lease, 
which for the Group relate principally to office premises, have been assessed to determine the most likely lease termination date, being 
either the break date (if the break is likely to be exercised) or the lease end date. Management has not assumed any extensions beyond 
the lease end dates. 

Information regarding the Group’s leases is provided in note 15.

Borrowings
At the year-end the Group had in place a £20.0m Revolving Credit Facility (“RCF”), which expires in July 2022. In practice the elements of 
the facility that are drawn down typically have short term expiry dates. Management considers the overall effect and features of the 
facility to be those of long-term borrowings that expire after more than one year from the end of the year. The Group has an unconditional 
right to renew at each expiry date and roll the loan. Accordingly, the RCF balance outstanding is disclosed as non-current.

The Group also has a new Receivable Financing Facility (“RFF”), which commenced on 26 June 2020. The Group receives advances 
against eligible receivables but retains responsibility for collection. The amounts due are funded on a recourse basis and consequently 
the receivable remains on the balance sheet until settled by the customer.

The Group receives additional funding by utilising other receivables financing facilities held against certain customer receivables, and 
a number of separate Customer Financing arrangements. In these separate arrangements the associated trade receivables are 
considered to be settled on receipt of funds. Management consider the arrangements to be non-recourse to the Group and 
consequently debt is removed from the total receivables balance on the date of settlement. 

The effect of these receivables financing arrangements is that trade receivables are settled significantly in advance of normal 
commercial terms, which can be 60 – 90 days for these customers. The Group incurs a cost for this service, which is judged to be 
financing in nature rather than a settlement discount, or other form of price reduction, and it is therefore treated as a finance cost 
through profit and loss. 

Details of the Group’s borrowings are given in note 20.

Deferred tax asset
The Group recognises a deferred tax asset on unused tax losses carried forward within the Irish businesses and on the timing difference 
between depreciation charges and tax allowances. The Recruitment Ireland division has maintained its profitability during the year and 
management has determined that there is sufficient evidence to show that the tax losses will be utilised in the foreseeable future. 
Subsidiary undertakings within the Recruitment GB and PeoplePlus divisions also have carried forward tax losses. For these companies, 
management has concluded that there is insufficient evidence to justify the recognition of a deferred income tax asset. 

Details of all deferred tax balances are provided in note 23.

 
Governance

83

Provisions
The Group, with assistance from its specialist advisors, has continued to engage fully with HMRC to quantify, to the fullest extent 
reasonably possible, its remaining liability arising from the “National Minimum Wage” (“NMW”) enquiry. The investigations that took 
place during 2019 expanded the range of the enquiry, both geographically and across the Group’s customer base. The formal enquiry 
was closed in April 2020, but the Group has continued to undertake internal “self- assessment” reviews to ensure ongoing compliance, 
with the continuing close involvement of HMRC. Judgements are required over the nature of the workplace practices at each customer 
site and their application to the NMW regulations in order to ensure compliance at all times.

Estimation uncertainty
Information about estimates and assumptions that may have the most significant effect on recognition and measurement of assets, 
liabilities, income and expenses is provided below. Actual results may be substantially different. 

Impairment of non-financial assets and goodwill
In assessing impairment, management estimates the recoverable amount of each asset or cash generating unit based on expected 
future cash flows and uses an interest rate to discount them. Estimation uncertainty relates to assumptions about future operating 
results and the determination of a suitable discount rate.

In 2019 and in the current year the Group has recognised impairment losses on goodwill in its Recruitment GB and PeoplePlus divisions 
(see note 11). During 2019 and in the current year the Company has recognised impairment losses on its investments in certain 
subsidiary undertakings.

Trade and other receivables
Due to the nature of its contracts with the English Skills Funding Agency the PeoplePlus division recognises some of its revenues on a 
completion basis using management’s best estimate of the likely outcome and the value of the service provided at the reporting date. 
At the year-end the value of accrued income subject to estimation was £0.9m (2019: £2.0m).

The Group’s credit control procedures are considered to be robust, but the potential for loss is always present. Management conducts 
regular detailed reviews of overdue and delinquent debt in order to estimate the value of bad debt provision required. If the expected 
credit loss allowances were to double, the increase in the provision would be £0.1m.

An analysis of trade and other receivables is given in note 17 and details of their risk profile is provided in note 28.

Holiday pay accrual
As required by International Accounting Standard 19 – Employee Benefits, the Group estimates the amount of holiday pay earned and 
unpaid at the year-end. The basic accrual is based on the number of hours earned by each worker multiplied by their average hourly 
pay rate calculated over the previous 52 weeks. Holiday pay hours accrue over the 12-months following each individual worker’s start 
date and any unclaimed hours outstanding on the anniversary date are lapsed. For this and other reasons, particularly absences 
without notice, the amount of holiday pay paid is always lower than the maximum liability – known as the “take-up” rate – and the 
accrual similarly is reduced. For accrual purposes, management bases the take-up rate on historic data averaged over the previous  
12 months. The take-up rate fluctuates with seasonality and the availability of work, depending upon customer requirements and, 
consequently, the accrual is considered to be a best estimate. For every percentage point change in the take-up rate provision would 
change by £0.1m (2019: £0.1m).

The holiday pay accrual, which amounts to £14.4m (2019: £11.7m), is included within accruals in note 19. 

National Minimum Wage Provision
The calculation of the National Minimum Wage provision requires considerable judgement as to the elements to be included, which 
include inter alia, estimates of waiting and preparation times based on customer practices over several years, attendance records and 
payment information. Management has estimated the provision based on the best available data for thousands of current and former 
employees, covering numerous current and former customer sites. The main inquiry is settled, as are the follow-on self-assessment 
reviews. As part of it’s compliance processes, the Group continues with its regular inspections across all sites.

Details of the provision are provided in note 22.

Strategic ReportFinancial Statements84

Staffline Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2020

Notes to the Financial Statements continued

For the year ended 
31 December 2020

4 Segmental reporting – continuing operations
Management currently identifies three reportable segments: Recruitment GB, the provision of workforce recruitment and management 
to industry, Recruitment Ireland, the provision of generalist recruitment services and PeoplePlus, the provision of skills training and 
probationary services. The Group’s reportable segments are determined based on the Group’s internal reporting to the Chief 
Operating Decision Maker (“CODM"). The CODM has been determined to be the Group Chief Executive, with support from the Board.

Whilst there are individual legal entities within the three reportable segments, they are operated and reviewed as single units by the 
Board of Directors. Each legal entity within a reportable segment has the same management team, head office and have similar 
economic characteristics. Historically and going forward, has been to integrate new acquisitions into the main trading entities within 
each reportable segment.

Segment information for the reporting year is as follows:

Recruitment 
GB 
2020
£m

Recruitment 
Ireland 
2020
£m

PeoplePlus 
2020
£m

Group Costs 
2020
£m

Total Group 
2020
£m

Recruitment 
GB
Restated** 
2019
£m

Recruitment 
Ireland
2019
£m

PeoplePlus
Restated** 
2019
£m

Group Costs
2019
£m

Total Group
Restated 
2019
£m

Sales revenue from 
external customers

Cost of sales

732.1
75.0
120.5
(685.9) (110.0) (57.1)

Segment gross profit

46.2

10.5

17.9

–
–

–

927.6

840.0
(853.0) (783.4) (132.1)

147.7

75.3
(60.0)

74.6

56.6

15.6

15.3

–
–

–

1,063.0
(975.5)

87.5

Administrative expenses
Depreciation, software 
& lease amortisation

Segment underlying 
operating profit/
(loss)*

Reorganisation costs 
Legal investigation 
professional fees

NMW remediation costs 

and financial 
penalties

Audit scope extension
Transaction costs
Amortisation of 

intangibles arising on 
business combinations

Goodwill impairment
Share-based payment 

charge

Segment (loss)/profit 

(38.2)

(8.2) (13.4)

(2.6)

(62.4)

(49.1)

(10.7)

(15.3) 

(2.5)

(77.6)

(3.8)

(0.7)

(2.9)

–

(7.4)

(2.9)

(0.6)

(3.5)

–

(7.0)

4.2

1.6

1.6

(2.0)

(0.7)

–

–
–
–

–

–
–
–

–

–

–
–
–

(2.6)

(1.3)

4.8

4.6

4.3

(4.0)

(1.3)

–

–

(1.0)

–
–
(0.5)

–
–
(0.5)

0.7
(0.6)
–

(3.5)

(1.0)

(2.5)

(1.4)

2.9

(3.7)

–

–

(1.0)

–
(0.2)
–

–
–
(0.9)

0.7
(0.8)
(0.9)

–

–

–
–
–

(7.6)
(18.8)

(1.4)
–

(0.2)
(16.5)

–

–

(0.1)

–
–

–

(9.2)
(35.3)

(8.0)
(14.3)

(1.3)
–

(1.6)
(8.0)

(0.1)

(0.1)

–

(0.1)

–
–

–

(10.9)
(22.3)

(0.2)

from operations

(24.2)

(0.5) (15.2)

(4.4)

(44.3)

(20.0)

Finance costs

(2.5)

(0.2)

(0.1)

(4.5)

(7.3)

(1.7)

Segment (loss)/profit 

before taxation 

(26.7)

(0.7) (15.3)

(8.9)

(51.6)

(21.7)

Tax credit/(charge)

0.6

0.2

0.7

1.6

3.1

2.6

3.0

–

3.0

0.5

(14.4)

(4.8)

(36.2)

(0.1)

(6.4)

(8.2)

(14.5)

(11.2)

(44.4)

0.1

0.2

3.4

Segment (loss)/profit 

from continuing 
operations 

(26.1)

(0.5) (14.6)

(7.3)

(48.5)

(19.1)

3.5

(14.4)

(11.0)

(41.0)

*  Segment underlying profit before goodwill impairment, amortisation of intangible assets arising on business combinations, reorganisation costs and other non-underlying 

costs.

**  The prior year has been restated to exclude Apprenticeships from People Plus and to exclude Poland from Recruitment GB, see note 10.

Governance

85

Recruitment 
GB 
2020
£m

Recruitment 
Ireland 
2020
£m

PeoplePlus 
2020
£m

Staffline 
Group 
2020
£m

Total Group 
2020
£m

Recruitment 
GB
2019
£m

Recruitment 
Ireland
2019
£m

PeoplePlus
2019
£m

Staffline 
Group
2019
£m

Total Group
2019
£m

45.9

97.9

11.5

15.6

40.5

18.4

143.8

27.1

58.9

–

–

–

97.9

71.3

131.9

134.1

16.1

21.4

57.5

19.9

229.8

205.4

37.5

77.4

–

–

–

144.9

175.4

320.3

142.3

22.4

21.9

20.6

207.2

119.4

28.3

16.4

80.4

244.5

1.2

0.1

1.3

–

2.6

3.7

0.1

1.9

–

5.7

Total non-current 

assets 

Total current assets 

Total assets 

(consolidated)

Total liabilities 
(consolidated)

Cash capital 

expenditure inc 
software

Revenues can be analysed by country as follows (97% of revenues arising within the UK in 2020, 96% in 2019):

UK
Republic of Ireland

Recruitment 
GB 
2020
£m

Recruitment 
Ireland 
2020
£m

PeoplePlus 
2020
£m

Total Group 
2020
£m

732.1
–

732.1

91.4
29.1

120.5

75.0
–

75.0

898.5
29.1

927.6

Recruitment 
GB
Restated 
2019
£m

840.0
–

840.0

Recruitment 
Ireland
2019
£m

PeoplePlus
Restated 
2019
£m

Total Group 
Restated
2019
£m

110.9
36.8

147.7

75.3  1,026.2 
36.8

–

75.3

1,063.0

No customer contributed more than 10% of the Group’s revenue during either 2020 or 2019. 

5 Expenses by nature
Expenses by nature are as follows:

Underlying expenses

Employee benefits expenses – cost of sales
Other cost of sales
Employee benefits expenses – administrative expenses
Depreciation and software amortisation
Operating lease expenses
Other administrative expenses

Disclosed as:
Cost of sales
Administrative expenses

Auditor’s remuneration

Fees payable to the Company’s auditor for the audit of the company’s annual accounts
Fees payable to the Company’s auditor and its associates for other services:
– Audit of the accounts of subsidiaries
– Audit of the pension scheme
– Audit related assurance services

Total

2020 
£m

827.9
25.1
40.5
7.4
1.5
20.4

2019
Restated
£m

939.7
35.8
45.4
7.3
1.2
30.7

922.8

1,060.1

853.0
69.8

922.8

975.5
84.6

1,060.1

2020 
£’000

15

680
18
154

867

2019 
£’000

15

1,176
11
200

1,402

For 2019, £805,000 of the above was for additional audit procedures including prior year adjustments, which is considered to be 
non-underlying.

Strategic ReportFinancial Statements86

Staffline Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2020

Notes to the Financial Statements continued

For the year ended 
31 December 2020

5 Expenses by nature continued
Non-underlying expenses – continuing operations

Reorganisation, rationalisation and restructuring costs 
Legal investigation professional fees
NMW remediation costs and financial penalties 
Revised audit scope and increased audit fees
Transaction costs – business acquisitions and strategic options
Refinancing costs
Amortisation of intangible assets arising on business combinations  

(licences, customer contracts)

Goodwill impairment
Share-based payment charges – other senior executives

Tax credit on above non-underlying expenses

Post taxation effect on above non-underlying expenses

Note

1

2
3

4
5

2020 
£m

4.0
–
–
–
0.5
3.2

9.2
35.3
0.1

52.3

(0.4)

51.9

2019
£m

3.7
1.0
(0.7)
0.8
0.9
3.2

10.9
22.3
0.2

42.3

(2.4)

39.9

Notes:
1.  During the year the Group has continued its reorganisation, rationalisation and restructuring programme across all the divisions in 

order to reduce the number of properties occupied and reducing administration headcount. In the prior year the Group 
implemented a strategy of transitioning the PeoplePlus division away from a predominantly work programme driven business to a 
skills and training business.

2.  Costs have been incurred in the current year and prior years in relation to advice on the Group’s strategic options.

3.  The Group’s credit facilities were restructured during the year at a cost of £3.2m (2019: £3.2m). Further details of the refinancing are 

given in note 20.

4.  The charge for amortisation of intangible assets arising on business combinations relates principally to the acquisitions of the 

Endeavour Group, Passionate About People, Grafton Recruitment, Milestone and Brightwork.

5.  The results of an impairment review showed that further impairment charges to goodwill were required in the Recruitment GB and 
PeoplePlus cash-generating units of £18.8m (2019: £14.3m) and £16.5m (2019: £8.0m) respectively. Further details are given in  
note 11.

6 Finance costs

Interest payable on financing arrangements
Refinancing costs – non-underlying

Total

2020 
£m

4.1
3.2

7.3

2019 
£m

5.0
3.2

8.2

 
Governance

87

7 Directors’ and employees’ remuneration
Employee benefits expense – consolidated
Expense recognised for employee (excluding temporary workers) benefits is analysed below:

Wages and salaries
Social security costs
Other pension costs – defined contribution plans
Other pension costs – defined benefit plan service cost

Share-based payment charge – cash-settled
Share-based payment charge – equity-settled

Included in administrative expenses (note 5)
Included in cost of sales
Share-based payment charge (cash and equity-settled)

The average monthly number of persons (including Directors) employed by the Group during the year 

was:

– Sales and administrative

2020 
£m

64.8
6.7
3.5
–

75.0

–
0.1

75.1

40.8
34.2
0.1

75.1

2019
Restated 
£m

67.5
7.8
3.3
0.1

78.7

–
0.2

78.9

45.4
33.1
0.2

78.7

2020
Number

2019
Number

2,357

2,582

Included in cost of sales are temporary workers’ remuneration paid through the temporary payroll of subsidiary companies as follows:

Wages and salaries payable to employees
Social security costs
Other pension costs – defined contribution plans

Gross cost
Coronavirus Job Retention Scheme receipts

The average monthly number of temporary workers contracted by the Group during the year was:

2020 
£m

758.2
 44.8 
 4.4 

807.4
(31.4)

776.0

2019
£m

873.4
47.0
3.9

924.3
–

924.3

Number

43,163

Number

43,760

The average number of persons (including Directors) employed by the Company during the year was 4 (2019: 6). Employee costs were 
£nil (2019: £nil). All Directors of the Group are remunerated through a subsidiary of the Company for their services to the Group as a 
whole. No direct recharge was made to the Company during the year (2019: £nil). 

Directors’ remuneration is detailed on pages 47 to 50 of the Report on Remuneration and disclosed further in note 25. 

Strategic ReportFinancial Statements88

Staffline Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2020

Notes to the Financial Statements continued

For the year ended 
31 December 2020

7 Directors’ and employees’ remuneration continued
Share-based employee remuneration
Save As You Earn (“SAYE”) share option plan 2017
In October 2017, Staffline granted options to employees as part of its Save As You Earn (“SAYE”) share scheme for 2017. Eligible 
employees were invited to subscribe for options over Staffline’s Ordinary Shares of 10p each (“Ordinary Shares”) with an exercise price 
of £9.32, a 20% discount to the closing middle market price on the trading day before the invitation to participate was made. The 
options have a contract start date of 1 December 2017 and are exercisable between 1 December 2020 and 31 May 2021. A total of 290 
employees elected to participate, and, pursuant to these elections, a total of 148,276 options over Ordinary Shares were granted on 
26 October 2017, equating to 0.22% of the current issued share capital of 68,930,486 shares. As at 31 December 2020, options over 
11,901 shares remain (37 employees), options over 136,375 shares having lapsed (253 employees).

Save As You Earn (“SAYE”) share option plan 2018
In September 2018, Staffline granted options to employees as part of its Save As You Earn (“SAYE”) share scheme for 2018. Eligible 
employees were invited to subscribe for options over Staffline’s Ordinary Shares of 10p each (“Ordinary Shares”) with an exercise price 
of £9.76, a 20% discount to the closing middle market price on the trading day before the invitation to participate was made. The 
options have a contract start date of 1 December 2018 and are exercisable between 1 December 2021 and 31 May 2022. A total of 167 
employees elected to participate and, pursuant to these elections, a total of 73,588 options over Ordinary Shares were granted on 
18 September 2018, equating to 0.11% of the current issued share capital of 68,930,486 shares. As at 31 December 2020, options over 
11,982 shares remain (36 employees), options over 61,606 shares having lapsed (131 employees).

Save As You Earn (“SAYE”) share option plan 2019
In November 2019, Staffline granted options to employees as part of its Save As You Earn (“SAYE”) share scheme for 2019. Eligible 
employees were invited to subscribe for options over Staffline’s Ordinary Shares of 10p each (“Ordinary Shares”) with an exercise price 
of £0.76, a 20% discount to the closing middle market price on the trading day before the invitation to participate was made. The 
options have a contract start date of 1 December 2019 and are exercisable between 1 December 2022 and 1 June 2023. A total of 170 
employees elected to participate and, pursuant to these elections, a total of 1,336,094 options over Ordinary Shares were granted on 
6 November 2019, equating to 1.94% of the current issued share capital of 68,930,486 shares. As at 31 December 2020, options over 
795,885 shares remain (95 employees), options over 540,209 shares having lapsed (75 employees).

Performance-related share option plan
Other than options granted to Chris Pullen (a former Director of the Company – options lapsed during the prior year), details of which are 
fully disclosed within the Report on Remuneration on pages 47 to 50, no other performance-related share options have been granted. 

Except as noted under the Joint Share Ownership Plans below, all share-based employee remuneration will be settled in equity. The 
Group has no other legal or constructive obligation to repurchase or settle the options in cash. 

Joint Share Ownership Plan 2018
In January 2018, the Company established a Joint Share Ownership Plan (“JSOP”) to provide additional incentives to certain senior 
executives. The JSOP shares are held jointly between the Directors and the Staffline Group plc Employee Benefit Trust. Under the terms 
of the JSOP rules the Directors are eligible to receive the excess of any disposal proceeds received for the JSOP shares over the 
participation price. The JSOP shares do not carry dividend or voting rights whilst they are jointly held by the executives and the 
Staffline Group plc Employee Benefit Trust.

A Plan covering the five-year period ending 31 December 2022 was approved by the Remuneration Committee in October 2017. Plan 
rules are the same as those for the 2013 Plan as highlighted above. The amount receivable by the executives is calculated based on 
certain business performance conditions, as follows:
1.  A range of underlying diluted earnings per share (“EPS”) of between 180.0p and 200.0p required in the financial year 2022 

(maximum 50% of the award). No shares vest if the EPS is below 180.0p in that year.

2.  50% of the award is subject to an additional condition that total shareholder return exceeds the increase in the FTSE AIM All-Share 
Total Return Index (AXX) over the period 1 January 2018 to 30 June 2023 (nil award if the minimum EPS requirement above is not 
achieved). The Company’s share price at 1 January 2018 was 1,040p and the AXX stood at 1,050. As at 31 December 2018, the 
Company’s share price had increased by 19% to 1,240p whereas the AXX had fallen by 18% to 859.

Directors’ and senior executives’ interests are detailed below:

Award 
date

Participation 
price

Interest over 
number 
of shares

Date  
on which 
exercisable

C Pullen (resigned 26 April 2020)

24 Jan 2018

999p

275,000 30 June 2023

Other executives (10 in total of which 3 left during the year)

Various

1,046p

500,000 30 June 2023

775,000

As noted above, the Directors and senior executives, most of whom participate in the JSOP, acquired an interest in the shares jointly 
with the Staffline Group plc Employee Benefit Trust (“EBT”). At the end of the financial year, the EBT held 1,140,400 (2018: 1,140,400) 
ordinary 10p shares to satisfy participants’ interests when the Scheme vests in June 2023.

Governance

89

The 2018 Joint Share Ownership Plan (“JSOP”) is settled in cash and therefore accounted for as a cash-settled scheme. As at 
31 December 2019 the Company’s share price was 87p, albeit the number of issued shares had increased by 147%. It was therefore 
considered highly unlikely that the JSOP would vest and accordingly no valuation is attached.

As at 31 December 2018 the fair value of the liability was determined using the Binomial valuation model. Significant inputs into the 
calculations were:
•  Share price at date of grant (January 2018 grant of 960,000 shares at 999p per share, September 2018 grant of 80,000 shares at 

1,294p per share);

•  Exercise prices based on the December 2018 year-end share price of 1,240p per share;
•  An average of 30.9% volatility based on expected and historical share price;
•  Risk-free interest rate of 0.830%, being five-year UK Gilts spot yield;
•  The disposal of shares by the EBT on 30 June 2023; and
•  Assumption that 50% of relevant employees will leave before the vesting date, 100% of the EPS target will be achieved and 100% of 

the TSR target will be achieved.

Share-based employee remuneration 
In total a charge of £0.1m of employee remuneration expense has been included in the consolidated statement of comprehensive 
income for the year ended 31 December 2020 (2019: £0.2m) which increased the share-based payment reserve by £0.1m (2019: £0.2m) 
in respect of equity-settled schemes (all employees SAYE scheme) and increased the liability by £nil (2019: £1.0m) in respect of  
cash-settled JSOP schemes. 

Save As You Earn Scheme (equity-settled)

Total

2020
£m

0.1

0.1

2019 
£m

0.2

0.2

Key management personnel
The key management are considered to be the Board of Directors of Staffline Group plc, whose remuneration can be seen in the Report 
on Remuneration on pages 47 to 50, and the divisional Directors, most of whom participate in the JSOP schemes. The aggregate 
remuneration, excluding share-based payment charges, for the divisional Directors for the year is £1.6m (2019: £2.6m). In addition, 
compensation payments of £0.2m (2019: £0.3m) were made on the departure of four key management personnel during the year 
(2019: one). Disclosures in accordance with IAS 24 are included in note 25.

8 Tax expense
The tax credit on the loss for the year consists of:

Continuing activities

Corporation tax
UK corporation tax at 19.00% (2019: 19.00%)
Adjustments in respect of prior years

UK current tax (credit)/charge

Deferred tax
Timing differences arising in the year
Adjustments in respect of prior years

UK deferred tax credit

Total UK tax credit for the year

2020
 £m

0.8
–

0.8

(3.3)
(0.6)

(3.9)

(3.1)

2019
Restated
£m

0.7
(1.7)

(1.0)

(1.6)
(0.8)

(2.4)

(3.4)

In the prior year, the net “adjustments in respect of prior years” credit of £2.5m (current £1.7m credit, deferred £0.8m credit) arose 
largely from the use of trading losses to reduce previously estimated tax liabilities (current) and the recognition of trading losses 
available to offset current and future profits generated by the Group’s subsidiaries in Ireland.

Strategic ReportFinancial Statements90

Staffline Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2020

Notes to the Financial Statements continued

For the year ended 
31 December 2020

8 Tax expense continued
The tax credit can be further analysed by division and by underlying/non-underlying trading as follows:

Recruitment GB
Recruitment Ireland
PeoplePlus
Staffline Group

Total UK tax credit for the year

Underlying trading
Non-underlying trading

Total UK tax credit for the year

2020 
£m

(0.6)
(0.2)
(0.7)
(1.6)

(3.1)

(0.4)
(2.7)

(3.1)

2019
Restated
£m

(2.6)
(0.5)
(0.1)
(0.2)

(3.4)

(1.0)
(2.4)

(3.4)

The tax credit for the year, as recognised in the statement of comprehensive income, is lower than the standard rate of corporation tax 
in the UK of 19.00% (2019: lower than the 19.00% standard rate). The differences are explained below:

Loss for the year before taxation
Tax rate

Tax on loss for the year at the standard rate

Effect of:
Goodwill impairment
Change in deferred tax rate to 19.00%
Expenses not allowable
Adjustments in respect of prior years
Tax losses available

Actual tax credit

On underlying profit/(loss)
On non-underlying loss

Actual tax credit

Effective total tax rate for the year

2020 
£m
Total

(51.6)
19%

(9.8)

6.7
0.5
0.9
(0.6)
(0.8)

(3.1)

(2.7)
(0.4)

(3.1)

6.0%

2019
Restated
£m
Total

(44.4)
19%

(8.4)

4.2
0.2
0.7
(2.5)
2.4

(3.4)

(1.0)
(2.4)

(3.4)

7.7%

The total tax credit for the year of £3.1m (2019: restated £3.4m), which amounts to 6.0% (2019: 7.7%) of the loss for the year, relates 
principally to the movement of deferred tax balances including the recognition of deferred taxation of carried forward tax losses. The 
Group has no current corporation tax liability in respect of either the current or prior years. An amount of overpaid corporation tax of 
£4.1m has been offset against the balance of VAT that was deferred between March and June 2020. The remaining corporation tax 
amounts receivable were received in early 2021.

The impairment of goodwill is not deductible under UK corporation tax and is therefore added back to taxable profits. A deferred tax 
liability is recognised in respect of intangible assets arising on acquired businesses. This liability is reduced each year in line with the 
amortisation charge, giving rise to a deferred tax credit each year. No deferred tax is recognised on JSOP charges.

A reduction in the UK corporation tax rate from 19% to 17% (effective from 1 April 2020) was substantively enacted on 6 September 2016, 
and the UK deferred tax asset/(liability) as at 31 December 2019 was calculated based on that rate. In the 11 March 2020 Budget, it was 
announced that the UK tax rate would remain at 19% and not reduce to 17% from 1 April 2020. 

No material tax charges arise on overseas profits or losses and accordingly no disclosures relating to overseas tax are included within 
the financial statements.

Governance

91

The current tax asset at the end of 2020 of £1.7m (2019: (£5.3m) can be analysed as follows:

(Asset)/liability at the beginning of the year
(Credit)/charge on profits for the year
R&D tax credit
Offset against deferred VAT liability
Paid in the year (net of repayments)

Asset at the end of the year

Balance of 2020 tax year (assets)
Balance of 2018 tax year (assets)
Balance of 2017 tax year (assets)
Balance of 2016 tax year (assets)

Asset at the end of the year

2020 
£m

(5.3)
–
0.2
4.1
(0.7)

(1.7)

(0.7)
–
(1.0)
–

(1.7)

2019
£m

(2.3)
(1.7)
(0.2)
–
(1.1)

(5.3)

–
(4.8)
(0.4)
(0.1)

(5.3)

9 Earnings per share and dividends
The calculation of basic earnings per share is based on the earnings attributable to ordinary shareholders divided by the weighted 
average number of shares in issue during the year, after deducting any shares held in the Joint Share Ownership Plan or “JSOP” – 
“own shares” (2020 and 2019 year-end 1,140,400 shares). The calculation of the diluted earnings per share is based on the basic 
earnings per share as adjusted to further take into account the potential issue of Ordinary Shares resulting from share options granted 
to certain Directors and share options granted to employees in 2017, 2018 and 2019 under the SAYE scheme. 

Details of the earnings and weighted average number of shares used in the calculations are set out below:

Loss from continuing operations (£m)
Weighted average number of shares
Loss per share from continuing operations (p)

Basic
2020

Basic
Restated
2019

Diluted
2020

Diluted
Restated
2019

(48.5)

(41.0)

(48.5)

(41.0)

67,790,086 45,668,823 67,790,086 45,668,823
(89.6)p

(71.5)p

(71.5)p

(89.6)p

Underlying (loss)/earnings from continuing operations (£m)
Underlying (loss)/earnings per share (p)* 

3.4
5.0p

(1.1)

(2.4)p

3.4
5.0p

(1.1)

(2.4)p

Loss from discontinued operations (£m)
Weighted average number of shares
Loss per share from discontinued operations (p)

(4.2)

(3.0)

(4.2)

(3.0)

67,790,086 45,668,823 67,790,086 45,668,823
(6.6)p

(6.2)p

(6.2)p

(6.6)p

Underlying (loss)/earnings from discontinued operations (£m)
Underlying (loss)/earnings per share (p)* 

(1.9)

(2.8)p

(3.0)

(6.6)p

(1.9)

(2.8)p

(3.0)

(6.6)p

*  Underlying operating profit before goodwill impairment, amortisation of intangible assets arising on business combinations, reorganisation costs and other 

non-underlying costs.

The weighted average number of shares for the year ended 31 December 2019 (basic) was increased by 22,121,263 shares to take 
account of the effect of the placing and open offer in July 2019 whereby 40,986,097 new Ordinary Shares were issued. 

Dividends
No dividends have been paid in either the current or prior years and no final dividend for 2020 has been proposed.

10 Discontinued activities
On 1 December 2020 the Group sold its loss-making Apprenticeships training business for a nominal sum. The sale agreement requires 
PeoplePlus to provide working capital support to the purchaser in the form of reimbursement of relevant salary costs incurred between 
December 2020 and March 2021, which will be repaid over 12 months commencing May 2021. 

For 2020 the Apprenticeships business recorded an operating loss of £(2.2)m (2019: £(3.6)m), before reorganisation and exit costs of 
£(2.5)m (2019: £nil).

In addition, the Group is in active discussions to sell its subsidiaries in Poland to the incumbent management team. Consequently, the 
results of the Polish activities are deemed to be discontinued and the trade is being held for disposal in 2021. The loss for 2020 was 
£(0.1)m before non-underlying costs of £(0.2)m.

Strategic ReportFinancial Statements92

Staffline Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2020

Notes to the Financial Statements continued

For the year ended 
31 December 2020

10 Discontinued activities continued

Revenue
Cost of sales

Gross profit
Administrative expenses

Underlying operating loss
Non-underlying costs

Operating loss
Tax credit

Loss for the period

2020
Apprenticeships
£m 

7.2
(8.3)

(1.1)
(1.1)

(2.2)
(2.5)

(4.7)
0.8

(3.9)

The cashflows of these businesses were as follows:

2020
Apprenticeships
£m 

Net cash outflow from operating activities

(0.7)

The loss on sale of these business is as follows;

2020
Poland
£m 

1.0
(1.0)

-
(0.1)

(0.1)
(0.2)

(0.3)
–

(0.3)

2020
Poland
£m 

(0.1)

2020
Total
£m 

8.2
(9.3)

(1.1)
(1.2)

(2.3)
(2.7)

(5.0)
0.8

(4.2)

2019 
Apprenticeships
£m

12.6
(13.6)

(1.0)
(2.6)

(3.6)
–

(3.6)
0.7

(2.9)

2020
Total
£m 

(0.8)

2019 
Apprenticeships
£m

(1.9)

2019 
Poland
£m

1.1
(1.1)

–
(0.1)

(0.1)
–

(0.1)
–

(0.1)

2019 
Poland
£m

(0.1)

Consideration received or receivable:
Cash

Total consideration
Carrying amount of net assets sold

Loss on sale before income tax

2020
Apprenticeships
£m 

2020
Poland
£m 

2020
Total
£m 

2019 
Apprenticeships
£m

2019 
Poland
£m

–
–

–
(0.4)

(0.4)

–
–

–
–

–

–
–

–
(0.4)

(0.4)

–
–

–
–

–

–
–

–
–

–

2019 
Total
£m

13.7
(14.7)

(1.0)
(2.7)

(3.7)
–

(3.7)
0.7

(3.0)

2019 
Total
£m

(2.0)

2019 
Total
£m

–
–

–
–

–

Following the discontinuation, the 2019 Consolidated statement of comprehensive income has been restated to allow comparison of 
continuing operations in accordance with IFRS 5. The table below sets out the adjustments made to exclude the results of the 
discontinued Apprenticeships and Polish businesses. 

Continuing operations

Revenue
Cost of sales

Gross profit

Administrative expenses

Operating loss 

Finance costs

Loss for the year before taxation

Tax credit

Loss from continuing activities

2019
Total as  
reported 
£m

2019
Discontinued
£m

2019 
Total  
Restated
£m

1,076.7
(990.2)

86.5

(126.4)

(39.9)

(8.2)

(48.1)

4.1

(44.0)

(13.7)
14.7

1.0

2.7

3.7

-

3.7

(0.7)

3.0

1,063.0

(975.5)

87.5

(123.7)

(36.2)

(8.2)

(44.4)

3.4

(41.0)

 
 
 
Governance

93

11 Goodwill
Gross carrying amount by reportable segment

Gross carrying amount

At 1 January 2020

Impairment adjustment
At 1 January 2020
Charged in the year

At 31 December 2020

Net book amount at 31 December 2020

Net book amount at 31 December 2019

Recruitment  
GB
£m

Recruitment 
Ireland
£m

54.5

14.3
18.8

33.1

21.4

40.2

5.7

–
–

–

5.7

5.7

PeoplePlus
£m

57.0

8.0
16.5

24.5

32.5

49.0

Total
£m

117.2

22.3
35.3

57.6

59.6

94.9

Impairment – Goodwill
Management consider there to be three cash-generating units (“CGU”), being Recruitment GB, Recruitment Ireland and PeoplePlus, in 
line with the reportable segments defined in note 4. These three cash-generating units have been tested for impairment. 

An impairment review was done at the half year reporting period. This led to an impairment being noted in the Recruitment GB and 
PeoplePlus cash-generating units. The impairment review was performed using forecasts, adjusted for the impact of the Covid-19 
pandemic, using discount rates of 11.7% for Recruitment GB, 10.9% for Recruitment Ireland and 11.7% for PeoplePlus. The results of the 
impairment review performed showed headroom in the Recruitment Ireland cash-generating unit and accordingly no impairment 
noted, but that impairments to goodwill were required in the Recruitment GB and PeoplePlus CGUs of £18.8m and £16.5m respectively.

An updated review was conducted as at 31 December 2020, the recoverable amount of goodwill was determined based on a value-in-
use calculation, using forecasts for 2021-23, followed by an extrapolation of expected cash flows over the next two years with a 0% 
growth rate for each cash-generating unit. The forecasts are prepared by the individual reportable segments of the Group taking into 
account individual contracts, historic performance and new contract wins. Pre-tax discount rates of 13.0% for Recruitment GB, 12.0% 
for Recruitment Ireland and 10.8% for PeoplePlus (2019: 11.7% for Recruitment GB and PeoplePlus and 10.9% for Recruitment Ireland) 
were used based on the weighted average costs of capital for each operating segment. The recoverable amounts of the CGUs, having 
considered the higher of value-in-use and fair value less costs to sell, were for £73.1m Recruitment GB, £19.6m for Recruitment Ireland 
and £49.9m for PeoplePlus, all being value-in-use.

The results of the impairment review at 31 December 2020 showed headroom in all CGUs and accordingly no further impairment was 
noted. The same calculations indicated that an impairment was required to the Company’s carrying value of its investment in 
PeoplePlus of £6.9m (see note 13). 

In making the assessment of the recoverability of assets within each CGU a number of judgements and assumptions were required. 

The critical judgement relates to the determination of the CGUs. Whilst there are individual legal entities within the three reportable 
segments, they are operated and reviewed as single units by the Board of Directors. Each reportable segment has its own 
management team and head office. The Group’s strategy, historically and going forward, has been to integrate new acquisitions into 
the main trading entities within each reportable operating segment.

The key estimates in determining the value of each CGU are:
1.  The discount rate. In the calculations we have utilised a pre-tax discount rate of 13.0% for Recruitment GB, 12.0% for Recruitment 

Ireland and 10.8% for PeoplePlus and a terminal growth value of 0%. These rates are based on the latest weighted average costs of 
capital for each operating segment. These rates have increased this year primarily due to a movement in the risk-free rate. The 
calculations highlighted headroom of £31.6m for Recruitment GB, headroom of £4.6m for Recruitment Ireland and headroom of 
£13.0m for PeoplePlus. A 1% increase in the discount rates reduces the headroom to £25.9m for Recruitment GB, reduces headroom 
to £2.9m for Recruitment Ireland and reduces headroom to £8.7m for PeoplePlus. 

2.  The achievability of the forecasted future cash flows. There is an inherent uncertainty regarding the achievability of forecasts, as 
there are macro-economic factors outside of the Group’s control. A sustained underperformance of 10% reduces the headroom to 
£24.3m for Recruitment GB, reduces headroom to £2.6m for Recruitment Ireland and reduces headroom to £8.0m for PeoplePlus.  
A sustained underperformance of 23% would be required before any impairment was necessary to the goodwill. 

As at 31 December 2020 the Company had no goodwill (2019: £nil).

Strategic ReportFinancial Statements94

Staffline Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2020

Notes to the Financial Statements continued

For the year ended 
31 December 2020

12 Other intangible assets
The Group’s other intangible assets include the customer contracts, brands and lists obtained through the acquisition of businesses 
plus acquired software. There are no intangible assets with restricted title. 

Customer 
contracts and 
brands
£m

Licences
£m

Customer lists
£m

Gross carrying amount

At 1 January 2019
Additions

At 31 December 2019
Additions 
Disposals

At 31 December 2020

Amortisation

At 1 January 2019
Charged in the year 

At 31 December 2019
Charged in the year
Disposals

At 31 December 2020

Net book amount at 31 December 2020

Net book amount at 31 December 2019

Software
£m

12.9
3.2

16.1
1.5
(5.4)

12.2

8.7
1.2

9.9
1.8
(5.2)

6.5

5.7

6.2

The Company has no other intangible assets (2019: £nil).

As at 31 December 2020, there are six individually material other intangible assets:

2020 £m

Customer 
contracts and 
brands

Software

Customer contracts in Endeavour Group
Customer contracts/brands in Passionate 

About People Group

Customer contracts in Grafton Recruitment
Payroll and Credit Control software 
developed for Recruitment division

Customer contracts in One Call Recruitment
Customer contracts in Brightwork
Others

Net book amount at 31 December 2020

–

–
–

4.9
–
–
0.8

5.7

5.8

6.2
3.4

–
1.5
0.9
0.8

2.0
–

2.0
–
–

2.0

2.0
–

2.0
–
–

2.0

–

–

Total

5.8

6.2
3.4

4.9
1.5
0.9
1.6

85.1
–

85.1
–
–

85.1

46.4
10.9

57.3
9.2
–

66.5

18.6

27.8

5.5
–

5.5
–
–

5.5

5.5
–

5.5
–
–

5.5

–

–

2019 £m

Customer 
contracts and 
brands

Software

–

–
–

5.6
–
–
0.6

6.2

8.2

8.5
4.7

–
2
1.6
2.8

Total
£m

105.5
3.2

108.7
1.5
(5.4)

104.8

62.6
12.1

74.7
11.0
(5.2)

80.5

24.3

34.0

Total

8.2

8.5
4.7

5.6
2
1.6
3.4

18.6

24.3

27.8

34.0

Software, customer contracts and brands each have a useful economic life (“UEL”) of 5.0 years. At 31 December 2020, the remaining 
UELs of the principal customer contracts are as follows:

Endeavour Group
Passionate About People Group
Grafton Recruitment
One Call Recruitment
Brightwork

UEL 
(years)

1.2
1.8
1.6
1.4
0.3

13 Fixed asset investments – Company

Cost at 1 January 2019

Impairment adjustment

Net book amount at 31 December 2019

Impairment adjustment

Net book amount at 31 December 2020

Governance

95

Investment
 in Group 
undertakings
 £m

125.2

(50.2)

75.0

(7.2)

67.8

An impairment review was carried out with respect to the Company’s carrying value of its investments in subsidiaries and considering 
recoverable amount as the higher of value-in-use and fair value less costs to sell for each investment.

The impairment review indicated that an impairment was required to the Company’s carrying value of its investments of £7.2m  
(2019: £50.2m).

The recoverable amount of the investments were based on value-in-use calculations with the same assumptions as described in note 11. 
The recoverable amounts of the remaining investments were based on fair value less costs to sell with reference to level 3 inputs, being 
inputs for the asset or liability that are not based on observable market data, with consideration of the balance sheet position of the 
subsidiaries. This led to an impairment of £6.9m in People Plus Limited. 

A further impairment of £0.3m was recognised based on the results of fair value less costs to sell calculations. 

As at 31 December 2020, the Company holds interests in the following companies: 

Subsidiaries

Registered office: 19-20 The Triangle, NG2 Business Park, 

 Nottingham, NG2 1AE

Staffline Recruitment Limited 
PeoplePlus Group Limited
A4e Limited 
A4e Enterprise Limited*
Action For Employment Trustees Limited* 
Agency Plus Limited* 
A La Carte Recruitment Limited*
Broomco (4198) Limited* 
Datum RPO Limited*
Driving Plus Limited*
Endeavour Group Limited*
Eos Works Limited*¹ 
Eos Services Limited* 
Eos Works Group Limited¹ 
Experience Management Limited (was JFDI Group Limited) 
Staffline Recruitment (NI) Limited (was Grafton Recruitment Limited)*
International Employment Group Limited (was Onsite Partnership 

Limited) 

Learning Plus System Limited 
Network Projects Limited* 
Omega Resource Group Limited*
One Call Recruitment Limited*
Passionate About People Limited*
PeoplePlus Learning Limited*
Skillspoint Limited*
Softmist Limited* 
IEG Limited (was Staffline Limited) 
Staffline Appointments Limited*¹ 
Staffline Holdings Limited
Staff-Line Trustees Limited* 
Techsearch Technology Limited* 
Vital Recruitment Limited*

Proportion of ordinary 
share capital held

Country of incorporation

Nature of business 

100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%

100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%

England and Wales
England and Wales
England and Wales
England and Wales
England and Wales 
England and Wales 
England and Wales
England and Wales 
England and Wales
England and Wales 
England and Wales
England and Wales
England and Wales
England and Wales
England and Wales
Northern Ireland

England and Wales 
England and Wales
England and Wales 
England and Wales
England and Wales
England and Wales
England and Wales
England and Wales
England and Wales
England and Wales 
England and Wales
England and Wales
England and Wales
England and Wales
England and Wales

Recruitment
Skills and training
Welfare to Work
Dormant
Dormant
Dormant
Dormant
Dormant
Recruitment
Dormant
Dormant
Non-trading
Dormant
Non-trading
Dormant
Recruitment

Dormant
Dormant
Dormant
Dormant
Dormant
Dormant 
Dormant
Dormant
Dormant
Dormant
Non-trading
Dormant
Dormant
Dormant
Dormant

* 
¹ 

These companies are owned indirectly through other Group companies. 
These UK subsidiaries will take advantage of the audit exemption set out within Section 479A of the Companies Act 2006 for the year ended 31 December 2020.  
The Directors of Staffline Group plc have confirmed that the Company will provide a financial guarantee under Section 479C in relation to the subsidiaries listed above. 
No liability is expected to arise from the giving of this obligation.

Strategic ReportFinancial Statements96

Staffline Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2020

Notes to the Financial Statements continued

For the year ended 
31 December 2020

13 Fixed asset investments – Company continued

Subsidiaries

Registered office: ul. Fryderyka Chopina 2, 44-100 Gliwice, 

Poland

Staffline Polska Sp. zoo* 
Staffline Recruitment Gliwice Sp. zoo* 
Agencja Pracy Tymczasowej Staffline sp. zoo*
Vital Logistics sp. zoo*

Registered office: Cooldriona Court, Main Street, Swords,  

Co. Dublin, K67 WN92

Proportion of ordinary 
share capital held

Country of incorporation

Nature of business 

100%
100%
100%
100%

Poland
Poland
Poland
Poland

Dormant
Dormant
Recruitment
Recruitment

Staffline Limited (was Staffline Recruitment Limited)
Staffline Recruitment (ROI) Limited (was Grafton Recruitment Limited)*

100%
100%

Republic of Ireland
Republic of Ireland

Recruitment
Recruitment

Registered office: 38a Mallusk Road, Newtownabbey,  

Northern Ireland, BT36 4PP

PeoplePlus (Works) NI Limited* 

Registered office: 193/199 Bath Street, Glasgow,  

Scotland, G2 4HU

Brightwork Limited*
Brightwork Specialist Recruitment Limited*

Registered office: Elgar House, Shrub Hill Road, Worcester, 

England, WR4 9EE

Warwickshire and West Mercia Community Rehabilitation Company 

Limited* 

Mercia Community Action CIC* 

Registered office: Southern Exchange House, 34 Earl Grey Street, 

Edinburgh, EH3 9BN

PeoplePlus Scotland Limited*

Registered office: Rua S. Joao de Brito 605 E-4, Porto, Ramalde, 

4100 455 Porto

100%

Northern Ireland

Training

100%
64%

Scotland
Scotland

Recruitment
Dormant

100%
100%

England and Wales
England and Wales

Probationary 
services
Dormant

100%

Scotland

Dormant

Omega Recruitment, Unipessoal LDA*

100%

Portugal

Recruitment

* 
¹ 

These companies are owned indirectly through other Group companies.
These UK subsidiaries will take advantage of the audit exemption set out within Section 479A of the Companies Act 2006 for the year ended 31 December 2020. The 
Directors of Staffline Group plc have confirmed that the Company will provide a financial guarantee under Section 479C in relation to the subsidiaries listed above. No 
liability is expected to arise from the giving of this obligation.

Governance

97

Land and 
buildings
£m

Computer 
equipment
£m

Fixtures and 
fittings
£m

Motor 
vehicles
£m

15.2
1.6
(1.2)

15.6

0.3
(1.2)

14.7

3.1
2.9
0.5
(0.5)

6.0

2.8
(0.9)

7.9

6.8

9.6

11.0
2.2
(0.2)

13.0

1.2
(2.9)

11.3

6.1
2.2
–
(0.2)

8.1

2.7
(2.2)

8.6

2.7

4.9

2.5
0.1
(0.3)

2.3

0.1
(1.1)

1.3

1.9
0.5
–
(0.2)

2.2

0.1
(1.1)

1.2

0.1

0.1

0.2
–
–

0.2

–
–

0.2

0.2
–
–
–

0.2

–
–

0.2

–

–

Total
£m

28.9
3.9
(1.7)

31.1

1.6
(5.2)

27.5

11.3
5.6
0.5
(0.9)

16.5

5.6
(4.2)

17.9

9.6

14.6

14 Property, plant and equipment

Gross carrying amount

At 1 January 2019
Additions
Disposals

At 31 December 2019

Additions
Disposals

At 31 December 2020

Depreciation
At 1 January 2019
Charged in the year – operating
Charged in the year – impairment*
Disposals

At 31 December 2019

Charged in the year – operating
Disposals

At 31 December 2020

Net book value

At 31 December 2020

At 31 December 2019

* 

The impairment of right-of-use assets in 2019 relates to onerous leases.

In the year ended 31 December 2019, the Group applied IFRS 16 Leases. The date of initial application of IFRS 16 for the Group was 
1 January 2019. The Group applied IFRS 16 using the modified retrospective approach, without restatement of the comparative 
information. In respect of these leases, which were previously treated as operating leases, the Group elected to measure the carrying 
value as if the Standard had been applied since the commencement date but discounted using the Group’s incremental borrowing rate 
at the date of initial application. Right-of-use assets, principally property related assets, comprise the initial measurement of the 
corresponding lease liability, lease payments made at or before the commencement day and any initial direct costs. They are 
subsequently measured at cost less accumulated depreciation and impairment losses. 

Additional information on the right-of-use assets by class of assets is as follows:

At 31 December 2020

Office buildings
IT equipment

At 31 December 2019

Office buildings
IT equipment

Carrying  
amount

Depreciation 
expense

Impairment 

5.0
0.2

5.2

(2.6)
(0.1)

(2.7)

-
-

-

Carrying  
amount

Depreciation 
expense

Impairment 

7.6
0.3

7.9

(2.5)
(0.1)

(2.6)

(0.5)
-

(0.5)

As at 31 December 2020 the Company had no property, plant and equipment assets (2019: £nil).

Strategic ReportFinancial Statements98

Staffline Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2020

Notes to the Financial Statements continued

For the year ended 
31 December 2020

15 Leases
Lease liabilities are presented in the statement of financial position as follows:

Current 
Non-current

2020
 £m

1.6
3.9

5.5

2019 
£m

2.6
5.8

8.4

The Group has leases for its operational and administrative offices, and some IT equipment. With the exception of short-term leases 
and leases of low-value underlying assets, each lease is reflected on the balance sheet as a right-of-use asset and a lease liability. The 
Group classifies its right-of-use assets in a consistent manner to its property, plant and equipment (see note 14).

Unless there is a contractual right for the Group to sublet the asset to another party, the right-of-use asset can typically only be used 
by the Group. Leases are either non-cancellable or may only be cancelled by incurring a substantive termination fee. Some leases 
contain an option to extend the lease for a further term. The Group is prohibited from selling or pledging the underlying leased assets 
as security. For leases over office buildings the Group must keep those properties in a good state of repair and return the properties in 
their original condition at the end of the lease. Further, the Group must insure items of property, plant and equipment and incur 
maintenance costs on such items in accordance with the lease contracts. 

The table below describes the nature of the Group’s leasing activities by type of right-of-use asset recognised on the balance sheet:

Right-of-use asset

Office building
IT equipment

No of  
right-of-use 
assets leased

Range of 
remaining term 
(years)

Average  
remaining lease 
term 

No of leases with 
extension options

49
5

0.1 – 14.2
0.1 – 3.8

3.3
2.0

18
–

The lease liabilities are secured by the related underlying assets. Future minimum lease payments at 31 December 2020 were  
as follows:

31 December 2020
Lease payments
Finance charges

Net present value

31 December 2019
Lease payments
Finance charges

Net present value

Within one year

1-2 years

2-3 years 

3-4 years

After 5 years

Total

Minimum lease payments due

1.7
(0.1)

1.6

2.8
(0.2)

2.6

1.1
(0.1)

1.0

1.9
(0.1)

1.8

0.8
(0.1)

0.7

1.2
(0.1)

1.1

0.6
–

0.6

0.7
–

0.7

1.7
(0.1)

1.6

2.3
(0.1)

2.2

5.9
(0.4)

5.5

8.9
(0.5)

8.4

Lease payments not recognised as a liability
The Group has elected not to recognise a lease liability for short term leases (leases with an expected term of 12 months or less) or for 
leases of low value assets. Payments made under such leases are expensed on a straight-line basis. In addition, certain variable lease 
payments are not permitted to be recognised as lease liabilities and are expensed as incurred.

The expense relating to payments not included in the measurement of the lease liability is as follows:

Short-term leases
Leases of low value assets

The Group had not committed to any leases that had not yet commenced.

Total cash outflow for leases for the year ended 31 December 2020 was £4.8m (2019: £4.3m).

2020
 £m

0.6
0.8

1.4

2019
 £m

0.6
0.5

1.1

Governance

99

16 Retirement benefit net liability
One of the Group’s subsidiaries, PeoplePlus Group Limited, operates a defined benefit pension scheme for some staff. The scheme is 
closed to new entrants. The last actuarial valuation of the scheme was at 30 May 2019. Given that the fair value of plan assets is only 
£9.8m (2019: £9.8m), only significant disclosures are reported below. 

The amounts recognised in the balance sheet are determined as follows:

Fair value of plan assets
Present value of funded obligations

Net liability in the balance sheet at 31 December 

Actuarial losses during the year, pre tax
Deferred tax on loss

Actuarial losses during the year, post deferred tax impact

2020
 £m

9.8
(10.9)

(1.1)

(1.0)
0.2

(0.8)

2019 
£m

9.8
(9.9)

(0.1)

(0.9)
0.2

(0.7)

The directors have agreed with the pension trustees to make additional contributions to the pension scheme with a view to substantially 
reducing the liability by 31 July 2029. 

The movement in the fair value of the plan assets over the year is as follows:

Balance at 1 January 
Interest on assets
Contributions – employer and member
Benefits paid
Actuarial gain/(loss) on asset return

Fair value of plan assets in the balance sheet at 31 December

At 31 December 2020, the scheme’s assets, valued at market value, were distributed as follows:

Bonds (68% of assets as at 31 December 2020)
Equities (31% of assets as at 31 December 2020)
Cash (1% of assets as at 31 December 2020)

Fair value of plan assets in the balance sheet at 31 December 2020

2020 
£m

9.8
0.2
0.1
(0.2)
(0.1)

9.8

2020
£m

6.7
3.0
0.1

9.8

2019 
£m

9.2
0.2
0.2
(0.2)
0.4

9.8

2019
£m

6.7
3.0
0.1

9.8

All investments are managed by the investment advisors and Standard Life within the Standard Life “wrap investment” portfolio where 
the investments are held within Dimensional Funds at the year-end. All funds are passively managed. The funds held by the scheme are 
all pooled investment vehicles and therefore the investment manager is responsible for appointing an independent custodian. The 
objective of each of these funds is to match the investment return in a particular investment market subject to an acceptable degree of 
tracking-error that is monitored by the Trustees.

The movement in the present value of defined benefit funding obligations over the year is as follows:

Balance at 1 January 2020
Interest cost on liabilities
Service cost – current accrual cost
Benefits paid – net of member contributions
Actuarial loss/(gain) on change in assumptions

Present value of funded obligations in the balance sheet at 31 December 2020

Membership numbers (active 2020: 12, 2019: 11)

The liabilities have been calculated using the following principal actuarial assumptions:

Inflation rate (RPI)
Inflation rate (CPI)
Salary increase
Discount rate
Future pension increases for leavers (RPI)

2020 
 £m

9.9
0.2
0.1
(0.2)
0.9

10.9

263

2020

2.90%
2.30%
2.90%
1.35%
2.90%

2019 
 £m

8.4
0.3
0.1
(0.2)
1.3

9.9

259

2019

2.95%
2.35%
2.95%
2.05%
2.95%

Strategic ReportFinancial Statements100

Staffline Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2020

Notes to the Financial Statements continued

For the year ended 
31 December 2020

16 Retirement benefit net liability continued
Assumptions regarding future mortality experience are set based on actuarial advice in accordance with published statistics and 
experience. Mortality assumptions are based on the following mortality tables: 
•  Pre-retirement mortality: 100% of SAPS “S2” Normal tables
•  Post-retirement mortality: 100% of SAPS “S2” Normal tables

Future improvements in longevity are as based on the following:
•  Pre-retirement mortality: CMI 2019 projections with a long-term trend of 0.0% per annum
•  Post-retirement mortality: CMI 2019 projections with a long-term trend of 1.25% per annum

The mortality assumptions used were as follows:

Average expected future life at age 60 for a:
– male currently aged 60
– female currently aged 60
– male currently aged 40
– female currently aged 40

31 Dec 2020 
years

31 Dec 2019 
years

27.1
29.3
28.6
30.8

27.0
29.1
28.5
30.6

Members are assumed to retire at the earliest age where there would be no reduction. It is also assumed that members commute 75% 
of the maximum HMRC allowance based on current commutation factors. There are £nil (2019: £nil) contributions unpaid at the 
year-end.

A charge of £0.1m (2019: £0.1m) is included within the statement of comprehensive income within administrative expenses for the service 
cost. A net actuarial loss, after deferred taxation, of £0.8m (2019: loss of £0.7m) is included within the consolidated statement of 
changes in equity. 

At 31 December 2020 the Company had no pension balances (2019: £nil). 

17 Trade and other receivables

Trade and other receivables
Amounts due from Group undertakings
Accrued income

2020 
Group 
£m

89.1
–
15.7

104.8

2020 
Company 
£m

–
7.7
–

7.7

2019 
Group 
Restated
£m

118.1
–
14.3

132.4

2019 
Company 
Restated
£m

–
51.2
–

51.2

Trade and other receivables are usually due within 30 days and do not bear any effective interest rate. All trade receivables are subject 
to credit risk exposure and the Group maintains a comprehensive credit insurance policy, which mitigates a significant proportion of 
any potential credit risk. The Group does not identify specific concentrations of credit risk with regard to trade and other receivables 
as the amounts recognised represent a large number of receivables from various customers.

Amounts due from Group undertakings are non-interest bearing, unsecured and repayable on demand. An assessment of the 
recoverability of amounts due from Group undertakings for the year ended 31 December 2019 resulted in an impairment adjustment of 
£17.7m. During the year ended 31 December 2020 the amount due was substantially settled and the impairment adjustment was 
reversed. The amounts held at 31 December 2020 by the Company pose no material liquidity or credit risk as they are owed by other 
group undertakings and are expected to be settled by Group transactions. The subsidiary concerned has sufficient cash to settle the 
receivable as at 31 December 2020.

Included in the trade and other receivables balance above is a bad debt provision of £0.8 (2019: £1.4m). The bad debt provision is split 
as follows:

2020
£m

2019
£m

Expected Credit Loss (“ECL”)
Specific bad debt provision

Bad debt provision

0.1
0.7

0.8

0.1
1.3

1.4

The Group applies the IFRS 9 simplified approach to measuring expected credit losses which uses a lifetime expected loss allowance for 
all trade receivables. See note 28 for details.

Governance

101

18 Cash

Cash and cash equivalents
Restricted cash

2020 
Group 
£m

24.5
0.9

2020 
Company
 £m

–
–

2019 
Group 
£m

25.0
12.7

2019 
Company 
£m

–
–

Cash and cash equivalents consist of cash on hand and balances with banks only. All cash on hand and balances with banks are held 
by subsidiary undertakings; however, the balances are available for use by the Group.

Cash and cash equivalents amounting to £24.5m (2019: £25.0m), as disclosed in the consolidated statement of cash flows comprises 
cash balances of £24.5m (2019: £25.0m), less overdrafts of £nil (2019: £6.4m).

Restricted cash relates to amounts held in escrow to satisfy the NMW remediation and financial penalties relating to historic HMRC 
National Minimum Wage breaches. This balance is excluded from net debt.

Long-term credit ratings for the four banks are currently as follows:

Lloyds Banking Group plc
Bank of Ireland Group plc
HSBC Holdings plc
Royal Bank of Scotland plc

The Group’s headroom versus available committed bank facilities is as follows:

Cash at bank (as above)
Undrawn Receivable Finance Facility
Overdraft facility
Committed revolving credit facility unutilised 

Banking facility headroom 

As at 31 December 2020 the Company had no cash balances (2019: £nil).

19 Trade and other payables

Trade and other payables
Accruals
Deferred income
Amounts due to Group undertakings
Other taxation and social security 

Fitch

A+
BBB
A+
A+

2020 
Group 
£m

18.7
47.1
6.9
-
80.6

153.3

2020 
Company
 £m

–
0.1
–
3.7
–

3.8

Standard 
& Poor’s

BBB+
BBB–
A–
A

2020 
£m

24.5
54.9
–
–

79.4

2019 
Group 
£m

18.2
58.1
2.6
–
47.5

126.4

Moody’s

A3
Baa2
A2
A1*/A2

2019 
£m

25.0
–
18.6
0.1

43.7

2019 
Company 
£m

–
1.0
–
7.8
–

8.8

The fair value of trade and other payables has not been separately disclosed as, due to their short duration, the Directors consider the 
carrying amounts recognised in the statement of financial position to be a reasonable approximation of their fair value. 

The Group took advantage of the UK Government scheme for the deferral of VAT payments between March and June 2020. The total 
deferral under the scheme amounted to £42.4m after offset of a Corporation Tax refund due from 2018. Repayment of the balance is 
due to be paid over instalments commencing from June 2021. As at 31 December 2020, £37.1m is payable within one year and a final 
payment of £5.8m is due in January 2022. 

For 2020, revenue includes £2.6m (2019: £0.5m) included in the contract liability balance at the beginning of the period.

Amounts due to Group undertakings are non-interest bearing, unsecured and repayable on demand.

Strategic ReportFinancial Statements102

Staffline Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2020

Notes to the Financial Statements continued

For the year ended 
31 December 2020

20 Borrowings
Borrowings are repayable as follows:

In one year or less or on demand*
In more than one year but not more than two years*
In more than two years but not more than five years*
In more than five years
Unamortised transaction costs

Total borrowings

*  Ageing of balances above is shown excluding unamortised transaction costs.

Split:
Current liabilities:
Receivables Finance Facility
Unamortised transaction costs
Bank overdraft
Lease liabilities

Non-current liabilities:
Revolving credit facility
Lease liabilities
Unamortised transaction costs

Total borrowings

Total borrowings excluding unamortised transaction costs
Less: Cash (note 18)

Net debt

2020 
Group 
£m

14.9
21.0
1.3
1.6
(0.3)

38.5

2020 
Company
 £m

–
20.0
–
–
–

20.0

2019 
Group 
£m

9.0
1.8
79.9
2.2
 –

92.9

2019 
Company 
£m

–
–
78.1
–
–

78.1

2020 
Group 
£m

2020 
Company
 £m

2019 
Group 
£m

2019 
Company 
£m

13.3
(0.3)
–
1.6

14.6

20.0
3.9
–

23.9

38.5

38.8
(24.5)

14.3

–
–
–
–

–

20.0
–
–

20.0

20.0

20.0
– 

20.0

–
–
6.4
2.6

9.0

78.1
5.8
–

83.9

92.9

92.9
(25.0)

67.9

–
–
–
–

–

80.0
–
(0.8)

79.2

79.2

80.0
(16.2)

63.8

On 26 June 2019 the Group and its lenders agreed to certain amendments to the RCF. The lenders agreed to a waiver of all quarterly 
financial covenant tests for the period ended 30 June 2019. The key amendments to the RCF were:
i)  Relaxation of the September and December 2019 leverage covenants followed by a gradual reduction of the leverage covenant to 

net debt of less than 2x EBITDA by 31 December 2020;

ii)  Restrictions on new material share, business and asset acquisitions until January 2021; 
iii) No dividends to be declared by the Company for the 2019 and 2020 financial years; 
iv) Repayment and cancellation of revolving facility commitments by £10.0m on both 15 November 2019 and 15 November 2020;
v)  Net proceeds of the July 2019 share issue in excess of £30.0m to be used to reduce, and cancel, the Credit Facilities available.

In consideration of these amendments, an amendment fee has been paid to the lenders and certain other changes were made to the 
Credit Facility (including the removal of the accordion option and the ability to request the lenders to extend the Credit Facility for an 
additional 12 months beyond July 2022). The expiry date for the Credit Facility remains in June 2022. The Company has agreed to pay 
the lenders an exit fee based on a percentage of the outstanding commitments when the Credit Facility expires or, if sooner, refinanced.

Interest accrues on the borrowings at between 1.4% and 2.0% plus LIBOR, depending upon the level of adjusted leverage as defined in 
the banking covenants. 

On 24 July 2019, following the share issue, £6.8m was used to reduce, and cancel, part of the Credit Facilities. On 15 November 2019, in 
line with the amendments above, £10.0m was used to further reduce, and cancel, part of the Credit Facilities.

In December 2019, the Company agreed an amendment to the Credit Facilities which included:

i)  The deferral of testing covenants at December 2019; and
ii)  The agreement to waive any potential covenant breaches and defaults arising as a result of the prior year adjustments.

Subsequently, between January and May 2020, the Company agreed amendments to the Credit Facilities which included further 
deferrals of covenant testing and the reporting of such testing.

 
Governance

103

Following discussions with the lenders of the RCF, the Company and the lenders agreed on 26 June 2020 to a revised financing 
structure. The key elements of the new facilities are a reduced RCF of £30.0m (previously £78.2m) and a Receivables Finance Facility 
(“RFF”) (invoice discounting) of a maximum of £73.2m, and the removal of the overdraft facility of £25.0m. The refinancing has been 
accounted for as a substantial modification.

The key terms of the new facilities are below, with other terms of the RCF remaining in place: 
i)  Expiry date July 2022;
ii)  Repayment and cancellation of RCF commitments by £10.0m on 31 July 2020; 
iii)  The RFF can initially be drawn down against the receivables of the Recruitment GB division and Northern Ireland, part of the 

Recruitment Ireland division;

iv)  Interest on the RFF accruing at 3.50% plus Bank of England base rate;
v)  Minimum EBITDA and minimum liquidity covenants until a return to minimum leverage, interest and asset cover covenants in 

January 2022; and

vi)  No dividends to be declared by the Company until July 2022.

On 31 July 2020, the RCF was reduced by £10.0m from £30.0m to £20.0m. On 8 October 2020, following the removal of two 
customers from the RFF, the maximum availability on the RFF was reduced by £5.0m from £73.2m to £68.2m.

As at 31 December 2020 the Group also has available a separate £25.0m uncommitted, non-recourse, Receivables Financing Facility 
against certain customer receivables, and a number of separate, non-recourse, Customer Financing arrangements whereby specific 
customer invoices are settled in advance of their normal settlement date. The balance funded under this Receivables Financing Facility 
at 31 December 2020 was £24.3m (2019: £25.7m) and the value of invoices funded under the Customer Financing arrangements was 
£43.0m (2019: £35.1m). Costs incurred in relation to these arrangements are charged to profit and loss as finance charges when 
incurred.

On 10 June 2021, the entered into a new Receivables Financing Agreement (“RFA”) to replace the existing Group funding arrangements. 
The RFA contained certain requirements to be met before completion, the most significant of which was that the Company raise new 
equity capital of at least £40.0m. This condition was satisfied and the RFA became effective on 10 June 2021. 

The key terms of the new facility, which is provided jointly by RBS Invoice Finance Limited, ABN AMRO Asset Based Finance N.V., UK 
Branch and Leumi ABL Limited, are set out below:

I)  Maximum receivables financing facility of £90.0m over a four-and-a-half-year term, with a one-year extension option;
II)  An Accordion option of up to an additional £15.0m, subject to lender approval;
III) Security on all of the assets and undertakings of the Company and certain subsidiary undertakings;
IV) Interest accruing at 2.75% over SONIA, with a margin ratchet downward to 2.0%, dependent upon the Group’s leverage reducing to 

3.00x;

V)  A non-utilisation fee of 0.35% of the margin; and
VI) Maximum net debt (averaged over a rolling three months) to EBITDA leverage covenant commencing at 5.95x followed by a gradual 

reduction to 4.0x by October 2023.

Minimum interest cover covenant of 2.25x the last twelve months EBITDA to finance charges.

The new facility enabled the cancellation of the existing facilities, comprising the RCF of £20.0m and the RFF of £68.2m and also the 
non-recourse Receivables Purchase Facility of £25.0m.

EBITDA is defined as earnings before interest, taxation, depreciation and amortisation.

Strategic ReportFinancial Statements104

Staffline Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2020

Notes to the Financial Statements continued

For the year ended 
31 December 2020

21 Other liabilities

Due within one year (current)
Deferred consideration
Retirement benefit net liability

Due after more than one year (non-current)
Other taxation and social security
Retirement benefit net liability
Revolving credit facility termination fee

2020 
Group 
£m

2020 
Company
 £m

2019 
Group 
£m

2019 
Company 
£m

–
–

–

5.8
1.1
0.4

7.3

–
–

–

–
–
0.4

0.4

0.6
0.1

0.7

–
–
1.4

1.4

–
–

–

–
–
1.4

1.4

A final instalment of £5.8m relating to the UK Government VAT deferral scheme is due for payment in January 2022.

The Group has agreed with the trustees of the Group’s defined benefit pension scheme to make additional contributions to the scheme 
in order to eliminate the current deficit by July 2029.

During the year, deferred consideration of £0.3m was paid to the former owners of one of the businesses that was acquired in 2018. 
The unpaid balance was transferred to the income statement.

22 Provisions

At 1 January 2020

Amounts charged to the income statement
Amounts transferred from accruals
Amounts utilised
Unused amounts reversed to the income statement

At 31 December 2020

Due within one year (current)
Due after more than one year (non-current)

At 31 December 2020

IT 
costs 
£m

0.7

–
–
(0.7)
–

–

–
–

–

Staff 
costs 
£m

0.8

0.3
–
(0.3)
–

0.8

0.8
–

0.8

Property 
costs 
£m

Contract 
termination
£m

3.7

0.7
0.2
(1.3)
(1.0)

2.3

1.1
1.2

2.3

0.4

–
–
(0.4)
–

–

–
–

–

NMW 
remediation 
and 
financial 
penalties
 £m

12.8

–
–

(10.9)

–

1.9

1.9
–

1.9

2020 
Group 
Total 
£m

18.4

1.0
0.2
(13.6)
(1.0)

5.0

3.8
1.2

5.0

2019 
Group
 Total
£m

25.1

2.0

(8.0)
(0.7)

18.4

16.0
2.4

18.4

The Group has previously made provisions for IT costs, staff costs and property costs relating to the restructuring of the PeoplePlus 
division. The IT costs related to onerous IT contracts; the staff costs related to redundancies; and the property costs related to lease 
dilapidations.

Provision is made for “wear and tear” dilapidations costs at the Group’s leased properties. Where possible, dilapidations provisions are 
determined based on an independent valuation of the estimated total cost payable on expiry of the respective leases. The amounts 
recognised are in respect of “wear and tear” to date. The timing and value of the costs are uncertain due to potential changes to exit 
dates and the final liability which may be subject to negotiation with the landlord. 

The NMW remediation and financial penalties provision relates to historic HMRC National Minimum Wage breaches, of which a large 
proportion was settled in the year.

The Company has no provisions (2019: £nil).

Governance

105

23 Deferred taxation

Deferred taxation assets
Deferred taxation (liabilities)

Net liability

2020 
Group 
£m

4.4
(3.5)

(0.9)

2020 
Company
 £m

–
–

–

2019 
Group
£m

1.4
(4.7)

(3.3)

2019 
Company 
£m

–
–

–

The table below shows the Group movement in net deferred taxation during the year. 

2020
Deferred tax assets/(liabilities)

Property, plant, equipment and software temporary timing differences
Acquired intangible assets
Provisions
Recoverable tax losses
Retirement benefit asset

Net liability

Recognised as:
Deferred tax asset
Deferred tax liability

Net liability

Recognised in 
comprehensive 
income – 
current year
£m

Recognised in 
comprehensive 
income – 
prior year
£m

1 January 
2020
£m

31 December 
2020
£m

0.9
(4.7)
0.1
0.4
–

(3.3)

1.4
(4.7)

(3.3)

(0.1)
–
–
2.7
–

2.6

3.1
(0.5)

2.6

(0.4)
1.7
0.6
(0.5)
0.2

1.6

(0.1)
1.7

1.6

0.4
(3.0)
0.7
2.6
0.2

0.9

4.4
(3.5)

0.9

The table below shows the Group movement in net deferred taxation during the prior year. 

2019
Deferred tax assets/(liabilities)

Property, plant, equipment and software temporary timing differences
Acquired intangible assets
Provisions
Recoverable tax losses
Retirement benefit asset

Net liability

Recognised as:
Deferred tax asset
Deferred tax liability

Net liability

Recognised in 
comprehensive 
income – 
current year
£m

Recognised in 
comprehensive 
income – 
prior year
£m

1 January 
2019
£m

31 December 
2019
£m

0.9
(6.7)
0.1
–
(0.1)

(5.8)

0.9
(6.7)

(5.8)

–
2.0
–
(0.4)
0.1

1.7

(0.3)
2.0

1.7

–
–
–
0.8
–

0.8

0.8
–

0.8

0.9
(4.7)
0.1
0.4
–

(3.3)

1.4
(4.7)

(3.3)

The Group has incurred taxable losses amounting in aggregate to £3.2m (2019: £13.4m), which arose during the year and has brought 
forward tax losses of £12.2m. These losses are available for relief against future tax liabilities. The likelihood of recovery of these losses 
in the foreseeable future is considered to be probable and consequently a deferred tax asset has been recognised. 

Deferred tax assets and liabilities in the UK have been recognised at the rate of 19%, whilst those in the Republic of Ireland have been 
recognised at 12.5%. A reduction in the UK corporation tax rate from 19% to 17% (effective from 1 April 2020) was substantively enacted 
on 6 September 2016, and the UK deferred tax assets and liabilities as at 31 December 2019 were calculated based on that rate. In the 
11 March 2020 Budget, it was announced that the UK tax rate will remain at the current 19% and not reduce to 17% from 1 April 2020. 

The Company has no deferred tax balances at 31 December 2020 (2019: £nil). 

Deferred tax net liabilities expected to unwind next year total £1.8m, being the estimated amortisation of intangible assets arising on 
business combinations of £9.3m at a tax rate of 19%.

No deferred tax has been recognised on taxable temporary differences associated with investments as the parent is able to control  
the timing of the reversal of the temporary difference and it is probable that the temporary difference will not reverse in the  
foreseeable future.

Strategic ReportFinancial Statements106

Staffline Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2020

Notes to the Financial Statements continued

For the year ended 
31 December 2020

24 Share capital

Allotted and issued
68,930,486 ordinary 10p shares

Shares issued and fully paid at the beginning of the year
Shares issued during the year 

Shares issued and fully paid at the end of the year

2020 
£m

6.9

2019 
£m

6.9

2020
Number

2019
Number

68,930,486

27,944,389
– 40,986,097

68,930,486 68,930,486

All Ordinary Shares have the same rights and there are no restrictions on the distribution of dividends or repayment of capital with the 
exception of the 1,140,400 shares held at 31 December 2020 (2019: 1,140,400 shares) by the Employee Benefit Trust where the right to 
dividends has been waived.

On 15 July 2019, a total of 40,986,097 ordinary 10p shares were issued by the Company, resulting in a total of 68,930,486 ordinary 10p 
shares now being in issue.

The Group announced a proposed Placing, Subscription and Open Offer (the “Fundraise”) on 21 May 2021 following conditional 
agreement of the debt refinancing the previous day. The Fundraise comprised the following elements:
•  A total of 87,249,500 new ordinary shares of 10 pence each placed at a price of 50 pence per share (the “Issue Price”) to certain 

existing shareholders and new institutional investors;

•  A total of 750,500 new ordinary shares of 10 pence each to certain Directors and employees of the Group at the issue price; and
•  An open offer to existing shareholders for 10 shares for every 78 ordinary shares held, for a total of 8,837,242 new ordinary shares of 

10 pence each at the issue price.

25 Related party transactions
Transactions between the Company and its subsidiaries, which are related parties, have been eliminated on consolidation and are not 
disclosed in this note.

There were no material transactions with Directors of the Company during the period, except for those relating to remuneration and 
share purchases as noted below.

Transactions with key management personnel
The Group key management personnel’s (defined as the Company’s Directors and those senior management who participate in the 
Group’s JSOP schemes) remuneration, which includes the Group Directors’ remuneration disclosed above, is detailed below:

Short-term employee benefits:

Salaries and fees (inc. car allowance)
Bonus – paid at year end (2019: unpaid at year-end)
Benefits in kind
Compensation for loss of office
Share-based employee remuneration charge

2020 
£’000

2019 
£’000

3,899
60
6
163
7

4,135

3,302
519
13
264
200

4,298

During the year ended 31 December 2019 the Group spent £298,335 with Inspired Thinking Group, a specialist marketing services and 
technology business where Tracy Lewis was Chair until March 2019. There was no outstanding balance at 31 December 2019 or 2020. 

The fees for the services of Daniel Quint of £413,000 which are included in transactions with directors and £709,000 which are 
included in transactions with key management personnel were all paid to the company, Q Finance Limited, of which Daniel is a 
director. The fees relating to Dawn Ward of £10,000 included in both the transactions with directors and the transactions with key 
management personnel were paid to Burton and South Derbyshire College, of which Dawn Ward is the Chief Executive and Principal.

26 Contingencies
A cross-guarantee exists between all companies in the Group for all amounts owing to Lloyds Banking Group, HSBC Bank and Bank of 
Ireland. The Group amounts owing to Lloyds Banking Group, HSBC Bank and Bank of Ireland at the 2020 financial year-end are 
£33.3m (2019: £60.1m).

Governance

107

27 Capital commitments
The Group and Company had no material capital commitments at either 31 December 2020 or 31 December 2019.

28 Risk management objectives and policies
The Group is exposed to a variety of financial risks through its use of financial instruments which result from both its operating and 
investing activities. The Group’s risk management is co-ordinated at its headquarters, in close co-operation with the Board of 
Directors. 

The Group does not actively engage in the trading of financial assets for speculative purposes. The most significant financial risks to 
which the Group is exposed are described below.

Credit risk
Generally, the Group’s maximum exposure to credit risk is limited to the carrying amount of the financial assets (being current assets 
excluding corporation tax recoverable) recognised at the balance sheet date, as summarised below:

Trade and other receivables (note 17)
– held to sell at fair value through the statement of comprehensive income
– held to collect
Cash and cash equivalents (note 18)
Accrued income (note 17)

2020 
Loans and 
receivables and 
balance sheet 
totals 
£m

2019 
Loans and 
receivables and 
balance sheet 
totals 
£m

4.3
84.8
24.5
16.7

130.3

6.2
111.9
25.0
14.3

157.4

The Group applies the IFRS 9 simplified approach to measuring expected credit losses which uses a lifetime expected loss allowance for 
all trade receivables and contract assets.

To measure the expected credit losses, trade receivables and contract assets have been grouped based on shared credit risk 
characteristics and the days past due. The contract assets relate to unbilled work in progress and have substantially the same risk 
characteristics as the trade receivables for the same types of contracts. The Group has therefore concluded that the expected loss 
rates for trade receivables are a reasonable approximation of the loss rates for the contract assets.

The expected loss rates are based on the payment profiles of sales over a period of 36 months before 31 December 2020 or 
31 December 2019 respectively and the corresponding historical credit losses experienced within this period. The historical loss rates 
are adjusted to reflect current and forward-looking information on macroeconomic factors affecting the ability of the customers to 
settle the receivables.

31 December 2020

Expected loss rate
Gross carrying amount – trade receivables

Loss allowance

31 December 2019

Expected loss rate

Gross carrying amount – trade receivables

Loss allowance (including specific provisions)

Not more than  
30 days  
past due  
£’000s

0.04%
75,066

34

Not more than  
30 days  
past due  
£’000s

0.05%

108,055

54

>31 days  
past due  
£’000s

0.40%
8,238

33

>31 days  
past due  
£’000s

0.97%

2,557

25

>61 days  
past due  
£’000s

2.89%
1,030

30

>61 days 
 past due  
£’000s

1.60%

1,199

19

>91 days  
past due  
£’000s

13.27%
287

38

>91 days  
past due  
£’000s

2.30%

1,386

32

Total
 £’000s

84,621

135

Total
 £’000s

113,197

130

Strategic ReportFinancial Statements108

Staffline Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2020

Notes to the Financial Statements continued

For the year ended 
31 December 2020

28 Risk management objectives and policies continued
Credit risk continued
The closing loss allowance for trade receivables as at 31 December 2020 reconciles to the opening loss allowances as follows:

As at 31 December – as previously calculated under IAS 39
Increase in loss allowance recognised in profit or loss during the year

As at 31 December

2020
£m

0.1
–

0.1

2019
£m

0.1
–

0.1

Credit risk is only disclosed in circumstances where the maximum potential loss differs significantly from the financial asset’s  
carrying amount.

The Group’s trade and other receivables are actively monitored to avoid significant concentrations of credit risk. Details in respect of 
trade receivables at 31 December 2020 are provided in note 17. Substantially all of the trade within the PeoplePlus division is with local 
and central Government; therefore, the credit risk with these customers is considered low.

The Group has adopted a policy of carefully monitoring all customers, especially those who lack an appropriate credit history.

Liquidity risk
The Group seeks to manage financial risks to ensure sufficient liquidity is available to meet foreseeable needs and to invest cash assets 
safely and profitably. Short-term flexibility is achieved by the use of a Receivables Finance Facility of up to £68.2m (31 December 2019: 
£25.0m overdraft) and the use of a credit facility of £20.0m (31 December 2019: £78.2m). As at 31 December 2020, £20.0m (2019: 
£78.1m) of the credit facility and £13.2m of the Receivables Finance Facility was utilised.

The Group has covenants attached to its banking facilities. Following the June 2020 refinancing, the main covenants are minimum 
EBITDA and minimum liquidity covenants until a return to minimum leverage, interest and asset cover covenants in January 2022.

Interest rate risk
All financial liabilities of the Group are subject to floating interest rates. Competitive rates have been renegotiated with the Group’s 
bankers and the rate paid on the RCF has been set at 3.5% plus LIBOR. The following table illustrates the sensitivity of the net result for the 
year and equity to a reasonably possible change in interest rates of +/- 1 percentage point with effect from the beginning of the year.

(Decrease)/increase in net result and equity £m

2020

+1%
(0.6)

2020

–1%
0.6

2019

+1%
(0.9)

2019

–1%
0.9

Foreign currency sensitivity
Most of the Group’s transactions are carried out in sterling. Exposure to currency exchange rates arises from the Group’s overseas 
sales and purchases which are predominantly denominated in Polish zloty and the euro (Republic of Ireland and Portugal). The Group 
has not entered into any foreign currency risk mitigation strategies to date. This will be kept under review.

Financial liabilities
The Group’s liabilities (being total liabilities excluding deferred tax liabilities and unamortised transaction cost balances) are classified  
as follows:

Revolving credit facility (“RCF”)
Receivables Finance Facility (“RFF”)
Lease liabilities
Trade and other payables
Accruals
Deferred income
Other liabilities
Taxation and social security
Provisions

Total

2020 
Financial
 liabilities at fair 
value through 
profit or loss 
£m

2020 
Other 
financial 
liabilities at 
amortised cost 
£m

2020 
Liabilities not 
within the scope 
of IFRS 9 
£m

–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–

–

20.0
13.3
5.5
18.7
47.1
–
0.4
–
–

105.0

–
–
–
–
–
6.9
1.1
86.2
5.0

99.2

2020 
Balance
 sheet total 
£m

20.0
13.3
5.5
18.7
47.1
6.9
1.5
86.2
5.0

204.2

It is considered that the fair value of the Group’s financial assets and liabilities equal the book value.

Governance

109

2019 
Financial
 liabilities at fair 
value through 
profit or loss 
£m

2019 
Other 
financial liabilities 
at amortised cost 
£m

2019 
Liabilities not 
within the scope of 
IFRS 9 
£m

–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–

–

78.1
6.4
8.4
18.2
58.1
–
0.6
1.4
–
–

171.2

–
–
–
–
–
2.6
–
0.1
47.5
18.4

68.6

2019 
Balance
 sheet total 
£m

78.1
6.4
8.4
18.2
58.1
2.6
0.6
1.5
47.5
18.4

239.8

Revolving credit facility (“RCF”)
Overdraft
Lease liabilities
Trade and other payables
Accruals
Deferred income
Deferred consideration
Other liabilities
Taxation and social security
Provisions

Total

Fair value represents amounts at which an asset could be exchanged, or a liability settled on an arm’s length basis. 

Financial assets and financial liabilities measured at fair value are grouped into three levels of fair value hierarchy. This grouping is 
determined based on the lowest level of significant inputs used in the fair value measurement, as follows:
• 
• 
• 

level 1 – quoted prices in active markets for identical assets and liabilities;
level 2 – inputs other than quoted prices included in level 1 that are observable for the asset or liability, either directly or indirectly; and
level 3 – inputs for the asset or liability that are not based on observable market data (unobservable inputs).

The Group has no financial assets or liabilities in any of the above classifications.

Maturity of financial liabilities
The analysis of the maturity of financial liabilities within the scope of IFRS 7 at 31 December 2020 is as follows:

Revolving credit facility
Overdraft
Lease liabilities
Trade and other payables
Accruals
Deferred consideration

Total

2020 
Less than 
one year 
£m

2020 
One to 
five years 
£m

2020
 More than 
five years 
£m

–
–
1.6
18.7
47.1
–

67.4

20.0
–
2.3
–
–
–

22.3

–
–
1.6
–
–
–

1.6

2020 
Total 
£m

20.0
–
5.5
18.7
47.1
–

91.3

2019 
Less than 
one year
£m

2019 
One to 
five years 
£m

2019 
More than 
five years 
£m

–
6.4
2.6
18.2
60.5
0.6

88.3

78.1
–
3.8
–
–
–

81.9

–
–
2.0
–
–
–

2.0

2019 
Total
£m

78.1
6.4
8.4
18.2
60.5
0.6

172.2

The analysis of the maturity of contractual undiscounted financial liabilities (including estimated future interest) at 31 December 2020 
is as follows:

Revolving credit facility
Overdraft
Lease liabilities
Trade and other payables
Accruals
Deferred consideration

Total

2020 
Less than 
one year 
£m

2020 
One to 
five years 
£m

2020
 More than 
five years 
£m

–
–
1.7
18.7
47.1
–

67.5

21.1
–
2.5
–
–
–

23.6

–
–
1.7
–
–
–

1.7

2020 
Total 
£m

21.1
–
5.9
18.7
47.1
–

92.8

2019 
Less than 
one year
£m

2019 
One to 
five years 
£m

2019 
More than 
five years 
£m

–
6.4
2.8
18.2
60.5
0.6

88.5

86.3
–
3.8
–
–
–

90.1

–
–
2.1
–
–
–

2.1

2019 
Total
£m

86.3
6.4
8.7
18.2
60.5
0.6

180.7

Strategic ReportFinancial Statements110

Staffline Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2020

Notes to the Financial Statements continued

For the year ended 
31 December 2020

29 Cash flows from operating activities – consolidated
Reconciliation of loss before taxation to net cash inflow from operating activities

Loss before taxation from:
 Continuing operations
 Discontinued operations

Adjustments for:
 Finance costs
 Depreciation and amortisation – underlying
 Depreciation, loss on disposal and amortisation – non-underlying
 Loss on disposal of property, plant and equipment – discontinued operations
 Impairment of goodwill

Cash generated before changes in working capital and share options
Change in trade and other receivables
Change in trade, other payables and provisions
Impact of foreign exchange loss on operating activities

Cash generated from operations

Employee equity-settled share options

Net cash inflow from operating activities

Movement in net debt

Net debt at 1 January (excluding transaction fees)

Loan repayments
Drawdown from Receivables Finance Facility
Reduction in Receivables Finance Facility
Lease payments, additions, disposals and interest
Change in cash and cash equivalents

Net debt at 31 December (excluding transaction fees)

Represented by:
Cash and cash equivalents (note 18)
Current borrowings (note 20)
Lease liabilities (note 15)
Non-current borrowings (note 20)

Net debt including transaction fees

Transaction fees (unamortised balance)

Net debt at 31 December (excluding transaction fees)

2020 
£m

(51.6)
(5.0)

(56.6)

7.3
7.4
9.2
0.8
35.3

3.4
27.6
34.6
0.1

65.7

0.1

65.8

2020 
£m

(67.9)

58.1
(43.0)
29.7
2.9
5.9

(14.3)

24.5
(13.0)
(5.5)
(20.0)

(14.0)

(0.3)

(14.3)

2019
Restated 
£m

(44.4)
(3.7)

(48.1)

8.2
7.3
10.9
–
22.3

0.6
24.6
(23.8)

–

1.4

0.2

1.6

2019 
£m

(74.2)

1.9
–
–
2.0
2.4

(67.9)

25.0
(6.4)
(8.4)
(78.1)

(67.9)

–

(67.9)

The movements in net debt, excluding transaction fees, can be further summarised as follows:

Overdrafts
 £m

Lease  
liabilities  
£m

Revolving  
credit facility
 £m

Receivables 
Finance  
Facility 
£m

Movements  
from financing 
activities
£m

Net debt as at 1 January 2019
Cash flows during the year
Non-cash movements in leases

Net debt at 31 December 2019

Cash flows during the year
Non-cash movements in leases

Net debt at 31 December 2020

–
(6.4)
–

(6.4)

6.4
–

–

(10.4)
3.2
(1.2)

(8.4)

2.9
(0.2)

(5.5)

(80.0)
1.9
–

(78.1)

58.1
–

–
–
–

–

(13.3)

–

(90.4)
(1.3)
(1.2)

(92.9)

54.3
(0.2)

Cash
 £m

16.2
8.8
–

25.0

(0.5)
–

Total 
£m

(74.2)
7.5
(1.2)

(67.9)

53.6
(0.2)

(20.0)

(13.3)

(38.8)

24.5

(14.3)

Governance

111

30 Acquisition of businesses – cash paid; net of cash acquired
Cash flows in relation to the seven acquisitions made during 2018 are as follows:

Consideration paid

Acquisition of businesses per cash flow – investing activities
Debt facilities acquired – financing activities

Acquisition of businesses 

2020 
Total
acquisitions 
£m

2019 
Total 
acquisitions 
£m

0.3

0.3
–

0.3

7.2

7.2
–

7.2

31 Capital management policies and procedures
The Board’s current priorities for the Group’s free cash flow are to fund Group development and maintain the strength of the Statement 
of financial position. The Group’s overall strategy remains unchanged from last year in that it manages its capital to ensure that the 
Group will be able to continue as a going concern through the economic cycle.

The capital structure of the Group consists of net debt, which is represented by cash and cash equivalents (note 18), bank loans, 
overdrafts and revolving credit facilities (note 19) and equity attributable to equity holders of the parent, comprising issued share 
capital, reserves and retained earnings as disclosed in the consolidated statement of changes in equity. 

The only restrictions on the Group’s capital relates to the covenants attached to the debt facilities.

In December 2019, the Company agreed an amendment to the Credit Facilities which included: 
i)  The deferral of testing covenants at December 2019; and 
ii)  The agreement to waive any potential covenant breaches and defaults arising as a result of the prior year adjustments. 

Subsequently, between January and May 2020, the Company agreed amendments to the Credit Facilities which included further 
deferrals of covenant testing and the reporting of such testing.

The lenders agreed to a waiver of all quarterly financial covenant tests for the quarter ending 30 June 2019, as part of the amendments 
to the facilities made in the year. 

The Group has covenants attached to its banking facilities. Following the June 2020 refinancing, the main covenants are minimum 
EBITDA and minimum liquidity covenants until a return to minimum leverage, interest and asset cover covenants in January 2022.

32 Changes in accounting policies
There were no new accounting pronouncements requiring adoption in the year and no changes to accounting policies. 

33 Post balance sheet events
With the exception of the following, there were no events not disclosed elsewhere, between the balance sheet date of 31 December 
2020 and the approval of these accounts on 21 June 2020, that are required to be brought to the attention of shareholders:

A number of Board changes occurred after the balance sheet date, as disclosed in the Corporate Governance Statement and 
Directors’ Report.

The Group Continues to maintain its isolation, distancing and sanitation measures in accordance with national guidelines in order to 
reduce the effects of Covid-19. The pandemic is continuing to affect the Group’s operations across all business areas and 
geographically.

The Group successfully completed a debt refinancing exercise with new lenders which completed on 10 June 2021. Alongside the debt 
refinancing the Company issued 96,837,242 new shares via an Open offer, Subscription and Placing which completed on the same 
date. Further details of the refinancing are given in notes 3 and 20 and details of the share issue are given in note 24.

Strategic ReportFinancial Statements112

Staffline Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2020

Staffline Group plc

Staffline Group plc
Unaudited five year summary of financial data

Comprehensive income

Turnover
Underlying operating (loss)/profit
% margin
Operating (loss)/profit
Net (loss)/profit after taxation
Underlying (loss)/earnings per share (diluted) 
Declared dividend per share 
Dividend cover v underlying diluted EPS

Financial position

Goodwill
Intangible assets
Property, plant and equipment
Trade and other receivables
Cash and cash equivalents
Restricted cash
Trade and other payables
Borrowings (excl deal fees)
Lease liabilities (IFRS 16)
Deferred tax net liability
Other (net liabilities)

Net assets

Net debt, pre-IFRS 16, excluding deal fees

Goodwill, intangibles

Other net assets

Cash flows

Underlying operating (loss)/profit
Loss on discontinued activities
Non-underlying cash costs
Depreciation, amortisation
Working capital movements
Capital expenditure, inc. software
Taxation paid (net)

Adjusted free cash from operations1

Dividends and interest paid
Business acquisitions inc. debt acquired
Payment into restricted fund
Issue of share capital, share sales (net)
Others 

Reduction/(increase) in net debt

Unaudited five-year 
summary of financial 
data

Financial reporting years ended 31 December £m

2020

2019  
Restated

2018  
Restated

2017  
Restated

927.6
4.8
0.5%
(44.3)
(52.7)
5.0p
n/a
n/a

59.6
24.3
9.6
106.5
24.5
0.9

(153.3)
(33.0)
(5.5)
0.9
(12.3)

22.2

(8.8)

83.9

(52.9)

4.8
(5.0)
(4.5)
8.2
62.2
(2.4)
(0.5)

62.8

(8.5)
(0.3)
–
–
0.1

54.1

1,063.0
2.9
0.3%
(36.2)
(44.0)
(2.4)p
n/a
n/a

1,120.9
32.8
2.9%
(14.7)
(16.0)
88.3p
11.3p
n/a

957.8
38.0
4.0%
25.8
17.5
108.3p
26.7p
4.1x

94.9
34.0
14.6
137.7
25.0
12.7
(126.4)
(84.5)
(8.4)
(3.3)
(20.5)

75.8

(59.5)

128.9

6.4

2.9
(3.7)
(5.7)
7.3
0.8
(5.1)
(1.1)

(4.6)

(6.0)
(7.2)
(12.7)
38.0
–

7.5

117.2
42.9
7.6
159.5
16.2
–

(143.4)
(80.0)

–
(5.8)
(31.4)

82.8

(63.8)

160.1

(13.2)

32.8
–

(30.2)
4.8
12.8
(6.4)
(6.4)

7.4

(9.8)
(49.6)

–
5.0
–

(47.0)

94.2
20.8
7.7
107.7
31.3
–

(103.4)
(48.1)

–
(2.1)
(14.2)

93.9

(16.8)

115.0

(4.3)

38.0
–
–
4.4
5.5
(3.8)
(6.2)

37.9

(9.3)
(8.5)
–
0.3
–

20.4

2016

882.4
40.0
4.5%
22.2
14.7
114.0p
25.8p
4.4x

91.6
25.8
8.0
103.1
19.7
–

(97.5)
(56.9)

–
(2.6)
(7.5)

83.7

(37.2)

117.4

3.5

40.0
–
(6.6)
4.9
8.7
(6.9)
(4.0)

36.1

(8.9)
(1.9)
–
1.5
(0.3)

26.5

Comparative results for the year ended 31 December 2019 have been restated for the removal of the activities that were discontinued in 2020.

1  Being free cash from operations as adjusted for the settlement of JSOP liabilities.

Strategic 
Report

Governance

Financial 
Statements

113

Company details

Company registration number:
05268636

Registered office:
19 – 20 The Triangle
NG2 Business Park
Nottingham
NG2 1AE

Directors:
Ian Lawson (Non-Executive Chairman)
Albert Ellis (Chief Executive Officer)
Daniel Quint (Chief Financial Officer)
Richard Thomson (Senior Independent Non-Executive Director)
Ian Starkey (Non-Executive Director)
Catherine Lynch (Non-Executive Director)

Secretary:
Louise Barber FCG

Company website:
www.stafflinegroupplc.co.uk

Investor relations contact details:
investors@staffline.co.uk

Nominated advisor and broker:
Liberum Capital
Ropemaker Place
25 Ropemaker Street
London
EC2Y 9LY

Registrars:
Computershare Investor Services plc
PO Box 859
The Pavilions
Bridgewater Road
Bristol
BS99 1XZ 

Bankers:
Lloyds Bank plc
33 Old Broad Street
London
BX2 1LB

HSBC Bank plc
Grove Park
Penman Way
Enderby
LE19 1SY

Bank of Ireland Group plc
40 Mespil Road
Dublin 4
Republic of Ireland

Solicitors:
DLA Piper UK LLP
160 Aldersgate Street
London
EC1A 4HT

Statutory auditors:
Grant Thornton UK LLP
Chartered Accountants and Statutory Auditors
30 Finsbury Square
London
EC2A 1AG

Financial and trade public relations:
Vigo Consulting Limited
Sackville House 
40 Piccadilly 
London
W1J 0DR

S

t

a

f

f

l

i

n

e

G

r

o

u

p

p

l

c

A

n

n

u

a

l

R

e

p

o

r

t

a

n

d

A

c

c

o

u

n

t

s

2

0

2

0

Registered office
19 – 20 The Triangle
NG2 Business Park
Nottingham, NG2 1AE